User`s Guide Bull NovaScale T880 - Support On Line

User`s Guide Bull NovaScale T880 - Support On Line
Bull NovaScale T880
User’s Guide
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
User Guide
www.bull.com
10
Proprietary Notice and Liability Disclaimer
The information disclosed in this document, including all designs and related materials,
is the valuable property of NEC Computers and/or its licensors. NEC Computers and/
or its licensors, as appropriate, reserve all patent, copyright and other proprietary rights
to this document, including all design, manufacturing, reproduction, use, and sales
rights thereto, except to the extent said rights are expressly granted to others.
To allow for design and specification improvements, the information in this document
is subject to change at any time, without notice. Reproduction of this document or
portions thereof without prior written approval of NEC Computers is prohibited.
The Bull product(s) discussed in this document are warranted in accordance with the
terms of the Warranty Statement accompanying each product. However, actual
performance of each product is dependent upon factors such as system configuration,
customer data, and operator control. Since implementation by customers of each
product may vary, the suitability of specific product configurations and applications
must be determined by the customer and is not warranted by Bull.
Trademarks
NEC ESMPRO, NEC DianaScope, NEC MWA, and ExpressBuilder are trademarks or
registered trademarks of NEC Corporation.
NovaScale is a registered trademark of Bull SAS.
Adobe, and Adobe Acrobat are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems, Incorporated.
Microsoft, Microsoft Windows, Windows NT, Windows 95, Windows 98, Windows
2000 and Windows Server 2003 are all registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
MS-DOS is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation.
Intel and Xeon are registered trademarks of Intel Corporation.
All other product, brand, or trade names used in this publication are the trademarks or
registered trademarks of their respective trademark owners.
rev 1.00 November 2006
Copyright 2006
NEC Computers S.A.S.
All Rights Reserved
3
This page is intentionally left blank.
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
Keep this User’s Guide at hand for quick reference at anytime necessary.
SAFETY INDICATIONS
Follow the instructions in this User’s Guide for your safety to use the server.
The server contains components with possible danger, hazards that may cause by ignoring warnings, and preventive
actions against such hazards.
Server components with possible danger are indicated with a warning label placed on or around them as well as
described in this User’s Guide.
In the User’s Guide or warning labels, "WARNING" or "CAUTION" is used to indicate a degree of danger. These terms
are defined as follows:
WARNING
Indicates the presence of a hazard that may result in death or serious personal injury.
CAUTION
Indicates the presence of a hazard that may cause minor personal injury, including
burns, or property damage.
Precautions and notices against hazards are presented with one of the following three symbols. The individual symbols
are defined as follows:
This symbol indicates the presence of a hazard.
An image in the symbol illustrates the hazard type. (Attention)
This symbol indicates prohibited actions. An image in the symbol illustrates a particular prohibited
action. (Prohibited Action)
This symbol indicates mandatory actions. An image in the symbol illustrates a mandatory action to
avoid a particular hazard. (Mandatory Action)
(Example)
Symbol to draw attention
Term indicating a degree of danger
CAUTION
High temperature.
Immediately after the server is powered off, its internal components such as hard disks are
very hot. Leave the server until its internal components fully cool down before
installing/removing any component.
Symbol indicating a prohibited
action (may not always be
indicated)
Description of the danger
i
ii
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
SYMBOLS USED IN THIS USER'S GUIDE AND WARNING LABELS
Attentions
Indicates that improper use may cause an electric shock.
Indicates that improper use may cause personal injury.
Indicates that improper use may cause fingers to be caught.
Indicates that improper use may cause the clip of a hand.
Indicates that improper use may cause fumes or fire.
Indicates a general notice or warning that cannot be specifically identified.
Indicates that improper use may cause loss of eyesight due to laser beam.
Prohibited Actions
Indicates a general prohibited action that cannot be specifically identified.
Do not disassemble, repair, or modify the server. Otherwise, an electric shock or fire may be caused.
Mandatory Action
Unplug the power cord of the server. Otherwise, an electric shock or fire may be caused.
Indicates a mandatory action that cannot be specifically identified. Make sure to follow the
instruction.
SAFETY INDICATIONS BY COLOUR OF THE PARTS
Only green area is available for hot swap or hot plug operation. To avoid electric shock, disconnect all AC power cords
before accessing to other parts especially blue area inside the system.
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
iii
NOTE: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to
Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when
the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful
interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful
interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.
CE Statement
Warning: This is a Class A product. In domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case
the user may be required to take adequate measures (EN55022).
CLASS 1
LASER PRODUCT
This system is classified as a CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT. This
label is located on the internal optical disk drive installed in your
system.
iv
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
Momentary voltage drop prevention:
This product may be affected by a momentary voltage drop caused by lightning. To prevent a momentary voltage drop,
an AC uninterruptible power supply (UPS) unit should be used.
PREFACE
Welcome to the Bull NovaScale T880 server.
The Bull NovaScale server holds powerful performance and employs the latest technology to implement a computer for
the next generation. With its potential capabilities, the server may be used as a workstation PC that configures a
client-server system and provides high-speed processing and superior reliability.
Read this User’s Guide thoroughly to fully understand handling of the server and appreciate its functions to the
maximum extent.
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
v
ABOUT THIS USER'S GUIDE
This User’s Guide is a guide for proper setup and use of the server.
This User’s Guide also covers useful procedures for dealing with difficulties and problems that may arise during setup
or operation of the server. Keep this manual for future use.
The following describes how to proceed with this User’s Guide.
How to Use This User's Guide
To aid you in finding information quickly, this User’s Guide contains the following information:
Chapter 1 Notes on Using Your Server
includes information that needs attention when using the server. Make sure to read this chapter before setting
up and using the server.
Chapter 2 General Description
includes information necessary to use the server, such as names and functions of its components, handling of
the floppy disk and optical disk drives. It also includes requirements and advisory information for transfer and
disposal of the server.
Chapter 3 Setting Up Your Server
tells you how to select a site, unpack the system, make cable connections, and power on your system.
Chapter 4 Configuring Your Server
tells you how to configure the system and provides instructions for running the BIOS Setup Utility and the Disk
Array Configuration Utility, which is used to configure SAS devices in your system. This chapter also provides
information on I/O board jumper settings.
Chapter 5 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup
describes how to install the operating system.
Chapter 6 Installing and Using Utilities
describes how to install the utilities for the server. It also includes a description on using the attached
"EXPRESSBUILDER" CD-ROM.
Chapter 7 Maintenance
provides you with all the information necessary to maintain successful operation of the server. This chapter also
includes a description on relocating and storing the server.
Chapter 8 Troubleshooting
contains helpful information for solving problems that might occur with your system.
Chapter 9 Upgrading Your Server
provides you with instructions for upgrading your system with an additional processor, optional memory, optional
add-in cards, hard disk drives, peripheral devices, and power supply.
Appendix A Specification
provides specifications for your server.
Appendix B Other Precautions
provides supplementary notes on using the server.
vi
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
Appendix C IRQ and I/O Port Address
provides a list of factory-set IRQs and I/O port addresses assigned.
Appendix D Installing Windows Server™ 2003 x64 Editions
describes how to install Microsoft® Windows Server™ 2003 x64 Editions without using Express Setup. Using
the Express Setup tool is recommended for installing Windows Server™ 2003 x64 Editions. See Chapter 5 for
details.
Appendix E Installing Windows Server 2003
describes how to install Microsoft® Windows Server™ 2003 without using Express Setup. Using the Express
Setup tool is recommended for installing Windows Server™ 2003. See Chapter 5 for details.
Appendix F Product Configuration Record Table
provides a table to be filled with your server configuration.
Appendix G Rack Mount Kit
enables you to install the Rack Conversion Kit on the 140Hf securely and then mount the server in a rack.
Text Conventions
The following conventions are used throughout this User’s Guide. For safety symbols, see "SAFETY INDICATIONS"
provided earlier.
IMPORTANT:
Items that are mandatory or require attention when using the server.
NOTE:
Notes give important information about the material being described.
IN THE PACKAGE
The carton contains various accessories, as well as the server itself. See the packing list to make sure that you have
everything and that individual components are not damaged. If you find any component missing or damaged, contact
your service representative.
„
Store the provided accessories in a designated place for your convenience. You will need them to install
optional devices or troubleshoot the server, as well as to set it up.
„
Make a backup copy of each provided floppy disk, if any. Store the original disk as the master disk in a
designated place, and use its copy.
„
Improper use of any provided floppy disk or CD-ROM may alter your system environment. If you find
anything unclear, immediately ask your service representative for help.
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
vii
CONTENTS
Preface ......................................................................................................................................................................... iv
About This User's Guide................................................................................................................................................v
In the Package.............................................................................................................................................................. vi
Chapter 1 ........................................................................................................................... 1-1
Notes on Using Your Server ............................................................................................ 1-1
Warning Labels.......................................................................................................................................................... 1-2
Safety Notes............................................................................................................................................................... 1-3
General .................................................................................................................................................................. 1-3
Power Supply and Power Cord Use ...................................................................................................................... 1-4
Installation, Relocation, Storage, and Connection................................................................................................. 1-5
Cleaning and Working with Internal Devices........................................................................................................ 1-6
During Operation .................................................................................................................................................. 1-7
For Proper Operation ................................................................................................................................................. 1-8
Transfer to Third Party............................................................................................................................................... 1-9
Consumables............................................................................................................................................................ 1-10
Disposal of the Server.............................................................................................................................................. 1-10
User Support............................................................................................................................................................ 1-11
Chapter 2 ........................................................................................................................... 2-1
General Description ......................................................................................................... 2-1
Overview ................................................................................................................................................................... 2-2
External View........................................................................................................................................................ 2-3
Front View (with the Front Door Open)................................................................................................................ 2-4
Front View (Switches and EXPRESSSCOPE Monitor)........................................................................................ 2-5
Rear View.............................................................................................................................................................. 2-6
Internal View ......................................................................................................................................................... 2-8
I/O Board............................................................................................................................................................... 2-9
Processor Board .................................................................................................................................................. 2-10
Memory Board .................................................................................................................................................... 2-11
Management LAN Board .................................................................................................................................... 2-11
Standard Features..................................................................................................................................................... 2-12
Power Supplies.................................................................................................................................................... 2-13
Peripheral Bays ................................................................................................................................................... 2-13
Recovering BIOS Data........................................................................................................................................ 2-15
System Cooling ................................................................................................................................................... 2-15
System Board Features........................................................................................................................................ 2-16
Security ............................................................................................................................................................... 2-18
EXPRESSBUILDER .......................................................................................................................................... 2-19
NEC ESMPRO.................................................................................................................................................... 2-20
Off-line Maintenance Utility ............................................................................................................................... 2-20
System Diagnostic Utility ................................................................................................................................... 2-20
NEC DianaScope................................................................................................................................................. 2-20
Using Your Server.................................................................................................................................................... 2-21
Security Lock (Locking the Front Cover) ........................................................................................................... 2-21
POWER Switch................................................................................................................................................... 2-22
POST................................................................................................................................................................... 2-22
SLEEP Switch ..................................................................................................................................................... 2-26
Floppy Disk Drive............................................................................................................................................... 2-27
DVD-ROM Drive................................................................................................................................................ 2-29
viii
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
Chapter 3 ........................................................................................................................... 3-1
Setting Up Your Server..................................................................................................... 3-1
Setup Flow ................................................................................................................................................................. 3-2
Selecting a Site........................................................................................................................................................... 3-3
Unpacking the System ............................................................................................................................................... 3-5
Connecting Peripheral Devices.................................................................................................................................. 3-6
Connecting Power Cord............................................................................................................................................. 3-8
Turning On the Server.............................................................................................................................................. 3-10
Installing Operating System..................................................................................................................................... 3-12
Installing Utilities .................................................................................................................................................... 3-12
Making Backup Copies of System Information....................................................................................................... 3-12
Chapter 4 ........................................................................................................................... 4-1
Configuring Your Server .................................................................................................. 4-1
System BIOS ~ SETUP ~ .......................................................................................................................................... 4-1
Starting SETUP Utility .......................................................................................................................................... 4-2
Description of On-Screen Items and Key Usage ................................................................................................... 4-3
Configuration Examples ........................................................................................................................................ 4-4
Menu and Parameter Descriptions......................................................................................................................... 4-7
Disk Array Configuration ........................................................................................................................................ 4-29
RAID ................................................................................................................................................................... 4-29
Features of On-board RAID (MegaRAID ROMB) ............................................................................................. 4-34
Before Using WebBIOS ...................................................................................................................................... 4-38
Using WebBIOS .................................................................................................................................................. 4-40
Configuring Virtual Disk ..................................................................................................................................... 4-52
Operation of Various Features ............................................................................................................................. 4-64
Battery for Onboard RAID (MegaRAID ROMB) ............................................................................................... 4-75
Others .................................................................................................................................................................. 4-79
Remote Management Function ................................................................................................................................ 4-81
Default Network Settings .................................................................................................................................... 4-81
Server Setup ........................................................................................................................................................ 4-81
Configuring Management PC.............................................................................................................................. 4-82
Using Remote Management Console .................................................................................................................. 4-83
Configuring I/O Board Jumpers............................................................................................................................. 4-111
Chapter 5 ........................................................................................................................... 5-1
Installing the Operating System with Express Setup ................................................... 5-1
About Express Setup.................................................................................................................................................. 5-2
Microsoft® Windows Server™ 2003 ........................................................................................................................ 5-3
Installation Notice ................................................................................................................................................. 5-3
Setup Flow............................................................................................................................................................. 5-7
Installing Windows Server 2003............................................................................................................................ 5-8
Installing and Setting Device Drivers.................................................................................................................. 5-12
Setting for Solving Problems............................................................................................................................... 5-17
Installing Maintenance Utilities........................................................................................................................... 5-20
Updating the System - Applying Service Pack -.................................................................................................. 5-20
Making Backup Copies of System Information .................................................................................................. 5-20
Installing with the OEM-FD for Mass Storage Device........................................................................................ 5-21
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
ix
Chapter 6 ........................................................................................................................... 6-1
Installing and Using Utilities ........................................................................................... 6-1
EXPRESSBUILDER................................................................................................................................................. 6-2
EXPRESSBUILDER for DOS-Based with Local Console................................................................................... 6-4
EXPRESSBUILDER for DOS-based with Remote Console ................................................................................ 6-8
EXPRESSBUILDER for Windows-Based (Master Control Menu).................................................................... 6-10
Configuration Diskette Creator................................................................................................................................ 6-11
NEC ESMPRO ........................................................................................................................................................ 6-15
Functions and Features........................................................................................................................................ 6-15
NEC DianaScope..................................................................................................................................................... 6-16
MegaRAID Storage Manager™ (Server)................................................................................................................. 6-17
Setup with Express Setup .................................................................................................................................... 6-17
Manual Setup ...................................................................................................................................................... 6-17
MegaRAID Storage Manager™ (Management PC) ................................................................................................ 6-17
Power Console Plus ................................................................................................................................................. 6-20
Major Functions .................................................................................................................................................. 6-20
Components......................................................................................................................................................... 6-20
Server Setup ........................................................................................................................................................ 6-21
Management PC Setup ........................................................................................................................................ 6-22
BMC Online Update ................................................................................................................................................ 6-23
Hardware Requirement ....................................................................................................................................... 6-23
Installation........................................................................................................................................................... 6-23
Startup ................................................................................................................................................................. 6-25
Uninstallation ...................................................................................................................................................... 6-26
Error Messages.................................................................................................................................................... 6-27
Chapter 7 ........................................................................................................................... 7-1
Maintenance...................................................................................................................... 7-1
Making Backup Copies.............................................................................................................................................. 7-1
Cleaning the Server ............................................................................................................................................... 7-2
Cleaning the Interior.............................................................................................................................................. 7-2
Cleaning the Keyboard and Mouse ....................................................................................................................... 7-3
Cleaning CD/DVD-ROM...................................................................................................................................... 7-4
System Diagnostics.................................................................................................................................................... 7-5
Test Items .............................................................................................................................................................. 7-5
Starting and Ending the System Diagnostics......................................................................................................... 7-5
Relocating/Storing the Server.................................................................................................................................... 7-8
Chapter 8 ........................................................................................................................... 8-1
Troubleshooting ............................................................................................................... 8-1
System Viewers ......................................................................................................................................................... 8-2
EXPRESSSCOPE Monitors ...................................................................................................................................... 8-3
POWER/SLEEP Lamp.......................................................................................................................................... 8-3
STATUS Lamp ...................................................................................................................................................... 8-3
DISK ACCESS Lamp ........................................................................................................................................... 8-5
LAN1/LAN2 ACCESS Lamp ............................................................................................................................... 8-5
UID Lamp ............................................................................................................................................................. 8-5
Attention Lamp ..................................................................................................................................................... 8-6
Processor Board Error Lamp................................................................................................................................. 8-6
Memory Board Error Lamp................................................................................................................................... 8-7
I/O Board Error Lamp ........................................................................................................................................... 8-8
Power Unit Error Lamp......................................................................................................................................... 8-9
Fan Error Lamp ................................................................................................................................................... 8-10
x
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
Thermal Error Lamp............................................................................................................................................ 8-10
Access Lamps...................................................................................................................................................... 8-10
Memory Board Lamps......................................................................................................................................... 8-11
Hard Disk Drive Lamp (DISK Lamp) ................................................................................................................. 8-12
LAN Connector Lamps ....................................................................................................................................... 8-13
PCI Slot Lamps.................................................................................................................................................... 8-14
FAN Fault Lamps ................................................................................................................................................ 8-15
Error Messages ........................................................................................................................................................ 8-16
Error Messages after Power-on ........................................................................................................................... 8-16
POST Error Messages ......................................................................................................................................... 8-17
Beep Codes.......................................................................................................................................................... 8-23
Error Messages on Virtual LCD .......................................................................................................................... 8-24
Solving Problems ..................................................................................................................................................... 8-30
Problems with Server .......................................................................................................................................... 8-30
Problems with Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions ............................................................................................ 8-38
Problems with Windows Server 2003 R2 ............................................................................................................ 8-39
Problems with Windows Server 2003.................................................................................................................. 8-39
Problems with EXPRESSBUILDER................................................................................................................... 8-43
Problems with Express Setup .............................................................................................................................. 8-44
Error Message during Disk Array Configuration ................................................................................................ 8-47
Error Message for Battery for On-board RAID (MegaRAID ROMB)................................................................ 8-48
Problems with Master Control Menu .................................................................................................................. 8-50
Problems with Configuration Diskette Creator ................................................................................................... 8-50
Collecting Event Log ............................................................................................................................................... 8-51
Collecting Configuration Information...................................................................................................................... 8-52
Collecting Dr. Watson Diagnostic Information........................................................................................................ 8-53
Memory Dump......................................................................................................................................................... 8-53
Preparing for Memory Dumping ......................................................................................................................... 8-53
Saving the Dump File .......................................................................................................................................... 8-54
Recovery for Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions and Windows Server 2003 ........................................................ 8-55
Off-Line Maintenance Utility .................................................................................................................................. 8-56
Starting the Off-line Maintenance Utility ............................................................................................................ 8-56
Features of Off-line Maintenance Utility............................................................................................................. 8-57
Resetting the Server ................................................................................................................................................. 8-58
Forced Shutdown ..................................................................................................................................................... 8-58
Chapter 9 ........................................................................................................................... 9-1
Upgrading Your Server..................................................................................................... 9-1
Safety Notes............................................................................................................................................................... 9-2
Anti-static Measures .................................................................................................................................................. 9-3
Preparing for Installation and Removal ..................................................................................................................... 9-4
Device Installation or Removal Procedure ................................................................................................................ 9-5
3.5-inch Hard Disk Drive ...................................................................................................................................... 9-5
Power Supply Unit .............................................................................................................................................. 9-10
5.25-inch Device.................................................................................................................................................. 9-14
Rear Access Cover............................................................................................................................................... 9-17
PCI Access Cover ................................................................................................................................................ 9-19
PCI Board ............................................................................................................................................................ 9-20
Memory Board..................................................................................................................................................... 9-42
DIMM.................................................................................................................................................................. 9-45
Processor Board................................................................................................................................................... 9-55
Processor ............................................................................................................................................................. 9-58
Appendix A ....................................................................................................................... A-1
Specifications................................................................................................................... A-1
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
xi
Appendix B........................................................................................................................B-1
Other Precautions ............................................................................................................B-1
Transfer Rate of the On-board LAN Controller ....................................................................................................B-1
Server Management Software ...............................................................................................................................B-1
Floppy Disk...........................................................................................................................................................B-1
CD/DVD-ROM .....................................................................................................................................................B-3
Tape Media............................................................................................................................................................B-3
Keyboard ...............................................................................................................................................................B-4
Mouse....................................................................................................................................................................B-5
Appendix C........................................................................................................................C-1
IRQ and I/O Port Address ................................................................................................C-1
Appendix D........................................................................................................................D-1
Installing Windows Server™ 2003 x64 Editions............................................................D-1
Before Installing Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions.............................................................................................. D-1
Optional Boards Supported by EXPRESSBUILDER .......................................................................................... D-1
Updating System .................................................................................................................................................. D-1
Re-installing to the Hard Disk Which Has Been Upgraded to Dynamic Disk ..................................................... D-1
MO Device ........................................................................................................................................................... D-1
Media such as DAT .............................................................................................................................................. D-2
Partition Size ........................................................................................................................................................ D-2
Installing Windows Server™ 2003 x64 Editions...................................................................................................... D-3
Creating "Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition OEM-DISK for EXPRESSBUILDER"........................................ D-3
Windows Server™ 2003 x64 Editions Clean Installation .................................................................................... D-5
Updating the System ............................................................................................................................................ D-7
Driver Installation and Advanced Settings ............................................................................................................... D-8
PROSet................................................................................................................................................................. D-8
Network Driver .................................................................................................................................................... D-9
Optional Network Board Driver........................................................................................................................... D-9
Graphics Accelerator Driver................................................................................................................................D-11
Installing SCSI Controller Driver (Adaptec 29160LP) .......................................................................................D-11
Installing Disk Array Controller Driver (SecuRAID 321) ..................................................................................D-11
About Windows Activation ................................................................................................................................ D-12
Setting for Collecting Memory Dump (Debug Information)............................................................................... D-13
Appendix E........................................................................................................................ E-1
Installing Windows Server™ 2003 .................................................................................. E-1
Before Installing Windows Server™ 2003 ................................................................................................................E-1
Optional Boards Supported by EXPRESSBUILDER ...........................................................................................E-1
Installing Service Pack ..........................................................................................................................................E-1
Updating System ...................................................................................................................................................E-1
Re-installing to the Hard Disk Which Has Been Upgraded to Dynamic Disk ......................................................E-1
MO Device ............................................................................................................................................................E-2
Media such as DAT ...............................................................................................................................................E-2
About the Upgrade to Windows Server 2003 R2 ..................................................................................................E-2
Partition Size .........................................................................................................................................................E-3
Installing Windows Server 2003................................................................................................................................E-4
Creating "Windows Server 2003 OEM-DISK for EXPRESSBUILDER" ............................................................E-4
Windows Server 2003 Clean Installation ..............................................................................................................E-6
Updating the System - Applying Service Pack - ...................................................................................................E-8
Driver Installation and Advanced Settings ................................................................................................................E-9
xii
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
PROSet ..................................................................................................................................................................E-9
Network Driver....................................................................................................................................................E-10
Re-install the Network Driver .............................................................................................................................E-10
Installing SCSI Controller Driver (Adaptec 29160LP) .......................................................................................E-11
Installing Disk Array Controller Driver (SecuRAID 321)...................................................................................E-11
About Windows Activation .................................................................................................................................E-12
Available Switch Options for Windows Server 2003 Boot.ini file ......................................................................E-14
Setting for Collecting Memory Dump (Debug Information) ................................................................................E-14
Appendix F ........................................................................................................................F-1
Product Configuration Record Table ..............................................................................F-1
Hardware ...............................................................................................................................................................F-1
Software.................................................................................................................................................................F-4
Appendix G....................................................................................................................... G-1
Rack Mount Kit................................................................................................................. G-1
Notes on Installing and Accessing the Rack Cabinet............................................................................................ G-2
Rack-mount Model............................................................................................................................................... G-3
Preparing for Mounting the Server on the Rack........................................................... G-4
Cautions .................................................................................................................................................................... G-4
Step 1
Unpacking ............................................................................................................................................... G-5
Step 2
Preparing Tools........................................................................................................................................ G-7
Step 3
Turning Server Power Off ....................................................................................................................... G-8
Step 4
Removing Components for Tower Model from Server ......................................................................... G-10
Removing Front Door......................................................................................................................................... G-11
Removing Memory Slot Cover........................................................................................................................... G-11
Removing Hinge Lock Bracket .......................................................................................................................... G-12
Removing Pedestals............................................................................................................................................ G-13
Removing Top and Side Covers ......................................................................................................................... G-14
Step 5
Installing Rack Conversion Kit on Server ............................................................................................. G-15
Installing Rack Base Assembly .......................................................................................................................... G-15
Installing Rack Brackets (L and R)..................................................................................................................... G-15
Installing Handles (L and R)............................................................................................................................... G-17
Installing Memory Slot Cover ............................................................................................................................ G-17
Mounting the Server on the Rack................................................................................. G-18
Notes on Rack and Server....................................................................................................................................... G-18
Step 1
Installing Components on Rack............................................................................................................. G-19
Step 2
Mounting Server on Rack...................................................................................................................... G-22
Step 3 Installing Cable Arm and Front Bezel.......................................................................................................... G-24
Installing Cable Bracket ..................................................................................................................................... G-24
Installing Arm Bracket........................................................................................................................................ G-24
Installing Arm Stopper........................................................................................................................................ G-27
Checking Slide Installation Status and Fixing .................................................................................................... G-28
Installing Front Bezel ......................................................................................................................................... G-29
Step 4
Performing Processes from Server Power-on to Online Setting............................................................ G-30
Chapter 1
Notes on Using Your Server
This chapter includes information necessary for proper and safe operation of your server.
1-2
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
WARNING LABELS
A warning label is attached to components (or near them) that present possible danger in order to inform the user that a
hazardous situation may arise when operating the server. (Do not intentionally remove or damage any of these labels.)
If you find any label totally/partially removed or illegible due to damage, contact your sales representative.
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
1-3
SAFETY NOTES
This section provides notes on using your server safely. Read this section carefully to ensure proper and safe use of the
server. For symbols, see "SAFETY INDICATIONS" provided earlier.
General
WARNING
Do not use the server for services where critical high availability may directly affect human lives.
Your server is not intended to be used with or control facilities or devices concerning human
lives, including medical devices, nuclear facilities and devices, aeronautics and space devices,
transportation facilities and devices; and facilities and devices requiring high reliability. We
assume no liability for any accident resulting in personal injury, death, or property damage if the
server has been used in the above conditions.
Do not use the server if any smoke, odour, or noise is present.
If smoke, odour, or noise is present, immediately turn off the POWER switch and disconnect the
power plug from the outlet, then contact your service representative. Using the server in such
conditions may cause a fire.
Keep needles or metal objects away from the server.
Do not insert needles or metal objects into ventilation holes in the server or openings in the
floppy disk or optical disk drive. Doing so may cause an electric shock.
CAUTION
Keep water or foreign matter away from the server.
Do not let any form of liquid (water etc.) or foreign matter (e.g., pins or paper clips) enter the
server. Failure to follow this warning may cause an electric shock, a fire, or a failure of the
server. When such things accidentally enter the server, immediately turn off the power and
disconnect the power plug from the outlet. Do not disassemble the server. Contact your service
representative.
1-4
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
Power Supply and Power Cord Use
WARNING
Do not hold the power plug with a wet hand.
Do not disconnect/connect the plug while your hands are wet. Failure to follow this warning may
cause an electric shock.
CAUTION
Plug into a proper power source.
Use a proper wall outlet. Use of an improper power source may cause a fire or a power leak.
Do not install the server where you need an extension cord. Use of a power cord that does not
meet the power specifications of your server may heat up the cord and cause a fire.
Do not connect the power cord to an outlet that has an illegal number of connections.
The electric current exceeding the rated flow overheats the outlet, which may cause a fire.
Insert the power plug into the outlet as far as it goes.
Heat generation resulting from a halfway inserted power plug (imperfect contact) may cause a fire.
Heat will also be generated if condensation is formed on dusty blades of the halfway inserted plug,
increasing the possibility of fire.
Use an authorized power cord only.
Use only the power cord that comes with your server. Use of an unauthorized power cord may
cause a fire when the electric current exceeds the rated flow.
Also, observe the following to prevent an electric shock or fire caused by a damaged cord.
Do not stretch the cord harness.
Do not pinch the power cord.
Do not bend the power cord.
Keep chemicals away from the power cord.
Do not twist the power cord.
Do not place any object on the power cord.
Do not bundle power cords.
Do not alter, modify, or repair the power cord.
Do not secure the power cord with staples or equivalents.
Do not use any damaged power cord. (Replace a damaged power cord with a new one of the
same specifications. Ask your service representative for replacement.)
Do not use the attached power cord for any other devices or usage.
The power cord that comes with your server is designed aiming to connect with this server and
to use with the server, and its safety has been tested. Do not use the attached power cord for
any other purpose. Doing so may cause a fire or an electric shock.
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
Installation, Relocation, Storage, and Connection
CAUTION
Never attempt to lift the server only by three persons or less.
Your server weighs 75 kg (depending on its hardware configuration). Carrying the server only by
three persons or less may strain your back. Hold the server firmly by its bottom with four
persons or more to carry it. Do not hold the front door to lift the server. The front door may be
disengaged from the server, causing personal injury.
Do not install the server in any place other than specified.
Do not install the server in the following places or any place other than specified in this manual.
Failure to follow this instruction may cause a fire.
a dusty place
a humid place such as near a boiler
a place exposed to direct sunlight
an unstable place
Do not connect any interface cable with the power cord of the server plugged to a power source.
Make sure to power off the server and unplug the power cord from the power outlet before
installing/removing any optional internal device or connecting/disconnecting any interface cable
to/from the server. If the server is off-powered but its power cord is plugged to a power source,
touching an internal device, cable, or connector may cause an electric shock or a fire resulted
from a short circuit.
Do not use any unauthorized interface cable.
Use only interface cables provided by us and locate a proper device and connector before
connecting a cable. Using an authorised cable or connecting a cable to an improper destination
may cause a short circuit, resulting in a fire.
Also, observe the following notes on using and connecting an interface cable.
Do not use any damaged cable connector.
Do not step on the cable.
Do not place any object on the cable.
Do not use the server with loose cable connections.
Do not use the equipment in the place where corrosive gases exist.
Make sure not to locate or use the server in the place where corrosive gases (sulphur dioxide,
hydrogen sulphide, nitrogen dioxide, chlorine, ammonia, ozone, etc) exist.
Also, do not set it in the environment where the air (or dust) includes components accelerating
corrosion (ex. sulphur, sodium chloride) or conductive metals. There is a risk of a fire due to
corrosion and shorts of an internal printed board.
Do not provide the wiring for the server to exceed the rating of the power supply.
To prevent burns, fires, and device damages, the power supplied to the server shall not exceed
the rating load of the power branch circuit. The server requires three or four Power Cords
(depending on your configuration). Connect each power cord to each appropriate Wall Outlet
provided with 20A branch circuit. Contact your electric constructor or the local power company
for the requirements on the wiring and installation of electric facilities.
1-5
1-6
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
Cleaning and Working with Internal Devices
WARNING
Do not disassemble, repair, or alter the server.
Never attempt to disassemble, repair, or alter the server on any occasion other than described
in this manual. Failure to follow this instruction may cause an electric shock or fire as well as
malfunctions of the server.
Do not look into the optical disk drive.
A laser beam used in the optical disk drive is harmful to the eyes. Do not look into or insert a
mirror into the drive while the drive is powered. If a laser beam is caught in your eyes, you may
lose your eyesight (the laser beam is invisible).
Do not remove the lithium and NiMH batteries.
Your server contains lithium and NiMH batteries. Do not remove the battery. Danger of
explosion if the battery is incorrectly replaced. Placing the battery close to a fire or in the water
may cause an explosion.
When the server does not operate appropriately due to dead lithium and/or NiMH batteries,
contact your service representative to replace it only with the same or equivalent type
recommended by us. Do not disassemble the server to replace or recharge the battery by
yourself.
Disconnect all the power plugs before accessing inside the server, or connecting the
peripherals.
The server has two power cords.
Make sure to power off the server and disconnect all power plugs from the power outlets before
cleaning or installing/removing internal optional devices. Touching any internal device of the
server with its power cords connected to a power source may cause an electric shock even of
the server is off-powered.
Disconnect all the power plugs from the outlet occasionally and clean the plug with a dry cloth.
Heat will be generated if condensation is formed on a dusty plug, which may cause a fire.
CAUTION
High temperature
Immediately after the server is powered off, its internal components such as hard disks are very
hot. Leave the server until its internal components fully cool down before installing/removing any
component.
Make sure to complete board installation.
Always install a board firmly. An incompletely installed board may cause a contact failure,
resulting in smoke or fire.
Protect the unused connectors with a protective cap.
The unused power supply cable connectors are covered with a protective cap to prevent short
circuits and electrical hazards. When removing the power supply cable connector from the
internal devices, attach a protective cap to the connector. Failure to follow this warning may
cause a fire or an electric shock.
Do not touch any electrical component inside the server during the hot-swap replacement.
All power flows inside the server during the hot-swap of replaceable components (PCI add-in
cards, hard disk, cooling fan, and power supply). Do not touch the electrical components inside
the server to avoid an electric shock.
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
During Operation
CAUTION
Avoid contact with the server during thunderstorms.
Disconnect all power plugs from the outlets when a thunderstorm is approaching. If it starts
thundering before you disconnect the all power plugs, do not touch any part of the server
including the cables. Failure to follow this warning may cause a fire or an electric shock.
Keep animals away from the server.
Failure to follow this warning may cause a fire or an electric shock.
Do not place any object on top of the server.
An object placed on top of the server may fall down, resulting in damage to your property
around the server.
Do not use a cellular phone or pager around the server.
Turn off the cellular phone or pager. Radio interference may cause malfunctions of the server.
Do not remove the cooling fans.
Only an authorized service technician can remove the cooling fans from the server.
1-7
1-8
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
FOR PROPER OPERATION
Observe the following notes for successful operation of the server. Use of the server ignoring these notes will cause
malfunctions or failures of the server.
„
Install the server in a place that meets requirements for successful operation. For details, see Chapter 3,
"Setting Up Your Server."
„
Do not delete the hard disk partition exclusively provided for maintenance of the server although it may
appear on the operating system.
„
Make sure to power off the server before connecting or disconnecting cables between the server and
peripheral devices.
„
Verify that the access lamp on the server is unlit before turning off the server or ejecting the floppy disk.
„
The server management logic on your system board monitors and logs system voltage changes. When
plugging the power cord to the system, you may experience 10 seconds delay from the time you press the
POWER switch on the front panel. This is normal system operation and is required by the server management
logic.
„
When you have just turned off the server, wait at least 30 seconds before turning it back on.
„
Do not turn off the server until characters following our logo appear on the screen.
„
Turn off the power and unplug the power cord from the outlet before relocating the server.
„
Some software includes a command to eject the CD/DVD-ROM tray. Make sure that the front door is opened
before running the command. Running this command with the front door closed may cause the
CD/DVD-ROM tray or the media to hit against the front door, resulting in a failure of the server.
„
Clean the server on a regular basis. (See Chapter 7 for cleaning.) Regular cleaning proactively prevents
various failures of the server.
„
Lightning may cause a momentary voltage drop. To prevent this problem, it is recommended to use an
uninterruptible power supply unit.
„
Check and adjust the system clock before the operation if any of the following conditions is applicable.
„
– After transport of the server
– After storage of the server
– After the server is entered into the pause state under the environmental condition enduring the server
operation (temperature: 10°C to 35°C, humidity: 20% to 80%)
Check the system clock at the rough rate of once per month. When the system clock is installed in a system
requiring high time precision, it is recommended to use a time server (NTP server).
If the system clock is remarkably delayed or advanced as the passage of time in spite of adjustment, contact
your service representative to ask for maintenance.
„
Store the unit under the storage condition (temperature: -10°C to 55°C, humidity: 20% to 80%, without
condensation) to allow built-in devices and the unit to operate correctly in the next operation.
„
Make sure to use optional devices supported by the server. Some non-supported devices may be physically
installed/connected but cause failures of the server as well as malfunctions of the server.
„
We recommend you use our genuine products. Some third-party products claim that they support the server.
However, repair of the server due to a failure or damage resulting from use of such third-party products will
be charged.
„
Playback of disks that do not conform to CD/DVD-ROM standards with the optical disk drive is not
guaranteed.
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
1-9
TRANSFER TO THIRD PARTY
The following must be observed when you transfer (or sell) the server or software provided with the server to a third
party:
Bull NovaScale server
Make sure to provide this manual along with the server to a third party.
IMPORTANT: About data on the hard disk
Be sure to take appropriate measures not to leak important data (e.g., customers'
information or companies' management information) on the removed hard disk to any third
parties.
Data seems to be erased when you empty "Recycle Bin" of Windows or execute the
"format" command of the operating system. However, the actual data remains written on
the hard disk. Data not erased completely may be restored by special software and used for
unexpected purposes.
It is strongly recommended that the software or service (both available at stores) for data
erasure should be used in order to avoid the trouble explained above. For details on data
erasure, ask your sales representative.
Provided software
To transfer or sell any software application that comes with the server to a third party, the following requirements must
be satisfied:
„
All provided software applications must be transferred and no backup copies must be retained.
„
Transfer requirements listed in "Software License Agreement" that comes with each software application must
be satisfied.
„
Software applications that are not approved for transfer must be uninstalled before transferring the server.
1-10
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
CONSUMABLES
Your server contains some components that are only good for a limited period of time and require replacement, such as
batteries, fans, the internal optical disk drive, the floppy disk drive, and the mouse. For stable operation of the server,
we recommend you replace these components on a regular basis. Contact your service representative for replacement or
the product.
DISPOSAL OF THE SERVER
Dispose of the server, all the internal devices, floppy disks, and optical disk drives according to all national laws and
regulations. Also dispose of the power cord provided with the server to avoid diversion to some other devices.
IMPORTANT: For disposal (or replacement) of the battery on the IO board of the server,
contact your service representative.
NOTE: If the real-time clock battery on the I/O board reaches its life, the following
message appears on the display while running the POST. Contact your service
representative to replace the battery.
0250 System battery is dead –Replace and run SETUP
WARNING
Do not remove the lithium and NiMH batteries.
Your server contains lithium or NiMH batteries. Do not remove any battery. Danger of explosion
if the battery is incorrectly replaced. Placing the lithium or NiMH battery close to a fire or in the
water may cause an explosion.
When the server does not operate appropriately due to the failure of lithium and/or NiMH
batteries, contact your service representative to replace them only with the same or equivalent
type recommended by us. Do not disassemble the server to replace or recharge the battery by
yourself.
Lithium battery
NiMH battery
IO board
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
1-11
USER SUPPORT
When the server needs after-sales service, check if the warranty is still valid, and determine which service is necessary
as indicated on the "Certificate".
Before asking for repair, do the following when the server appears to fail:
1.
Check if the power cord and the cables to other devices are properly connected.
2.
See Chapter 8 to find if your problem fits the description. If it does, take the recommended measure for it.
3.
Check if the software required for operation of the server is properly installed.
4.
Check the server using a computer virus detection program. Computer virus detection programs are available
for purchase in stores.
If the server still appears to fail after you have taken the above actions, contact your service representative immediately.
Take notes on lamp indications of the server and alarm indications on the display unit before, it may provide a
significant help to your service representative.
When Having Your Server Repaired
Prepare the following when having your server repaired:
„
Certificate
„
Notes of the messages displayed on the display unit
„
Error information*
„
Records of the Bull NovaScale server and peripheral equipment
* Error information includes the Error Message shown in Chapter 8.
Prepare the error information only when required by your service representative.
1-12
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
Setting Up a Healthy Work Environment
The longer you keep using the computer equipment, the more you become tired, which may
cause disorders of your body. When you use a computer, observe the following to keep
yourself from getting tired:
Good Working Posture
You have good posture if the following are satisfied when you use a computer:
• You sit on a chair with your back straight.
• Your hands are parallel with the floor when you put them on the keyboard.
• You look at the screen slightly lower than your eye height.
You have "good working posture" as described in the above when no part of your body is
under excess strain, in other words when your muscles are most relaxed.
You have "bad posture" when you sit with your back hunched up or you operate a display
unit with your face close to the screen. Bad working posture may cause eye strain or poor
eyesight.
Display Unit Angles Adjustment
Most display units are designed for adjustment of the horizontal and vertical angles. This
adjustment is important to prevent the screen from reflecting bright lights and to make the
display contents easy to see. You will not be able to keep "good working posture" and you
will feel more tired than you should if you operate a display unit without adjusting horizontal
and vertical angles.
Screen Brightness and Contrast Adjustment
The display unit has brightness and contrast adjustment functions. The most suitable
brightness and contrast depend on the individual and the working environment (well-lighted
room or insufficient light). Adjust brightness and contrast so that the screen will be easy to
see. An extremely bright or dark screen will give a bad effect to your eyes.
Keyboard slope Adjustment
The keyboard provided with the server is designed for slope adjustment. Adjust the
keyboard angle at which the keyboard is easy to operate. The adjustment assists in
reducing strain on your shoulders, arms, and fingers.
Equipment Cleaning
Clean equipment regularly. It is difficult to see the display contents on a dusty screen.
Keeping equipment clean is also important for your sight.
Fatigue and Rest
If you feel tired, you should stop working and do light exercises.
Chapter 2
General Description
This chapter provides information that you should be familiar with before using the server. It includes names and
functions of the components and features of the server.
2-2
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
OVERVIEW
Your server is a highly reliable, high-powered, fault-tolerant, high-capacity, multiprocessing server based on the 64-bit
Intel® Xeon™ Processor MP or on the Dual-Core Intel® Xeon™ Processor, depending on the model. It is a solid
performer and offers the latest technology. The combination of computing performance, memory capacity, and
integrated I/O provides a high performance environment for many server market applications. These range from large
corporations supporting remote offices to small companies looking to obtain basic connectivity capability such as file
and print services, e-mail, web access, web site server, etc.
Your server includes a 3.5-inch diskette drive, an optical disk drive, a 3.5-inch hard disk bay, and a removable media
device bay. In the basic configuration, the 3.5-inch hard disk bay supports up to five 1.0-inch SAS hard disk drives that
can be swapped in or out of the system without powering it down, if RAID functionality is configured in the system. If
the additional hard disk drive cage is installed in your server, the 3.5-inch hard disk bay supports up to thirteen 1.0-inch
SAS hard disk drives.
As application requirements increase, you can expand your server with an additional processor, additional memory,
add-in boards and peripheral devices: tape devices, optical disk drive, and hard disk drives.
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
2-3
External View
1
3
4
1
2
3
4
2
Front door
Open the front door when you access to the POWER switch, the 5.25-inch device, the optical disk drive, or the
optional USB floppy disk drive or install or remove a hard disk drive, processor, memory board, and/or the DIMM.
Key slot
Insert the security key to lock or unlock the front door.
Rear access cover
Open the rear access cover to install or remove the PCI boards and fans.
Stabilizer (2 each side at front and rear)
Remove the stabilizers when converting the server to rack-mounting model.
2-4
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
Front View (with the Front Door Open)
See "Lamps" described later.
1
2
3
5
8
7-3
1-1
2-1
2-2
1-2
7-4
4
3-0
2-3
4
7-2
1-3
3-1
6-5
3-2
6-4
6-3
6-2
6-1
4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
3-3
3-4
5-1
6
3.5-inch floppy disk drive
Insert a 3.5-inch floppy disk to the 3.5-inch floppy disk drive to read data from the disk or write data to the disk.
1-1: Eject button
1-2: Disk slot
1-3: Floppy disk access lamp (lights green when accessing)
CD-ROM drive
The optical disk drive reads data from the inserted CD/DVD-ROM.
2-1: Emergency eject hole - 2-2: CD/DVD Tray eject button - 2-3: Access lamp lights orange when accessing)
3.5-inch hard disk drive bay
The 3.5-inch hard disk drive bay contains additional hard disk slots. Hard disk drives having the thickness of 1
inch can be inserted into the slots. The number following the bold-faced character indicates the slot number.
DISK lamp
Processor board
5-1: Processor board ejector
Memory board
6-1: Memory board ejector - 6-2: Memory board power lamp - 6-3: Memory board attention lamp
6-4: Memory board redundancy lamp - 6-5: Memory board attention switch
Additional memory board slot
The number following the bold-faced character indicates the slot number.
Additional memory board shall be installed in the slot #2, #3, and then #4 in this order.
5.25-inch device bay
DAT (digital audio tape) drive or optical disk drive may be installed in the 5.25-inch device bays. Slot #1 (right)
and slot #2 (left).
Additional 3.5-inch disk bay
Install the optional HotSwap HDD cage in this bay. With the cage, up to thirteen hard disk drives can be
connected to the server.
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
2-5
Front View (Switches and EXPRESSSCOPE Monitor)
1
2
3
4
5 to 10 from left
18
11 to 17 from left
19
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
POWER switch
The power switch is used to turn on/off the power. If you press the switch once, then the POWER/SLEEP lamp
goes on and the power is turned on. If you press the switch again, the power is turned off. The system is forcibly
shut down when the power switch is pressed continuously for four seconds or longer.
RESET switch
The reset switch is used to reset the server.
SLEEP switch
If you press the sleep switch once, the server enters into the sleep state (power saving mode). If you press the
switch again, the server recovers to the normal state. Windows Server 2003 supports this feature.
UID (Unit ID) switch
Pressing the UID switch turns UID lamp (blue) located on the front panel and the rear panel on and off.
POWER/SLEEP lamp
STATUS lamp
DISK ACCESS lamp
LAN1 access lamp
LAN2 access lamp
UID (Unit ID lamp)
DUMP lamp
Processor board error lamp
Memory board error lamp
I/O board error lamp
Power unit error lamp
Fan error lamp
Thermal error lamp
DUMP switch
The dump switch is used to collect the event logs having occurred in the server.
CLEAR switch
2-6
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
Rear View
8
1-4
7
1-3
1-2
1-1
2
10
9
11
12
14
13-2
13-1
15
17
16-2
18
21
20
19
16-1
3-4
17
3-3
3-2
18
3-1
6
5
4
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
2-7
Power supply units
The power supply unit supplies DC power to the server. The factory-installed power supply units are installed in
slots 1 and 2, and slots 3 and 4 are for optional power supply units in a power redundant configuration.
AC inlet
The AC inlet is connected with the power cord. Each power supply unit has one socket. Use the provided power
cord.
Additional PCI board slot
3-1: 64bit/100MHz, hot-plug PCI-X
3-2: Hot-plug PCI-Express (x8)
3-3: Non-hot-plug PCI-Express (x4)
3-4: 32-bit/33MHz, non-hot-plug PCI
PCI slot Fault lamp
PCI slot POWER lamp
PCI slot error lamp
Mouse connector
Used to connect the optional mouse.
Keyboard connector
Used to connect the optional keyboard.
Printer port connector
Used to connect a printer with a Centronics interface.
Serial port A connector
Serial port A connector is used to connect the server to a device with a serial interface. The server cannot be
directly connected to a leased line through this connector.
Serial port B connector
To be used exclusively with the serial port B connector on the front panel.
Management LAN Port
ICMB connector
Used to connect a device having ICMB interface. The number following the bold-faced character shows the port
number.
Monitor connector
Used to connect the display unit.
USB connector
Used to connect a device with an USB interface.
LAN connector
Used to connect a network system on LAN.
The number following the bold-faced character shows the port number.
LINK/ACT lamp
1000/100/10 lamp
BMC error lamp
Processor board error lamp
I/O board error lamp
2-8
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
Internal View
1
2
3
4
1
Power supply cage
2
Non-hot-plug PCI slot
3
Hot-plug PCI slot
4
Fan bay
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
I/O Board
17
8 5
14
13 10 12
9-6 9-3
1
11-6
11-3
11-2
9-2
9-5
11-5
11-4
11-1
2
3 4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
16
6
7
15
9-4 9-1
Connectors for external devices
PCI slot error lamps (corresponds to PCI slots #1 to #9 from top)
PCI slot power lamps (upper) / PCI slot Fault lamps (lower)
(corresponds to PCI slots #4 to #9 from top)
PCI board slots (PCI slots #1 to #9 from top)
Slots 1, 2: Non-hot-plug PCI, 5V, 33MHz
Slots 4 and 5: Hot-plug PCI-Express (x8)
Slot 3: Non-hot-plug PCI-Express (x4)
Slots 6 to 9: Hot-plug PCI-X, 3.3V, 100MHz
IPMB connector
BMC configuration jumper block
Jumper switch for CMOS/Password clear
Management LAN board connector
Fan connectors
Number following the bold-faced number indicates port number.
SAS connectors
Ch-2 and Ch-1 from left
Fan error lamps
Number following the bold-faced number indicates fan number.
Power BP connector
Lithium battery
DIMM connector for RAID
NiMH battery module for RAID
Battery module connector
LAN controller
2-9
2-10
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
Processor Board
1-1
2-1
1-2
3-1 3-2
1-4
2-2
2-4
1-3
3-4 3-3
2-3
1
VRM (Number following the bold-faced character indicates the socket number.)
2
Processors (Number following the bold-faced character indicates the socket number.)
3
Processor/VRM error lamps
(Number following the bold-faced character indicates the lamp number.)
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
Memory Board
3
2
1
4
7-1
7-2
7-3
8
7-4
5
6
1
DIMM slot error lamps (DIMM slot #1 to 4 from bottom)
2
Memory board Eject switch
3
Memory board Power lamp
4
Memory board Attention lamp
5
Memory board Redundancy lamp
6
Memory board Attention switch
7
DIMM slots (Number following the bold-faced character indicates the socket number.)
The factory-installed memory board contains at least 2 x 512MB DIMM in slots 1 and 2.
8
Switch to turn on DIMM slot error lamp
Management LAN Board
1
2
4
3
1
ICMB #1 connector
2
ICMB #2 connector
3
Management LAN Port
4
I/O board connector
2-11
2-12
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
STANDARD FEATURES
High performance
Expandability
„ 64-bit Intel® Xeon™ Processor MP
„ Wide variety of optional I/O slots
3.16 GHz / 1MB
Two 32-bit/33 MHz PCI slots
3.66 GHz / 1MB
Four 64-bit/100 MHz PCI-X sots (support hot-plug)
„ Dual-Core Intel® Xeon™ Processor
Two PCI EXPRESS(x8) slots (support hot-plug),
One PCI EXPRESS(x4) slot.
7000 series
3.0 GHz / 2*2 MB
„ Large memory of up to 64 GB
2.60 GHz / 4 MB
„ 3.5-inch hard disk drive bay holds five hot-swap SAS hard
3.40 GHz / 16 MB
disk drives. If additional hard disk drive cage is installed,
„ High-speed memory access
system can support up to 13 hot-swap SAS hard disk drives.
(Supports DDRII 400-compliant
„ Remote power-on feature
interleaved memory)
„ Up to four multi-processors are available for upgrade.
„ High-speed 1000BASE-T/
„ USB interface
100BASE-TX/10BASE-T interface
(1000Mbps/100Mbps/10Mbps
supported)
„ High-speed disk access
(SAS disk)
Many Available Features
„ Graphic accelerator "Radeon7000M" support
„ El Torito Bootable CD-ROM (no emulation mode) format support
„ POWER switch mask
„ Software power-off
„ Remote power-on feature
„ AC-LINK feature
„ Intelligent Platform Management Interface (IPMI) feature
„ Baseboard Management Controller (BMC)
„ Remote console feature
High-reliability
„ Memory mirroring feature
„ Online sparing memory feature
„ Memory hot-swap feature
„ Memory RAID feature
„ Memory monitoring feature (single-bit error
correction/ double-bit error detection)
„ Memory/processor degradation feature
(logical isolation of a failed device)
„ Bus parity error detection
„ Thermal sensor
„ Error notification
„ Internal cooling fan monitoring feature
„ Internal voltage monitoring feature
„ BIOS password feature
„ Security feature (security lock)
„ Redundant power supply
„ Disk array (onboard)
„ Recovering BIOS Data
Management Utilities
„ NEC ESMPRO
„ NEC DianaScope
„ Advanced Remote Management
Self-diagnosis
„ Power On Self-Test (POST)
„ Test and Diagnosis (T&D)
Maintenance Features
„ Off-line Maintenance Utility
„ Memory dump feature using the DUMP switch
Power Saving Feature
„ Sleep feature (available for Windows Server 2003)
Easy and Fine Setup
„ EXPRESSBUILDER (system setup utility)
„ Express Setup
„ Configuration Diskette Creator
„ SETUP (BIOS setup utility)
„ RAID Configuration Utility
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
2-13
Power Supplies
When the additional power supply units are installed and system operates with four power supply units, the server can
continue its operation without interruption even if one of these power supply units fails (in the redundant configuration).
If an additional power supply unit is installed while the system is operating with three power supply units, a log that
represents "power recovery" is recorded in the system event log. This indicates that the power supply is in redundant
configuration and maximum configuration.
Peripheral Bays
The system supports a variety of standard PC AT-compatible peripheral devices. The chassis includes the following
peripheral bays:
„
Media bay for installing the standard 3.5-inch floppy disk drive (supports 720 KB and 1.44 MB floppy disk
media) and the standard optical disk drive.
„
A 5.25-inch device bay for installing up to two half-height 5.25-inch peripheral devices or a full-height
5.25-inch peripheral device such as an optional tape drive.
„
The SAS hard disk drive bay for installing up to five SAS hard disk drives. If you install the additional hard
disk drive cage, you can install up to thirteen SAS hard disk drives.
„
The SAS disk drives can be easily installed or removed. The drive carrier allows you to access to disk drives
from the front of the system. If disk drives are provided with RAID configuration within the system, a disk
drive can be swapped with another without power interruption in the system (hot-swap).
2-14
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
Memory Mirroring / Memory RAID Feature
Memory Mirroring Feature
The memory mirroring feature places a memory board as spare memory in standby state. If the current memory board
encounters an uncorrectable error, the memory mirroring feature switches to the standby memory board. When this
feature is used, the current memory board and the standby memory board should be combined. Available combinations
are:
„
Mirroring with memory boards 1 and 2
„
Mirroring with a pair of memory boards 1 and 2 and a pair of memory boards 3 and 4
To enable the memory mirroring feature, the combined memory boards must have DIMMs of same capacity.
The table below shows combinations of memory boards installed.
Memory board 1
2 GB (1 GB*2)
8 GB (2 GB*4)
4 GB (1 GB*4)
16 GB (4 GB*4)
A
B
C
D
Memory board 2
2 GB (1GB*2)
8 GB (2GB*4)
4 GB (1GB*4)
16 GB (4 GB*4)
Memory board 3
2 GB (1 GB*2)
8 GB (2 GB*4)
–
16 GB (4 GB*4)
Memory board 4
2 GB (1 GB*2)
8 GB (2 GB*4)
–
16 GB (4 GB*4)
Memory RAID Feature
If one of the four memory boards encounters an uncorrectable error, the memory RAID feature switches to the other
memory board to continue operation. To use this feature, four memory boards must be installed. Each memory board
must have DIMMs of same capacity.
The table below shows combinations of memory boards installed.
Memory board 1
2 GB (1 GB*2)
8 GB (2 GB*4)
4 GB (1 GB*4)
16 GB (4 GB*4)
A
B
C
D
Memory board 2
2 GB (1 GB*2)
8 GB (2 GB*4)
4 GB (1 GB*4)
16 GB (4 GB*4)
Memory board 3
2 GB (1 GB*2)
8 GB (2 GB*4)
4 GB (1 GB*4)
16 GB (4 GB*4)
Memory board 4
2 GB (1 GB*2)
8 GB (2 GB*4)
4 GB (1 GB*4)
16 GB (4 GB*4)
Setting BIOS
Start SETUP and select [Advanced] → [Memory Configuration] → [Memory RAS Feature] in order and set as follows:
„
To enable the memory mirroring feature: Select [Mirror].
„
To enable the memory RAID feature: Select [RAID].
Others
„
Memory capacity displayed on the operating system = total capacity of physically installed memory –
capacity for standby memory
Memory mirroring feature: 1/2 of actually installed memory capacity
Memory RAID feature: 3/4 of actually installed memory capacity
„
Enabling the memory mirroring or memory RAID feature does not influence the operations of applications.
„
Each feature is automatically disabled when an error message is displayed:
The following indicates that the memory mirroring /memory RAID feature has worked:
a) The Redundancy lamp on the front panel of the server lights green.
b) The failing DIMM group is degraded when the server restarts.
c) If an NEC ESMPRO Agent has been installed, the following log is registered as a system log of Event
Viewer:
Source name:
ESMCommonService
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
Event ID:
2313
Explanation:
Part of the DIMM was isolated due to a memory error.
2-15
Memory number: XX
Date/time:
XX
d) If report setting is made through the NEC ESMPRO Agent, Manager reporting and ALIVE reporting is
performed. The report contents are as follows:
Explanation:
Part of the DIMM was isolated due to a memory error.
Memory number: XX
Date/time:
XX
Recovering BIOS Data
Two system BIOSes, primary and secondary, are used to realize the duplex configuration.
Normally, the system operates with the primary BIOS. If a primary BIOS data error occurs or if the device containing
the system BIOS fails, control is immediately transferred to the secondary BIOS. Thus, the activation of the system is
ensured.
At shipment, the latest version of system BIOS is stored both in the primary and the secondary BIOS. If you execute the
system BIOS update, the secondary BIOS is updated, and the updated BIOS becomes the primary BIOS. Thereafter, the
system is activated from that primary BIOS.
System Cooling
The chassis includes a hot-swappable fan module with six fans for cooling the processor(s), hard drives, and PCI cards.
The fan system is located in the middle of the chassis to pull cooling air through the chassis.
2-16
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
System Board Features
The following subsections describe the system board major components.
Processor
The processor board accommodates one to four 64-bit Intel® Xeon™ MP processors or Dual-Core Intel® Xeon™
processors in an FC-PGA2 package, depending on the model.
DIMM Memory
To install or replace a DIMM, remove the memory board first.
One memory board is factory-installed in the server. Up to four memory boards (64 GB maximum) can be installed in
the server.
Install the DIMM (Dual Inline Memory Module) into the DIMM socket on the memory board of the server. DIMMs are
installed in the ascending order of DIMM socket numbers in the unit of two modules.
The controller automatically detects, sizes, and initializes the memory array, depending on the type, size, and speed of
the installed DIMMs, and reports memory size and allocation to the server via configuration registers.
NOTE: Use DIMMs that have been provided by Bull. Contact your service representative
or dealer for a current list of approved memory modules.
Onboard Video
The I/O board incorporates an ATI® Radeon® 7000M graphics accelerator with 16 MB of video SDRAM that supports
all standard IBM VGA modes. The embedded SVGA video subsystem supports:
„
Pixel resolutions up to 1024 × 768
„
CRT and LCD monitors up to 100 Hz vertical refresh rate
The I/O board supports disabling of the onboard video through BIOS Setup or when a plug-in video card is installed in
any of the PCI slots.
LSI Logic MegaRAID™ SAS PCI EXPRESS™ ROMB
The I/O board includes the on-board LSI Logic MegaRAID™ SAS PCI EXPRESS™ ROMB (called "On Board RAID
(MegaRAID ROMB)" hereafter). The On Board RAID controller is composed of the I/O processor and the SCSI host
adapter. The on-board RAID controller (MegaRAID ROMB) supports the following features:
„
Dual-channel SAS interface (CH0 and CH1)
Connect the HDD cage to CH0, and optional HDD cage to CH1.
„
RAID levels 0, 1, 5, and spanning of RAID1 and RAID5
„
256 MB of cache memory
„
Battery-backup cache memory
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
2-17
Network Interface Controllers
NOTE: To ensure EMC product regulation compliance, the system must be used with
shielded LAN cables.
The I/O board includes Intel® 82546GB network interface controller (NIC). The Intel® 82546GB network interface
controller supports the following features:
„
Two channels of 10Base-T, 100Base-TX, and 1000BASE-T networks.
„
Direct 64-bit, 133 MHz interface to the PCI-X bus
„
82546GB provides standard IEEE 802.3 Ethernet Interface for 1000Base-T, 100Base-TX, and 10Base-T
(802.3, 802.3u, 802.3ab).
System Board Management Controller (BMC)
Server management is concentrated in the System Board Management Controller (BMC). The BMC and associated
circuitry are powered from a 5Vdc standby voltage, which remains active when system power is switched off, but the
AC power source is still on and connected.
The BMC supports NEC DianaScope, which allows remote server management through networks.
See Chapter 6 or online document in the EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM for NEC DianaScope.
One major function of the BMC is to autonomously monitor system management events, and log their occurrence in the
non-volatile System Event Log (SEL). The events being monitored include overheating and overvoltage conditions, fan
failure, or chassis intrusion. To enable accurate monitoring, the BMC maintains the non-volatile Sensor Data Record
(SDR), from which sensor information can be retrieved. The BMC provides an ISA host interface to SDR sensor
information, so that software running on the server can poll and retrieve the server's current status.
The BMC performs the following:
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
Monitors server board temperature and voltage
Monitors processor presence and controls Fault Resilient Boot (FRB)
Detects and indicates fan failure
Manages the SEL interface
Manages the SDR Repository interface
Monitors the SDR/SEL timestamp clock
Monitors the system management watchdog timer
Monitors the periodic SMI timer
Monitors the event receiver
Controls secure mode, including video blanking, diskette write-protect monitoring, and front panel
lock/unlock initiation
Controls Wake On LAN via Magic Packet support.
Degradation Feature
The degradation feature automatically isolates a failed DIMM, processor, or cooling fan to assure continuous operation
of the server when the POST (Power On Self-Test, self-diagnosis program after power on) detects such a DIMM,
processor, or cooling fan.
Failed DIMMs, processors, and cooling fans may be identified on the screen that the POST displays, or with the BIOS
setup utility, "SETUP." They may also be identified on the system that has ESMPRO installed.
2-18
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
Remote Power-On Feature (Wake On LAN/PME)
The remote power-on function turns on the server through a network. It sends a special packet from the management
computer to a remote server to turn it on if the server is off-powered.
To enable this feature, you must select "Enabled" for "Wake On LAN/PME" in the Advanced Chipset Control of the
Advanced menu of the BIOS setup utility, "SETUP." (See Chapter 4.)
The remote power-on feature is not available in the following cases. Press the POWER switch once to start the
operating system, and turn off the server in an appropriate procedure.
„
Abnormal previous system shut-down
„
No power supply to the server (due to turned-off breaker, disconnected power cord, power blackout, etc.)
NOTE: Wake On LAN feature is supported in 100BASE-TX/1000BASE-T adapter on the
I/O board.
AC-LINK Feature
When the power cord of the server is connected to an uninterruptible power supply (UPS) unit, the server supports the
power linkage feature that enables control over the power supply from the UPS to the server. AC-LINK feature can be
enabled or disabled with "AC-LINK" in the Server menu of the BIOS setup utility, "SETUP." (See Chapter 4.)
Security
To help prevent unauthorized entry or use of the system, the system includes a full lockable front door and Server
Management software that monitors the system intrusion switches.
Security with Mechanical Locks and Monitoring
The front door of the server contains a mechanical lock to prevent access to the front of the computer chassis.
The server includes an intrusion switch for the rear access cover. When this cover is opened, the switch transmits an
alarm signal to the system board, where server management software processes the signal.
Software Locks via the System Setup Utility
The BIOS SETUP Utility provides a number of security features to prevent unauthorized or accidental access to the
system. Once the security measures are enabled, access to the system is allowed only after the user enters the correct
password(s). For example:
„
Enable the keyboard lockout timer so that the server requires a password to reactivate the keyboard and
mouse after a specified time-out period – 2 to 120 minutes.
„
Set and enable an administrative password.
„
Set and enable a user password
„
Set secure mode to prevent keyboard or mouse input and to prevent use of the front panel reset, power and
sleep switches.
„
Activate a hot-key combination to enter secure mode quickly.
„
Disable writing to the floppy disk drive when secure mode is set.
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
2-19
EXPRESSBUILDER
The CD-ROM that comes with your server contains a setup utility called "EXPRESSBUILDER." When you have first
installed the server or append features to the server, use the EXPRESSBUILDER to set up your server.
Refer to Chapter 6 for details.
The major functions of the EXPRESSBUILDER are:
„
To install the Operating System.
"Express Setup" helps you to install Windows system. (See Chapter 5)
„
To diagnose the system.
EXPRESSBUILDER includes the System Diagnostics to check your server. (See Chapter 6)
„
To create a support disk.
Use this function to create the support disks used to boot the utilities from the floppy disk, or the OEM floppy
disk used for a manual installation of Windows. (See Chapter 6)
„
To update the BIOS.
Use this function to update the system BIOS or firmware of the server. (See Chapter 6)
„
To update the Windows System*
"Update Bull NovaScale System" in Master Control Menu (Windows-based EXPRESSBUILDER feature)
updates several resources of Microsoft® Windows Server™ 2003 or Microsoft® Windows® 2000. (See
Chapter 6)
„
To install the utilities.
EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM includes some management software for Windows (NEC ESMPRO, NEC
DianaScope, etc.) and maintenance utilities for DOS (System diagnostics, Off-line Maintenance Utility, etc.).
You can install the applications for Windows from Master Control Menu and install the utilities for DOS from
Tools menu. (See Chapter 6)
„
To read the online documents*
You can refer to the online documents from Master Control Menu. (See Chapter 6)
NOTE: Some features among those listed above can be used from the remote computer
via cross cable, modem, or LAN (remote console). See Chapter 6 for details.
* These functions are available under Windows system.
2-20
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
NEC ESMPRO
NEC ESMPRO is a server management software application that runs on the operating system. NEC ESMPRO includes
NEC ESMPRO Manager for the server monitoring terminal and NEC ESMPRO Agent for the Bull NovaScale server.
NOTE: For details of major functions of NEC ESMPRO, system configuration and setups
with NEC ESMPRO, see Chapter 6.
Available functions of NEC ESMPRO depend on the operating system you install. Ask
your service representative for details.
Off-line Maintenance Utility
The Off-line Maintenance Utility is used for proactive maintenance and fault analysis of the server. Normally this utility
is used by the maintenance engineer.
Refer to Chapter 8 for details.
System Diagnostic Utility
The system diagnostic utility contained in EXPRESSBUILDER is useful to prevent hardware failures. See Chapter 7
for details.
NEC DianaScope
NEC DianaScope is a software application for remote management of the server.
NEC DianaScope can control the managed server even if operating system is not running on the managed server.
See Chapter 6 and online documentation in the EXPRESSBUILDER.
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
2-21
USING YOUR SERVER
This section describes basic operations of your server including how to use devices such as the optical disk drive. See
Appendix B for notes on using the floppy disk, DVD/CD-ROM, and accessories including keyboard and mouse.
Security Lock (Locking the Front Cover)
The security lock on the front of the server is used to lock the front door.
Open the front door when turning on/off the server, accessing the floppy disk drive, optical disk drive, and/or 5.25-inch
device, and installing/removing the hard disk drive into/from the 3.5-inch disk bay.
IMPORTANT:
„
Use the security key coming with the server to release the security lock.
„
Some software applications have a command to eject a media in the optical disk drive or
5.25-inch device bay. Make sure that the front door is open before executing such a
command. If the command is executed while the front door is closed, the tray of the
optical disk drive or a media in the 5.25-inch device will strike the front door causing
the server failure.
Lock the front door
Unlock the front door.
Unlock the front door, hold the handle half height on the left side of the front door and pull it toward you to open. When
you close the front door, lock it with security key.
2-22
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
POWER Switch
Use the POWER switch to turn on/off the server.
Power On
Press the POWER switch on the front of the computer chassis.
The POWER/SLEEP lamp lights green.
POWER/SLEEP lamp
IMPORTANT:
„
If the power cord is connected to a power control device such as a UPS (Uninterruptible
Power Supply), make sure that the power control device is powered.
„
If the power cord is connected to the server, an initial diagnosis of the hardware starts.
The POWER switch does not work while in diagnosis. Wait for about 30 seconds, then
press the POWER switch.
„
Do not turn off the server until characters following the Bull logo appear on the screen.
The time until the characters appear depends on your system configuration.
Approximately, it may take one to five minutes.
POST
POST (Power On Self-Test) is the self-diagnosis feature saved in the I/O board of the server.
When the power of the server is turned on, POST automatically runs to check the I/O board, memory board, processor,
keyboard, and mouse. During POST messages indicating the starts of several BIOS setup utilities may also appear.
At shipment of the server, it is set to have our logo appear on the display unit during POST. Pressing Esc allows the
information on the execution of POST to be displayed.
NOTE: The information on the result of diagnosis by POST can be displayed from the
start without the depression of Esc on the BIOS menu. If you desire it, change the setting
of "Boot-time Diagnosis Screen" on "Advanced" of the BIOS SETUP to "Enabled."
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
2-23
It may not always necessary to check the result of POST. Check the messages which may appear during POST in the
following cases:
„
Installation of the server
„
Suspicion of failure
„
Beep for many times in the period from power-on to operating system start
„
Appearance of an error message on the display unit
POST Flow
The flow of operations executed by POST is sequentially described below:
IMPORTANT: Depending on the system configuration, the message "Press Any Key"
requesting key entry may appear on the display screen. This is requested by BIOS on an
installed optional board. See the explanation described in the manual for the option and
press any key.
1.
After power-on, POST is activated to start memory check. The message indicating the counted size of base
memory and that of additional memory appears at the upper left corner of the display screen. In addition, the
following message appears at the bottom of the screen.
Press <F2> to enter SETUP, <F4> Service Partition, <F12> Network
NOTE: If you change the factory-default for [Extended RAM Step] in [Advanced] menu
of BIOS SETUP and execute the memory test, pressing Space allows the memory test to
be skipped.
It may take several minutes to complete memory check depending on the size of the memory installed in the
server. Similarly, it may take about a minute to display the proper information on the screen at rebooting.
2.
Detects the RAID controller built in. If your server and has some option boards such as disk array controller
installed, POST displays the message prompting the start of the MegaRAID Configuration BIOS setup utility
for the option board.
Refer to the manual that comes with the option board for details.
When you press Ctrl and any other key at the same time to start the setup utility of the option board, the
subsequent key entry may sometime fails (e.g., key entry is not accepted or incorrectly recognized). In the
case, press Ctrl again to recover.
3.
POST displays SCSI ID numbers used by the connected SCSI devices on the screen.
4.
POST detects the on-board RAID controller and displays the message prompting the start of the WebBIOS
(without any key entry for several seconds, POST is automatically continued). Press the proper keys
according to the screen display.
LSI MegaRAID SAS - MFI BIOS Version XXXX (Build MMM DD, YYYY)
Copyright (c) 2005 LSI Logic Corporation
HA - X (Bus X Dev X) MegaRAID SAS XXX (1000/0411/1033/8287)
FW package: X.X.X - XXXX
X Logical Drive(s) found on the host adapter.
X Logical Drive(s) handled by BIOS.
Press <Ctrl> <H> for WebBIOS.
Now press Ctrl + H. The utility starts upon completion of POST.
2-24
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
NOTES:
„
Using WebBIOS allows you to configure or change an array configuration with internal
SAS hard disk drives.
„
If your server has a disk array controller installed and the BIOS of disk array controller
is enabled, the message prompting you to start WebBIOS of the disk array controller is
displayed first, then on-board RAID (MegaRAID ROMB).
„
The on-board RAID (MegaRAID ROMB) has factory-installed battery. See Chapter 8
for error messages related to the battery. See also "Battery for Onboard RAID
(MegaRAID ROMB)" in Chapter 4.
5.
Displays the message notifying you the detection of the processor and the connected keyboard and mouse.
6.
Displays any of the following messages.
Pattern 1:
Press <F2> to enter SETUP or <F12> to Network
Pattern 2:
Press <F2> to enter SETUP, <F4> Service Partition, <F12> to Network
Or Pattern 3:
Press <F1> to resume, <F2> to enter Setup, <F12> to Network
Pattern 4:
Press <F1> to resume, <F2> to enter Setup, <F4> Service Partition, <F12> Network
* The displayed message may vary depending on the device status.
NOTE: The operation or utility to be started at each key entry is described below. These
operations or utilities may not always be started.
„
Esc
Press Esc to display the boot menu at the end of POST. This menu allows you to select
the device to boot from.
Boot Menu
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
CD-ROM Drive
+Removable Devices
+Hard Drive
IBA GE Slot 0B20 v1222
IBA GE Slot 0B21 v1222
<Enter Setup>
„
F2
Press F2 to start the BIOS setup utility. Start the utility to change the setting of the
server to that fit to the environment in which the server is used. In general, the setting
may not be particularly changed by starting the utility excluding the case in which the
previous message accompanied by an error message appears. See Chapter 4 for setting
procedures and features of the parameters.
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
7.
„
F4
Press F4 to start the Off-line Maintenance Utility from the maintenance partition. See
Chapter 6 for the maintenance partition.
„
F12
Press F12 to run the network boot.
„
F1
If message "Press <F1> to resume" appears, an error is detected during POST. See
"Error messages during POST" for the information on the messages and the proper
actions against the errors. If an error message appears, pressing F1 allows the BIOS
setup utility to be started.
2-25
When a password is set in the BIOS setup utility SETUP, the screen prompting you to enter the password
appears after the normal termination of POST.
The password can be entered for up to three times. If you enter the password incorrectly all the time, the
server cannot be started. In this case, turn off the power of the server, wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn
on the power to start the server again.
IMPORTANT: Set the password only after operating system is installed.
8.
Starts operating system at the termination of POST.
POST Error Messages
When POST detects an error, it displays an error message on the screen. See Chapter 8 for POST error codes.
IMPORTANT: Take a note on the messages displayed before contacting your service
representative. Alarm messages are useful information for maintenance.
Power Off
Follow the procedure below to power off the server. If the power cord of the server is connected to a UPS, refer to the
manual that comes with the UPS or the manual for the application that controls the UPS.
IMPORTANT: Always allow POST to complete before turning off the server.
1.
Shut down the operating system.
2.
Press the POWER switch on the front of the server.
The POWER/SLEEP lamp goes off.
3.
Power off peripheral devices.
2-26
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
SLEEP Switch
The SLEEP switch allows you to save almost all power of the server (power-saving mode or sleep mode).
NOTE: To use the SLEEP switch, an operating system supporting the sleep feature is
required. (Available for Windows Server 2003.)
POWER switch
SLEEP switch
POWER/SLEEP lamp
Press the SLEEP switch on the front of the server to place the server in the power-saving mode. (The POWER/SLEEP
lamp blinks.) In the power-saving mode, the server retains the memory data and the status of the previous operations.
To resume the original state, press the POWER switch. (It may take a little time to resume the original state.)
NOTE: The operational level in the power-saving mode depends on the operating system
in use. (Available for Windows Server 2003.)
IMPORTANT: Do not change system configuration while turning into the power-saving
mode or in the power-saving mode. Otherwise, you may fail to resume the original state.
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
2-27
Floppy Disk Drive
Your server is equipped with the 3.5-inch floppy disk drive on its front to write/read data to/from a floppy disk.
Your server supports the following 3.5-inch floppy disks:
„
2HD floppy disk (double-sided high-density track type)
Stores data of 1.44 MB.
„
2DD floppy disk (double-sided double-density track type)
Store data of 720 KB.
Make sure that the server is powered (the POWER/SLEEP lamp is lit) before inserting a floppy disk into the floppy disk
drive.
When you completely insert the floppy disk into the floppy disk drive, the drive clicks and the eject button on the
floppy disk is slightly pushed out.
NOTES:
„
You cannot use a 1.2 MB-formatted floppy disk.
„
When an unformatted floppy disk is inserted, the message notifying that date read is not
available and the message prompting formatting are displayed. Refer to the manual that
comes with the operating system to format the floppy disk.
„
If the floppy disk contains a system, powering on or restarting the server with the floppy
disk inserted boots the system from the floppy disk.
To eject the floppy disk from the floppy disk drive, press the eject button.
NOTE: Make sure that the floppy disk access lamp is unlit before ejecting the floppy disk.
Ejecting the disk when the access lamp is lit may destroy the disk data.
2-28
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
NOTE: Use of the floppy disk
The floppy disk is an important data storage media with delicate structure and requires care.
Keep the following notes in mind to use it:
„
Insert the floppy disk into the floppy disk drive gently as far as it goes.
„
Attach the label to the correct position.
„
Do not write anything directly onto the disk surface with a pencil or ball-point pen.
„
Do not open the shutter.
„
Do not use the floppy disk in a dusty place.
„
Do not place anything on the floppy disk.
„
Do not leave the floppy disk in a high-temperature place (e.g., place exposed to direct
sunlight or close to a heater).
„
Keep the floppy disk away from cigarette smoke.
„
Keep the floppy disk away from any liquid (e.g., water) and chemicals.
„
Keep the floppy disk away from any magnetic objects (e.g., magnet).
„
Do not pinch the floppy disk with a paper clip or drop it.
„
Keep the floppy disk in a floppy disk case that protects it from magnetism and dust.
„
A floppy disk has a write-protect switch that prevents the stored data from accidental
erasure. You can read data from a write-protected floppy disk, but you cannot save data
into the floppy disk or format it. We recommend that you should write-protect any
floppy disk containing valuable data unless you are about to save data. To write-protect
a 3.5-inch floppy disk, use the write-protect switch provided on its back.
Write-protect switch
Write
Write
disable enable
„
The floppy disk is a very delicate storage media. Dust or thermal changes, as well as
operator's misconduct or sever failures, may cause loss of data. To avoid loss of data, we
recommend that you should make a back-up copy of your valuable data on a regular
basis. (Make sure to make a back-up copy of every floppy disk provided with the
server.)
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
2-29
DVD-ROM Drive
Your server is equipped with the DVD-ROM drive on its front to read data from a CD/DVD-ROM. The DVD-ROM
provides larger and faster data read than the floppy disk.
CAUTION
Observe the following instructions to use the server safely. Failure to follow these instructions may
cause a fire, personal injury, or property damage. See pages 1-3 to 1-8 for details.
Do not leave the tray ejected from the DVD-ROM drive.
Setting/Removing a CD/DVD-ROM
1.
Confirm that the power of the server is on (with the POWER/SLEEP lamp being lit green) before inserting the
CD/DVD-ROM in the DVD-ROM drive.
2.
Press the Eject button on the front of the DVD-ROM drive.
The tray comes out a little.
3.
Hold the tray lightly and pull it out toward you until the tray stops.
4.
Put the CD/DVD-ROM on the tray carefully and securely with the date recorded surface facing toward the
tray.
2-30
5.
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
As shown in the figure below, hold the tray with a hand and press the CD/DVD-ROM with fingers of another
hand to make the hole of the CD/DVD-ROM fit to the rotor at the centre of the tray.
Rotor
Press this part of
CD/DVD-ROM.
6.
Push the front of the tray lightly to retract it into the drive.
IMPORTANT: If a noisy sound in driving the DVD-ROM drive occurs after setting a
CD/DVD-ROM, set it again correctly.
To take out the CD/DVD-ROM from the DVD-ROM drive, press the Eject button in the similar way in setting the
CD/DVD-ROM to make the tray go out.
If the access lamp is lit in orange, the CD/DVD-ROM is being accessed. Confirm that the access lamp is not lit before
pressing the Eject button.
As shown in the figure above, hold the tray with a hand and take the end of the CD/DVD-ROM lightly by the fingers of
another hand with the suppression of the rotor at the centre of the tray to remove the CD/DVD-ROM from the tray.
After taking out the CD/DVD-ROM, return the tray into the drive.
When you fail to eject the DVD-ROM tray with the Eject button and take out the CD/DVD-ROM from the server,
follow the procedure below.
1.
Press the POWER switch to power off the server. (The POWER/SLEEP lamp goes off.)
2.
Insert a metal pin of approximately 1.2 mm in diameter and 100 mm in length (a straightened large paper clip
will make a substitute) into the emergency hole on the upper front of the DVD-ROM drive and gently push it
in until the tray is ejected.
IMPORTANT:
„
Do not use a toothpick or plastic stick that is easy to break.
„
If the above procedure does not let you take out the CD/DVD-ROM, contact your
service representative.
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
Emergency hole
3.
Hold the tray and pull it out.
4.
Take out the CD/DVD-ROM.
5.
Push the tray back into position.
NOTE: Use of the CD/DVD-ROM
Keep the following notes in mind to use the CD/DVD-ROM for the server:
„
The playback of disks that do not conform to the CD/DVD-ROM standards with the
DVD-ROM drive is not guaranteed.
„
Do not drop the CD/DVD-ROM.
„
Do not place anything on the CD/DVD-ROM or bend the CD/DVD-ROM.
„
Do not attach any label onto the CD/DVD-ROM.
„
Do not touch the signal side (nothing is printed on this side) with your hand.
„
Place the CD/DVD-ROM with its printed side upward and gently put it on the tray.
„
Do not scratch the CD/DVD-ROM or write anything directly on it with a pencil or
ball-point pen.
„
Keep the CD/DVD-ROM away from cigarette smoke.
„
Do not leave the CD/DVD-ROM in a high-temperature place (e.g., place exposed to
direct sunlight or close to a heater).
„
When dust or fingerprints are attached on the CD/DVD-ROM, wipe the CD/DVD-ROM
from its centre to edge with a dry soft cloth slowly and gently.
„
Use CD/DVD cleaner to clean the CD/DVD-ROM. Do not use record spray/cleaner,
benzene, or thinner.
„
Keep the CD/DVD-ROM in a CD/DVD-ROM case when not in use.
„
If the CD/DVD-ROM emits loud noise in the DVD-ROM drive, remove the
CD/DVD-ROM and insert it back again.
2-31
2-32
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
This page is intentionally left blank
Chapter 3
Setting Up Your Server
This chapter describes how to set up your server appropriate for your system, on a step-by-step basis.
3-2
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
SETUP FLOW
Follow the flowchart below to set up the server.
Selecting a site
Select a suitable site for the server.
Unpacking the system
Unpack the server and accessories from the chipping carton box.
Connecting peripheral devices
Connect peripheral devices to the server.
Connecting the power cord
Connect the power cord to the server.
Turning on the server
Power on the server to start software setups. Setups depend on the optional internal
devices installed and the peripheral devices connected.
Installing the operating system
Install an operating system to the server. See Chapter 5.
Installing the utilities
Install the utilities in the provided EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM.
See Chapter 6.
Making backup copies of system information
After all the system setup procedures are completed, make backup copies of system
information.
System information is required for recovering the server from the trouble or after
replacing the system board.
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
3-3
SELECTING A SITE
Read the following precautions before selecting a suitable site for your server. The following describes installation of
the server and connections to the server.
CAUTION
Observe the following instructions to use the server safely. Failure to follow these instructions
may cause a fire, personal injury, or property damage. See pages 1-3 to 1-8 for details.
Never attempt to lift the server with three or less persons.
Do not install the server in any place other than specified.
The following figure illustrates a site suitable for installing the server.
Room that satisfies the following
conditions for operation: *
Temperature: 10 to 35ºC
Humidity: 20 to 80% (no
condensation)
Close enough to
connect the mouse
and the display.
Place having available
space of 150 mm or more in
front and rear of the server.
100 to 120 Vac/200 to
240 Vac parallel
bi-polar wall power
outlet with the ground
li
Wall outlet to connect the
supplied power cord.
Place having a space enough to fully
open the front door (The front door
extrudes about 35 mm from the left
side of the server when fully opened.)
Install the server on the
floor or rigid, flat desk.
Clean and tidy room
* It is recommended that the server should be used in a room where
temperature is in the range between 15 to 25ºC.
When you have selected a server site, hold the server by its bottom with at least four persons and carry it to the site,
then place it slowly and gently.
IMPORTANT: Do not hold the server by its front door to lift the server. The front door
may be disengaged and damage the server.
3-4
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
Do not place the server in the following places. Placing the server in such places may cause malfunctions of the server.
„
Places with drastic changes in temperature (e.g., near a heater, air conditioner, or refrigerator)
„
Places with strong vibration
„
Places where corrosive gases (sulphur dioxide, hydrogen sulphide, nitrogen dioxide, chlorine, ammonia,
ozone, etc) exist.
And also, places where the air (or dust) includes components accelerating corrosion (ex. sulphur, sodium
chloride) or conductive metals.
„
On a non-anti-static carpet
„
Places with possibilities of falling objects
„
Places near a device generating intense magnetic field (such as a TV, radio, broadcast/communication antenna,
power transmission wire, and electromagnetic crane) is placed (If unavoidable, contact your service
representative to request proper shield construction.)
„
Places where a power outlet that shares the ground line with another (especially the one to which a device
with large power consumption is connected) must be used for the server
„
Places near equipment that generates power noise (e.g., contact spark at power-on/power off of commercial
power supply through a relay). If you must install the server close to such equipment, contact your service
representative for separate power cabling or noise filter installation.
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
3-5
UNPACKING THE SYSTEM
When you receive your system, inspect the shipping containers prior to unpacking. If the shipping boxes are damaged,
note the damage, and if possible, photograph it for reference. After removing the contents of the containers, keep the
cartons and the packing materials. If the contents appear damaged when you unpack the boxes, file a damage claim with
the carrier immediately.
3-6
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
CONNECTING PERIPHERAL DEVICES
Connect peripheral devices to the server. The server is provided with connectors for a wide variety of peripheral devices
on its rear panel. The figures on the next pages illustrate available peripheral devices for the server in the standard
configuration and locations of the connectors for the devices.
WARNING
Observe the following instructions to use the server safely. Failure to follow these instructions
may result in death or serious personal injury. See pages 1-3 to 1-8 for details.
Do not hold the power plug with a wet hand.
CAUTION
Observe the following instructions to use the server safely. Failure to follow these instructions
may cause a fire, personal injury, or property damage. See pages 1-3 to 1-8 for details.
Plug in to a proper power source.
Do not connect the power cord to an outlet that has an illegal number of connections.
Insert the power plug into the outlet as far as it goes.
Do not use any unauthorized power cord.
Do not connect any interface cable with the power cord of the server plugged to a power
source.
Device with USB Interface
(e.g., keyboard)
To connect the device having
USB2.0 interface, use the USB
connector on the rear panel.
Device with serial
interface (e.g.,
modem)
FRONT
NOTE: Make sure of the cable you are going to connect. The ICMB connector and the
front serial port B connector of this server have the same shape as the LAN connector. Be
careful not to connect a cable to a wrong connector.
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
Finally connect the provided
power cord to the receptacle.
If connecting the server to UPS,
see the explanation below.
Use this inlet only
when an optional
power supply unit is
additionally installed.
Mouse
Printer with
parallel interface
Keyboard
Device with serial
interface (e.g.,
modem)
Display
unit
Hub
(multiport repeater)
Device with USB interface (USB2.0)
(e.g., terminal adapter)
Hub
(multiport repeater)
REAR
Device with ICMB interface
(e.g., disk expansion unit)
Network system on LAN
(connected via a hub)
Management Only
IMPORTANT:
„
Power off the server and a peripheral device before connection. Connecting a powered
peripheral device to the powered server will cause malfunctions and failures.
„
To connect a third-party peripheral device or interface cable to the server, contact your
service representative for availability of such a device or cable. Some third-party
devices may not be used for the server.
„
A leased line cannot be connected directly to the serial port connectors.
3-7
3-8
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
CONNECTING POWER CORD
Connect the provided power cord to the server.
WARNING
Observe the following instructions to use the server safely. Failure to follow these instructions
may result in death or serious personal injury. See pages 1-3 to 1-8 for details.
Do not hold the power plug with a wet hand.
CAUTION
Observe the following instructions to use the server safely. Failure to follow these instructions
may cause a fire, personal injury, or property damage. See pages 1-3 to 1-8 for details.
Do not plug the power cord in to an improper power source.
Do not connect the power cord to an outlet that has an illegal number of connections.
Insert the power plug into the outlet as far as it goes.
Use the authorized power cord only.
1.
Plug the provided power cord into the AC inlet on the rear of the server.
2.
Plug the other end of the power cord into the wall outlet.
3.
Secure the power cord with a cable tie.
Lever
Lock spring
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
3-9
To connect the power cord from the server to an uninterruptible power supply (UPS), use service outlets on the rear of
the UPS. Refer to the manual that comes with the UPS for details.
When the power cord is connected from the server to a UPS, change the BIOS setup of the server to link with power
supply from the UPS.
Change a parameter for "AC-LINK" under the Server menu of the BIOS SETUP utility. See Chapter 4 for details.
3-10
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
TURNING ON THE SERVER
Turn on the server and follow the on-screen instructions for setup.
IMPORTANT: Before turning on the server:
„
Some optional boards require setups with the SETUP utility before installation. If the
server has a PCI board with the PCI-to-PCI bridge installed, the SETUP utility is
enabled to launch. Check on the board specifications to find out whether it requires
pre-installation setups before actually installing the board.
„
Some installed optional devices or connected peripheral devices require setups before
proceeding to the next step.
To use the server with no optional devices installed besides the graphic board, install the
desired operating system to the server.
1.
Make sure that the floppy disk drive contains no floppy disk and the DVD-ROM drive contains no bootable
CD/DVD-ROM.
2.
Press the POWER switch.
NOTES:
„
If the power cord is connected to the power control unit such as the UPS, turn on the
power control unit.
„
Connect the power cord and wait for about 30 seconds before pressing the POWER
switch. The POWER switch does not work for about 30 seconds after connecting the
power cord due to BMC (Baseboard Management Controller) firmware start-up.
„
Do not turn off the server until characters following our logo appear on the screen. The
time until the characters appear depends on your system configuration. Approximately,
it may take one to five minutes.
POWER switch
POWER/SLEEP lamp
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
3-11
The POWER/SLEEP lamp on the front of the server comes on.
In a few seconds, our logo appears on the screen and the Power On Self-Test (POST) begins.
The POST runs automatically when you power on the server or reset it with a keyboard operation (Ctrl + Alt
+ Delete). The POST runs diagnostics, initializes the server, sets interrupt vectors, detects installed peripheral
devices, and boots the operating system (if installed). See Chapter 2 for detailed description on POST.
If the server halts before completing the POST, the POST emits a beep code indicating a fatal system error
requiring immediate attention. (See Chapter 8, "Troubleshooting," for troubleshooting information.)
During memory test, the POST displays the amount of memory it was able to access and test. Depending on
the amount of installed memory, it may take several minutes to complete the memory test.
NOTE: The factory-set is defined to hide the POST screen with our logo screen. You can
always change our logo screen to the POST screen by pressing Esc. To change the start-up
screen, use the BIOS setup utility, "SETUP." (See Chapter 4 for details.)
During the POST, you will see the banner message to prompt you to launch the BIOS SETUP utility stored in ROM on
system board or on an installed option board.
Start the BIOS SETUP utility appropriate to your system environment to change the BIOS setup. For the BIOS SETUP
for the server, see Chapter 4. For the BIOS SETUP for the option board, refer to the manual that comes with the option
board.
3-12
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
INSTALLING OPERATING SYSTEM
See Chapter 5 for installing the Microsoft® Windows Server™ 2003.
To install other operating systems than listed above, contact your service representative.
IMPORTANT: Before installing the operating system, adjust the system date and time by
using the BIOS setup utility "SETUP". See Chapter 4 detail.
INSTALLING UTILITIES
Install the utilities that come with the server. See Chapter 6 for details.
MAKING BACKUP COPIES OF SYSTEM INFORMATION
The system information includes the current BIOS settings and any specific information for the server.
Save the information after completing the system setup.
Without the backup data, you will not be able to recover the information.
You can save the information as follows:
1.
Insert the EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM into the DVD-ROM drive and reboot the system.
2.
Select [Tools].
3.
Select [Off-line Maintenance Utility].
4.
Select [System Information Management].
5.
Insert a floppy disk into the floppy disk drive.
6.
Select [Save].
Chapter 4
Configuring Your Server
This chapter describes Basic Input Output System (BIOS) configuration.
When you install the server for the first time or install/remove optional devices, thoroughly read this chapter for better
understanding and correct setups.
SYSTEM BIOS ~ SETUP ~
The SETUP utility is provided to make basic hardware configuration for the server. This utility is pre-installed in the
flash memory of the server and ready to run.
The server is configured with the correct parameters using the SETUP utility and shipped in the best conditions. Thus,
you do not need to use the SETUP utility in most cases. However, you might wish to use the SETUP utility in the cases
described below.
IMPORTANT:
„
The SETUP utility is intended for system administrator use only.
„
The SETUP utility allows you to set a password. The server is provided with two levels
of password: Supervisor and User. With the Supervisor password, you can view and
change all system parameters of the SETUP utility. With the User password, system
parameters available for viewing and changing are limited.
„
Do not set any password before installing the operating system.
„
The server contains the latest version of the SETUP utility. Dialog boxes appear on your
SETUP utility, thus, may differ from descriptions in this manual. If you find anything
unclear, see the online help or ask your service representative.
4-2
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
Starting SETUP Utility
To run the SETUP utility, do as follows:
1.
Power on the server.
The Bull logo appears on the screen (the POST screen may appear depending on the setting in SETUP.).
After a while, any of the following messages appears at the bottom of the screen.
Pattern 1:
Press <F2> to enter SETUP or <F12> to Network
Pattern 2:
Press <F2> to enter SETUP, <F4> Service Partition, <F12> to Network
Or
Pattern 3:
Press <F1> to resume, <F2> to enter Setup, <F12> to Network
Pattern 4:
Press <F1> to resume, <F2> to enter Setup, <F4> Service Partition, <F12> Network
* The displayed message varies depending on the device status.
2.
Press F2 to start the SETUP utility and display its Main menu.
If you have previously set a password with the SETUP utility, the password entry screen appears. Enter the
password.
Up to three password entries will be accepted. If you fail to enter the password correctly for three consecutive
times, the server halts. (You can no longer proceed.) Power off the server.
NOTE: The server is provided with two levels of password: Supervisor and User. With the
Supervisor password, you can view and change all system parameters. With the User
password, system parameters available for viewing and changing are limited.
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
Description of On-Screen Items and Key Usage
Use the following keyboard keys to work with the SETUP utility. (Key functions are also listed at the bottom of the
screen.)
Indicates the current menu.
Setup item menu
Indicates there
are submenus.
Online help
window
Parameter (high-lights upon selection) menu
Explanation of key functions
Cursor (↑, ↓):
Cursor (←, →):
– and +:
Enter
Esc
F1:
F9:
F10:
Selects an item on the screen. The highlighted item is currently selected.
Selects the Main, Advanced, Security, System Hardware, Boot, or Exit menu.
Changes the value (parameter) of the selected item. When a submenu option (an option
preceded by "f") is selected, these keys are disabled.
Press Enter to select (determine) parameters.
Displays the previous screen.
Press F1 when you need help on SETUP operations. The help screen for SETUP operations
appears. Press Esc to return to the previous screen.
Sets the parameter of the currently displayed item back to the factory set parameter.
Saves the modifications and exits Setup.
4-3
4-4
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
Configuration Examples
The following describes examples of configuration required to use software-link features or for system operations.
Link with Management Software
To link with the temperature monitoring feature of NEC ESMPRO Agent
Select [Server] - [Thermal Sensor] - [Enabled].
To control power supply of the server with NEC ESMPRO Manager via the network
Select [Advanced] - [Advanced Chipset Control] - [Wake On LAN/PME] - [Enabled].
Select [Server] - [AC-LINK] - [StayOff].
UPS
To link power supply with the UPS
„
To power on the server when power is supply from the UPS
Select [Server] - [AC-LINK] - [Power On].
„
To keep the server off-powered even when power is supplied from the UPS if the POWER switch was used to
power off
Select [Server] - [AC-LINK] - [Last State].
„
To keep the server off-powered even when power is supplied from the UPS
Select [Server] - [AC-LINK] - [StayOff].
Boot
To change the boot order of devices connected to the server
Select [Boot] and specify the boot order.
To display POST check results
Select [Advanced] - [Boot-time Diagnostic Screen] - [Enabled].
You can also press Esc while the Bull logo is on the screen to display POST check results.
To control from the HW console
Select [Server] - [Console Redirection] and set each item.
Memory
To enable the memory degradation feature
Select [Advanced] - [Memory/Processor Error] - [Halt].
To check the installed memory (DIMM board) status
Select [Advanced] - [Memory Configuration] and check the status indications.
The on-screen DIMM group numbers and socket locations on the IO board are associated as shown in the
following figure.
To clear the memory (DIMM board) error information
Select [Advanced] - [Memory Configuration] - [Memory Retest] - [Yes] and reboot.
Select [Server] - [Clear FRU LED] - [Yes] and reboot.*
* Only when [Server] - [FRU LED Feature] - [Enabled] has been selected.
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
DIMM #4
DIMM #3
DIMM #2
DIMM #1
To enable the memory mirroring feature or memory RAID feature
Select [Advanced] - [Memory Configuration] - [Memory RAS Feature], and select [Mirror] or [RAID].
Processor
To enable the processor degradation feature
Select [Advanced] - [Memory/Processor Error] - [Halt].
To check the installed processor status
Select [Main] - [Processor Settings] and check the status indications.
The on-screen processor numbers and socket locations on the IO board are associated as shown in the
following figure.
To clear the processor error information
Select [Main] - [Processor Settings] - [Processor Retest] - [Yes] and reboot.
Select [Server] - [Clear FRU LED] - [Yes] and reboot.*
* Only when [Server] - [FRU LED Feature] - [Enabled] has been selected.
Processor #1
Processor #3
Processor #2
Processor #4
4-5
4-6
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
Security
To set passwords on the BIOS
Select [Security] - [Set Supervisor Password] and enter a password.
Supervisor password and User password can be set separately, and only User password has a restriction to
access to SETUP utility.
To enable/disable the POWER switch and SLEEP switch
„
To disable
Select [Security] - [Power Switch Inhibit] - [Enabled].
„
To enable
Select [Security] - [Power Switch Inhibit] - [Disabled].
IMPORTANT: Enabling [Power Switch Inhibit] disables forced shutdown (see Chapter 8)
as well as power on/off using the POWER switch.
To set the secure mode
Select [Security] - [Secure Mode] and set each item.
External Devices
To set up external devices
Select [Advanced] - [Peripheral Configuration] and set up each device.
Internal Devices
To set up internal PCI devices of the server
Select [Advanced] - [PCI Configuration] and set up each device.
To clear the hardware configuration data (after installing/removing internal devices)
Select [Advanced] - [Reset Configuration Data] - [Yes].
PCI Hot Plug
To install the PCI board with the PCI hot plug
Select [Advanced] - [PCI Configuration] - [Hot Plug PCI Control] - [Minimum/Middle/Maximum*]
* The setting varies depending on the PCI board subject to the hot plug. See the table below.
Board name
100BASE-TX Adapter
100BASE-T Adapter
Setting Value
Minimum
Minimum
Saving the Configuration Data
To save the BIOS configuration data
Select [Exit] - [Exit Saving Changes] or [Save Changes].
To discard changes to the BIOS configuration data
Select [Exit] - [Exit Discarding Changes] or [Discard Changes].
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
To resume the default BIOS configuration data (may differ from factory-set value)
Select [Exit] - [Load Setup Defaults].
To save the current value as user default
Select [Exit] - [Save Custom Defaults].
To load the user-defined default
Select [Exit] - [Load Custom Defaults].
Menu and Parameter Descriptions
The SETUP utility has the following six major menus:
„
Main
„
Advanced
„
Security
„
Server
„
Boot
„
Exit
To set minute functions, select a submenu from the above menus. The following describes available functions and
parameters, as well as the factory-set, for each menu.
4-7
4-8
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
Main
After entering SETUP, the Main menu appears first. To display a submenu, position the cursor on a selection that has a
submenu (preceded by symbol f) and press Enter.
The items which can be set on the Main menu screen and their functions are described below.
Option
System Time
System Date
Legacy Floppy A
Legacy Floppy B
Hard Disk Pre-Delay
Primary IDE
Master/Primary IDE
Slave
Language
Parameter
HH:MM:SS
MM/DD/YYYY
Disabled
1.2MB
5 1/4"
720Kb
3 1/2"
[1.44/1.25MB 3 1/2"]
2.88MB 3 1/2"
[Disabled]
1.2MB
5 1/4"
720Kb
3 1/2"
1.44/1.25MB 3 1/2"
2.88MB 3 1/2"
[Disabled]
3 seconds
6 seconds
9 seconds
12 seconds
15 seconds
21 seconds
30 seconds
–
[English (US)]
French
German
Spanish
Italian
Description
Set the time.
Set the date.
Set the settings of floppy disk drive A
(standard configuration).
Normally set to "1.44/1.25 MB 3.5".
Your Setting
Set the settings of floppy disk drive B.
Set to "Disabled" since the server does not
support drive B.
Wait for the specified time until the first
access to the IDE device during POST.
Displays the information on the device
connected to each channel on the submenu.
(Display only)
Select the language used for SETUP.
[
]: Factory-set
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
4-9
Processor Settings
Selecting "Processor Settings" on the Main menu shows the following submenu.
See the table below for the items.
Option
Processor Retest
Processor Speed
Setting
Processor 1-4
CPUID
Parameter
[No]
Yes
–
Description
Clears the error information on the processor.
–
A numeral indicates the ID of processor. "Disabled"
indicates that the processor is defected by BMC.
"Not Installed" indicates that the processor is not
installed.
(Display only)
Indicates the L2 cache of processor.
Processor 1-4
L2 Cache Size
Processor 1-4
L3 Cache Size
Hyper-Threading
Technology
–
Execute Disable
Bit
Intel(R)
Virtualization
Technology
[Disabled]
Enabled
[Disabled]
Enabled
Echo TPR
[Enabled]
Disabled
–
Disabled
[Enabled]
Your Setting
Indicates the frequency of the processor.
Indicates the L3 cache size if the processor has L3
cache memory.
Setting this item to "Enabled" allows the
hyper-threading technology to be used in the ACPI
mode. From operating system that supports
Hyper-Threading Technology feature, the specified
number of processors is twice as many as the actual
number of the installed processors.
With Windows 2000 Server / Advanced Server, the
operation of hyper-threading technology is not
guaranteed
Disables or enables the Execute Disable Bit feature of
the processor.
This menu appears only when the processor supports Intel® Virtualization
Technology.
Specify whether the Intel® Virtualization Technology is enabled or disabled.
If the parameter is changed, the DC power of the system must be turned off.
Select [Exit] → [Exit Saving Changes] and restart the system. Then, turn off
the DC power on POST screen.
Specify whether Echo TPR is enabled or disabled.
This menu appears only on servers with Dual-Core Intel® Xeon™
Processors.
[ ]: Factory-set
4-10
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
Advanced
The Advanced menu appears if you move the cursor to the position of "Advanced."
To display a submenu, position the cursor on a selection that has a submenu (preceded by symbol f) and press Enter.
See the table below for the items.
Option
Boot-time
Diagnostic
Screen
Parameter
[Disabled]
Enabled
Reset
Configuration
Data
NumLock
[No]
Yes
Memory/
Processor Error
On
[Off]
[Boot]
Halt
Description
Specify whether the self-diagnosis (POST) running screen is
displayed or not on booting.
If this item is set to "Disabled," our logo appears during POST.
(Pressing Esc in the status causes the screen display to be
switched to the POST execution screen.
The Boot-time Diagnostic Screen is automatically enabled if the
Console Redirection is enabled.
Select "Yes" to clear the extended system configuration data
area (system information stored by POST). The parameter is
changed to "No" after the system is booted.
Specify whether the NumLock is enabled or disabled on
booting.
Indicates whether POST is paused at the occurrence of a
processor or memory error during the execution of POST.
When processor error or Memory error is encountered, the
utility is not paused at the end of POST if this item is set to
"Halt" and even though "POST Error Pause" of "Server" menu is
"Enabled".
Your Setting
[
]: Factory-set
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
4-11
Memory Configuration
Selecting "Memory Configuration" on the Advanced menu shows the following screen.
See the table below for the items.
Option
DIMM Group
#1 - #8
Status
Parameter
Normal
Not installed
Disabled
Memory
Retest
Extended
RAM Step
[No]
Yes
1MB
1KB
Every Location
[Disabled]
[Disabled]
Enabled
[Normal]
Mirror
RAID
[Disabled]
Enabled
Online Spare
Memory
Memory RAS
Feature
Hot-Add
Memory
Support
Description
Indicates the current memory status.
"Normal" indicates that the memory devices operate normally.
"Disabled" indicates that one or more memory devices are
defected.
"Not Installed" indicates that no memory devices are installed.
(Display only)
Clears the DIMM group error status information. Run this menu
when the failed DIMM(s) are replaced.
"1MB" indicates that the memory test is done in the unit of 1MB.
"1KB" indicates that the memory test is done in the unit of 1KB.
"Every-Location" indicates that every memory device is tested.
"Disabled" indicates that only memory initialization is done.
Select "Enabled" to enable the Online Spare Memory feature.
Your Setting
Set the memory configuration. Select "Mirror" to enable the
memory mirroring function. Select "RAID" to enable the memory
RAID function.
Specify whether to use the Hot-Add Memory feature on
Windows Server™ 2003 Enterprise Edition or Datacenter
Edition. Select "Enabled" to use the Hot-Add Memory feature.
[
]: Factory-set
4-12
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
PCI Configuration
Selecting "PCI Configuration" on the Advanced menu shows the following screen. Selecting an item on the screen
allows the proper submenu to appear.
See the table blow for the items.
Option
PCI Slot 1-9
Option ROM
Parameter
[Enabled]
Disabled
Description
Disables/enables the Option ROM BIOS on the PCI bus.
When the graphic accelerator board is installed or the disk
array controller or SCSI controller boards to be installed
are connected to the hard disk in which operating system
is installed, set this item to "Enabled." When the LAN
controller board with installation of the option ROM BIOS
is used but the board does not provide network booting,
set this item to "Disabled."
Your Setting
[
IMPORTANT: "PCI Slot x Option ROM" should be set to enable only when the PCI slot
accommodates a PCI card involved in the boot process, i.e. a SCSI or a RAID controller
that manages boot disks or a LAN board with Boot on LAN features…
]: Factory-set
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
4-13
Hot-plug PCI Control
Selecting "Hot-plug PCI Control" on the PCI Configuration submenu shows the following screen.
See the table blow for the items.
Option
Reserving
memory space for
PHP
Parameter
[Disabled]
Minimum
Middle
Maximum
Description
Determines memory space at every empty slot for PHP
(PCI Hot-plug).
Reserved memory space is:
[Disabled]
None
[Minimum]
6 (2+4) MB
[Middle]
48 (16+32) MB
[Maximum]
96 (32+64) MB
Your Setting
[
NOTE: The bus number of PCI slot varies depending on whether this parameter is set to
"Disabled" or others. Pay attention when you need to setup the program again.
]: Factory-set
4-14
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
Embedded SAS/Embedded NIC/Embedded Video Controller
Selecting "Embedded SAS", "Embedded NIC", or "Embedded Video Controller" on the PCI Configuration submenu
shows the following screen.
See the table blow for the items.
Option
SAS Controller
LAN Controller
Video Controller
Option ROM Scan*
Parameter
[Enabled]
Disabled
Description
Indicates whether the on-board controller is enabled or
disabled.
[Enabled]
Disabled
Displays the submenu for indicating whether the
expansion of BIOS of on-board controller is enabled or
disabled.
Do not set this option to "Disabled".
Your Setting
[
* Only displayed for SAS and LAN controllers.
]: Factory-set
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
Peripheral Configuration
Selecting "Peripheral Configuration" on the Advanced menu shows the following screen:
See the table below for the items.
IMPORTANT: Note that the interrupt and/or base I/O address are not overlapped with
others. If the value set for the interrupt or base I/O address is used in another resource, the
yellow asterisk (*) appears. Reset any item with the yellow asterisk properly.
4-15
4-16
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
Option
Serial Port A
Base I/O Address
Interrupt
Serial Port B
Base I/O Address
Interrupt
Parallel Port
Mode
Base I/O Address
Interrupt
DMA channel
PS/2 Mouse
USB Controller
Legacy USB
Support
Parameter
Disabled
[Enabled]
[3F8]
2F8
3E8
2E8
IRQ 3
[IRQ 4]
Disabled
[Enabled]
3F8
[2F8]
3E8
2E8
[IRQ 3]
IRQ 4
Disabled
[Enabled]
Output Only
Bi-directional
EPP
[ECP]
[378]
278
IRQ 5
[IRQ 7]
[DMA 1]
DMA 3
Disabled
[Enabled]
Disabled
[Enabled]
Disabled
[Enabled]
Description
Specify whether serial port A is enabled or disabled.
Your Setting
Selects the base address and interrupt (IRQ) for serial
port A. These menus are displayed when the Serial
port A is enabled.
Specify whether serial port B is enabled or disabled.
Selects the base address and interrupt (IRQ) for serial
port B. These menus are displayed when the Serial
port B is enabled.
Specify whether the parallel port is enabled or
disabled.
Selects the parallel port operation mode, base
address, interrupt (IRQ), and DMA channel. These
menus are displayed when the Parallel Port is enabled.
Specify whether the mouse is enabled or disabled.
Specify whether the USB controller is enabled or
disabled.
Specify whether the USB keyboard is made available
in operating system which does not support USB
formally.
[
]: Factory-set
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
4-17
Advanced Chipset Control
Selecting "Advanced Chipset Control" on the Advanced menu shows the following screen. Positioning the cursor on a
menu (item preceded by symbol "f") and pressing Enter opens the corresponding submenu.
See the table below for the items.
Option
Multimedia Timer
Wake On
LAN/PME
Wake On Ring
Wake On RTC
Alarm
Parameter
[Disabled]
Enabled
[Disabled]
Enabled
[Disabled]
Enabled
[Disabled]
Enabled
Description
Selecting "Enabled" enables this function if the
operating system supports HPET feature.
Specify whether the remote power-on function through
network is enabled or disabled.
Specify whether the remote power-on function through
a serial port is enabled or disabled.
Specify whether the remote power-on function through
an RTC alarm is enabled or disabled.
Your Setting
[
]: Factory-set
4-18
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
PCI Device
Selecting "PCI Device" on "Advanced Chipset Control" of the Advanced menu shows the following screen.
See the table below for the items.
Option
PCI IRQ line 1 - 5
PCI IRQ line 8
Parameter
Disabled
[Auto Select]
3
5
6
7
9
10
11
12
14
15
Description
Set the assignment of each of 7 interrupt signals on
the PCI bus to a specific IRQ request.
Parameter "11" cannot be selected if they are the same
as those set for BMC IRQ in the Server menu.
Your Setting
[
]: Factory-set
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
4-19
Security
Positioning the cursor to "Security" shows the following screen.
On the Security menu, register the Supervisor password first, then the User password. When the User password is
registered, you can access all the menu items.
Selectable only when
User Password is
registered
Selectable only when
User Password is
registered
If you press Enter with the selection of "Set Supervisor Password", such a screen as shown below appears.
Specify the Supervisor passwords on the dialog box.
including alphanumerics and symbols.
Enter each of the passwords with up to seven characters
After the Supervisor password has been registered, specify the User password in the similar way.
IMPORTANT:
„
Set the passwords only after operating system is installed.
„
If you forget the passwords, contact your service representative.
See the table below for the items.
Option
Set User
Password
Parameter
Up to seven
alphanumerics
Set Supervisor
Password
Up to seven
alphanumerics
Password on boot
[Disabled]
Enabled
Description
Press Enter to display the user password input screen. For
this password, accessing to the SETUP menu is restricted.
This item becomes accessible after the Supervisor password
is registered.
Press Enter to display the supervisor password input screen.
This password enables all the SETUP menus to be accessed.
This setting can be done only on login with the password input
of "Supervisor" at start of SETUP.
Specify whether the passwords are entered or not on booting.
At first the supervisor password must be set. If the supervisor
password is set and this option is invalid, BIOS determines
that a user is booting. This item becomes accessible after the
User password is registered.
Your Setting
4-20
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
Option
Fixed disk boot
sector
Secure Mode
Timer
Hot Key
(CTRL+ALT+)
Parameter
[Normal]
Write Protect
[Disabled]
1 minute
2 minutes
5 minutes
10 minutes
20 minutes
60 minutes
120 minutes
[L]
Z
Secure Mode Boot
[Disabled]
Enabled
Video Blanking
[Disabled]
Enabled
Floppy Write
Protect
[Disabled]
Enabled
Power Switch
Inhibit
[Disabled]
Enabled
Description
Prevents data from being written to hard disks.
Your Setting
Specify the period from no input from the keyboard or mouse
to the point at which the system enters into the secure mode.
This item becomes accessible after the User password is
registered.
Specify the key with which the secure mode is started. Press
the selected key with the Ctrl and Alt pressed to start the
secure mode. This item becomes accessible after the User
password is registered.
Specify whether the server is operated in the secure mode at
the start of the server. This item becomes accessible after the
User password is registered.
Specify whether the monitor is disconnected if the server is
entered into the secure mode. This item becomes accessible
after the User password is registered.
Specify whether data write to the floppy disk inserted into the
floppy disk drive is enabled or disabled in the secure mode.
This item becomes accessible after the User password is
registered.
Specify whether the power switch is enabled or disabled. If this
item is set to "Enabled," the power cannot be turned off by
using the POWER switch (including the forced shutdown). The
system cannot also enter the power saving mode by pressing
the SLEEP switch. This item becomes accessible after the
User password is registered.
[
NOTE: The Secure Mode is used to restrict access from unauthorized users. In the Secure
Mode, the POWER switch, SLEEP switch, RESET switch, keyboard and mouse are
disabled. The lamps on the keyboard flash in order from the ScrollLock lamp, the
CapsLock lamp, and the NumLock lamp. To resume server operation in the normal state
from the Secure Mode, enter the user password from the keyboard and press Enter key.
]: Factory-set
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
Server
Positioning the cursor on "Server" shows the Server menu.
The items which can be set on the Server menu and their functions are described below. For the setting, first select
"System Management" or "Console Redirection" and press Enter to display the proper submenu.
See the table below for the items.
Option
Assert NMI
on PERR
Parameter
Disabled
[Enabled]
Assert NMI
on SERR
Disabled
[Enabled]
FRB-2
Policy
Disable FRB2 Timer
[Disable BSP]
Do Not Disable BSP
Retry 3 Times
[Disabled]
5 minutes
10 minutes
15 minutes
20 minutes
25 minutes
30 minutes
35 minutes
40 minutes
45 minutes
50 minutes
55 minutes
60 minutes
Boot
Monitoring
Description
Indicates whether PCI PERR is supported or not.
If this item is set "Enabled", the system offers an error
through the NMI when an error occurred.
Indicates whether PCI SERR is supported or not.
If this item is set "Enabled", the system offers an error
through the NMI when an error occurred.
Set this item to "Disable BSP".
Indicates whether the boot monitoring function is enabled or
disabled on booting.
To use this function, install NEC ESMPRO Agent. Do not use
this function if the system is booted from operating system
without installation of NEC ESMPRO Agent or CD-ROM. Set
this item to "Disabled" if ARCServe uses the Disaster
Recovery Option.
Your Setting
4-21
4-22
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
Option
Boot
Monitoring
Policy
Parameter
[Retry 3 Times]
Retry Service Boot
Always Retest
Thermal
Sensor
BMC IRQ
Disabled
[Enabled]
Disabled
[IRQ 11]
Disabled
[Enabled]
Stay Off
[Last State]
Power On
[0] - 255
Post Error
Pause
AC-LINK
Power ON
Delay Time
FRU LED
Feature
Clear FRU
LED
Platform
Event
Filtering
Disabled
[Enabled]
[No]
Yes
Disabled
[Enabled]
Description
Your Setting
Appears when the boot monitoring feature is enabled. This
item indicates the processing at the occurrence of timeout
during boot monitoring.
If [Retry 3 times] is selected, the system is reset after the
occurrence of timeout and operating system boot is retried up
to three times. The failure in the third boot causes the boot to
be tried from the service partition.
If [Retry Service Boot] is selected, the system is reset after
the occurrence of timeout and operating system boot is
retried up to three times. Then the boot is tried from the
service partition for three times.
If [Always Reset] is selected, the system is reset after the
occurrence of timeout and operating system boot is retried
repeatedly.
Indicates whether the temperature sensor monitoring function
is enabled or disabled.
Indicates the IRQ of the BMC interrupt.
Indicates whether POST is aborted once at the end of POST
if an error occurs during the execution of POST.
Indicates the AC-LINK function. Shows the state of the power
of the server.
Sets the power on delay time when "Power On" or "Last
State" is specified for AC LINK.
Select "Enabled" to turn on the error lamp to identify the
location if the system detects a failure.
Select "Yes" to turn off the FRU LED. When the faulty
component is replaced, turn off the FRU LED.
Enables or disables the Platform Event Filtering feature of the
baseboard management controller (BMC).
[
]: Factory-set
The table below shows the operation when the AC power to the server is turn off once and then on again, depending on
the setting of "AC-LINK."
System status before AC power off
Operating
Aborting (DC power being off also)
Forced shutdown
Setting of AC-LINK
Stay Off
Last State
Off
On
Off
Off
Off
Off
Power On
On
On
On
* Press the power switch continuously at least four seconds. This forcibly turns off the power.
IMPORTANT: Set this item to "Power on" in order to link the AC power source supplied
from UPS when the server is connected to UPS.
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
4-23
System Management
Selecting "System Management" on the Server menu shows the following screen.
See the table below for the items.
Option
BIOS Version
Board Part #
Board Serial #
System Part #
System Serial #
Chassis Part #
Chassis Serial #
BMC Device ID
BMC Device Rev
BMC Firmware Rev
SDR Rev
Parameter
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
PIA Rev
ARM MAC Address
–
–
Description
Indicates the version of BIOS. (Display only)
Indicates the IO board information. (Display only)
Your Setting
Indicates the system information. (Display only)
Indicates the chassis information. (Display only)
Indicates the BMC (Baseboard Management
Controller) information. (Display only)
Indicates the revision of SDR (Sensor Data Record).
(Display only)
Indicates the revision of PIA. (Display only)
Indicates the default DNS (Hostname) of
Management LAN Port. (Display only)
[
]: Factory-set
4-24
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
Console Redirection
Selecting "Console Redirection" on the Server menu shows the following screen.
See the table below for the items.
Option
BIOS Redirection
Port
ACPI Redirection
Port
Baud Rate
Flow Control
Console Type
Remote Console
Reset
Parameter
[Disabled]
Serial Port A
Serial Port B
[Disabled]
Serial Port A
Serial Port B
9600
[19.2K]
38.4K
57.6K
115.2K
None
XON/XOFF
[CTS/RTS]
CTS/RTS+CD
PC ANSI
[VT100+]
VT-UTF8
[Disabled]
Enabled
Description
Selects the port to be used as the redirection port. The
parameters specified in Peripheral Configuration
submenu is used as address and interrupt.
Your Setting
Specify the I/O port address or interrupt level used in
ACPI headless console redirection.
If [Disabled] is selected, console redirection feature is
disabled.
Specify the baud rate used for the interface with
successive hardware consoles.
Specify the flow control method.
Specify the console type.
Specify whether the reset from remote console is
enabled or disabled.
[
]: Factory-set
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
4-25
Event Log Configuration
Selecting "Event Log Configuration" on the Server menu and pressing Enter shows the following screen.
See the table below for the items.
Option
Clear All Event Log
Parameter
–
Description
Press Enter and select "Yes" to clear the system event
log.
Your Setting
[
]: Factory-set
4-26
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
Boot
Positioning the cursor on "Boot" shows the Boot menu which is used to set the boot priority.
The server searches for devices in the order set in this menu on booting. Finding the boot software, the server starts the
software.
The priority of the boot devices can be changed by using the ↑, ↓, +, and - keys. Move the cursor to the desired device
with the ↑ or ↓ key and change the priority with the + or - key.
IMPORTANT: To boot EXPRESSBUILDER, set the priority of the devices as shown in
the figure above.
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
4-27
Exit
Positioning the cursor to "Exit" shows the Exit menu.
The options on the menu are described below.
Exit Saving Changes
Select this item to terminate SETUP after saving the newly selected information in CMOS (non-volatile memory). The
selection of "Exit Saving Changes" causes the confirmation screen to appear.
If you select "Yes," SETUP is terminated with the newly selected information saved in CMOS (non-volatile memory).
Then the server automatically reboots the system.
Exit Discarding Changes
Select this item to terminate SETUP without saving the newly selected information in CMOS (non-volatile memory).
Selecting "Yes" allows SETUP to be terminated without storage of the modified information. If the setting value is
modified, the confirmation screen will appear.
Selecting "No" allows SETUP to be terminated without storage of the modified information. If you select "Yes" in the
next screen, SETUP is terminated with the modified information saved in CMOS. Then the server automatically reboots
the system.
Load Setup Defaults
Select this item to return all the values of SETUP to the default values. Selecting "Load Setup Defaults" causes the
confirmation screen to appear.
Select "Yes" to return the values to the default values. Select "No" to return to the Exit menu screen.
Save Custom Defaults/Load Custom Defaults
Running the Save Custom Defaults menu saves the current SETUP parameters as the user-defined SETUP defaults. The
Load Custom Defaults menu is used to restore the user-defined SETUP defaults.
Discard Changes
Select this item to return the values modified currently to the previous values before saving the values to CMOS.
Selecting "Discard Changes" causes the confirmation screen to appear.
Select "Yes" to discard the newly selected information and return to the previous values.
4-28
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
Save Changes
Select this item to save the newly selected information to CMOS (non-volatile memory) without the termination of
SETUP. Selecting "Save Changes" causes the confirmation screen to appear.
Select "Yes" to save the newly selected information to CMOS (non-volatile memory)
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
4-29
DISK ARRAY CONFIGURATION
This section describes the configuration utility "WebBIOS". With On Board RAID (MegaRAID ROMB), you can use
the internal hard disk drives in the disk array configuration.
RAID
This section describes the RAID features which the on-board RAID controller (MegaRAID ROMB) supports.
Overview of RAID
What is RAID (Redundant Array of Inexpensive Disks)?
RAID is an abbreviation for "Redundant Array of Inexpensive Disks". The RAID technology allows more than one hard
disk drive (HDD) to be handled collectively.
In actual, RAID can configure more than one HDD as a single array (disk group) to operate the HDDs effectively. This
can bring higher performance than a single HDD of a large capacity.
The on-board RAID (MegaRAID ROMB) has a feature to divide a single disk group into several logical drives. The
on-board RAID (MegaRAID ROMB) recognizes these virtual disks as if it were a single HDD. The on-board RAID
(MegaRAID ROMB) accesses to more than one HDD configuring a disk group in parallel.
Some RAID levels can recover data from remaining data and parity by using rebuild feature if an error occurs in a
single HDD. This can provide high reliability for the system.
RAID Levels
The record mode enabling the RAID feature includes several levels. Among the levels, the on-board RAID (MegaRAID
ROMB) supports the following levels; RAID 0, RAID 1, and RAID 5. The number of HDDs required to create a disk
group varies depending on the RAID level as shown in the table below.
RAID level
RAID 0
RAID 1
RAID 5
Spanning of RAID 1
Spanning of RAID 5
Number of required HDDs
Min.
Max.
1
13
2
2
3
13
4
4
6
12
NOTES:
„
For details of the RAID levels, see "RAID Levels" described later in this chapter.
„
If an additional HDD cage is installed, up to 13 hard disk drives can be installed in the
server.
4-30
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
Disk Group
A disk group is configured with more than one HDDs.
Up to five disk groups are permitted by the on-board RAID (MegaRAID ROMB) when five HDDs are installed in the
server.
The figure below shows a sample configuration. The three HDDs are connected to the on-board RAID (MegaRAID
ROMB), creating one disk group (DG).
Disk array controller
Disk Group 0: 108 GB
Disk 1
(36 GB)
Disk 2
(36 GB)
Disk 3
(36 GB)
Virtual Disk
A virtual disk is a logical drive defined in disk group. It is recognized as a physical drive by OS. Up to 40 virtual disks
are permitted by the on-board RAID (MegaRAID ROMB).
The figure below shows a sample configuration in which the on-board RAID (MegaRAID ROMB) is connected with
three HDDs, creating one disk group (DG). Two RAID5 virtual disks (VD) are defined in the DG.
Disk array controller
DG0 108 GB
VD0-1
20GB
VD0-2
20GB
VD0-3
20GB
VD0 (RAID5)
40 GB
VD1-1
16 GB
VD1-2
16 GB
VD1-3
16 GB
VD1 (RAID5)
32 GB
Disk 1
(36 GB)
Disk 2
(36 GB)
Disk 3
(36 GB)
Parity
The parity means redundant data. A single set of redundant data is created from the data saved in more than one HDD.
The created redundant data is used for data recovery when a HDD is defected.
Hot-Swap
The hot-swap enables a HDD to be removed (or replaced) under system operation.
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
4-31
Hot-Spare Disk
The hot-spare disk is prepared as an auxiliary HDD substituting for a defected HDD included in a logical drive which is
configured at a redundant RAID level. Detecting a HDD fault, the system disconnects the HDD (or makes it offline)
and starts rebuild using the hot-spare disk.
NOTE: For standby rebuild (rebuild using hot-spare disks), see "Features of On-board
RAID (MegaRAID ROMB)".
RAID Levels
This section details the RAID levels which the on-board RAID (MegaRAID ROMB) can support.
Characteristics of RAID Levels
The table below lists the characteristics of the RAID levels.
Level
Function
RAID0
Striping
Redundanc
y
No
RAID1
Mirroring
Yes
RAID5
Striping of both data
and redundant data
Yes
Characteristics
• Data read/write at the highest rate
• Largest capacity
• Capacity: (capacity of single HDD) ×
•
•
•
•
(number of HDDs)
Two HDDs required
Capacity: capacity of single HDD
Three or more HDDs required
Capacity: (capacity of single HDD) ×
((number of HDDs) - 1)
RAID0
In RAID 0, data to be recorded is distributed to HDDs. The mode is called "striping".
In the figure below, data is recorded in stripe 1 (disk 1), stripe 2 (disk 2), and stripe 3 (disk 3)… in the order. Because
RAID0 allows all HDDs to be accessed collectively, it can provide the best disk access performance.
IMPORTANT: RAID 0 cannot have data redundancy. If a HDD is defected, the data
saved in the HDD cannot be recovered.
Disk array controller
Disk 1
Disk 2
Disk 3
Stripe 1
Stripe 2
Stripe 3
Stripe 4
Stripe 5
Stripe 6
4-32
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
RAID1
In the RAID1 level, data saved in a HDD is written to another HDD without change. The mode is called "mirroring".
When data is written onto a single HDD, the same data is written onto another HDD. If either of the HDDs is defected,
the other HDD containing the same data can substitute for the defected HDD. Thus the system can continue to operate
without interruption.
Disk array controller
Disk 1
Disk 2
Stripe 1
Stripe 1
Stripe 2
Stripe 2
RAID5
In RAID5, data is distributed to HDDs by striping and, at the same time, the parity (redundant data) is distributed to the
HDDs. This mode is called "striping with distributed parity".
Each of stripe x, stripe x+1, and parity (x, x+1) created from stripe x and stripe x+1 is written onto a specific HDD.
Accordingly, the total capacity assigned to the parity is just the same as the capacity of a single HDD. If any one of the
HDDs configuring a logical drive is defected, data is still available with no problems.
Disk array controller
Disk 1
Disk 2
Disk 3
Stripe 1
Stripe 2
Parity (1, 2)
Stripe 3
Parity (3, 4)
Stripe 4
Parity (5, 6)
Stripe 5
Stripe 6
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
4-33
Spanning of RAID1 (also knoxn as RAID10)
Data to be recorded is distributed to two HDDs in mirroring mode. Then, each mirrored data is written onto HDD by
striping. Owing to this feature, high disk access performance of RAID0 and, in addition, high reliability of RAID1 can
be achieved.
Disk array controller
Disk 1
Disk 2
Disk 3
Disk 4
Stripe 1
Stripe 1
Stripe 2
Stripe 2
Stripe 3
Stripe 3
Stripe 4
Stripe 4
Stripe 5
Stripe 5
Stripe 6
Stripe 6
RAID1
RAID1
RAID0
Spanning of RAID5 (also known as RAID50)
Data is distributed to HDDs by striping with distributed parity, and then written onto HDDs by striping. Owing to this
feature, high disk access performance of RAID0 and, in addition, high reliability of RAID5 can be achieved.
Disk array controller
Disk 1
Disk 2
Disk 3
Disk 4
Stripe 1
Stripe 2
Parity (1, 2)
Stripe 3
Stripe 4
Parity (3, 4)
Stripe 5
Parity (5, 6)
Stripe 6
Stripe 7
Parity (7, 8)
Stripe 8
Parity (9, 10)
Stripe 9
Stripe 10
Parity (11, 12)
Stripe 11
Stripe 12
RAID5
Disk 5
RAID5
RAID0
Disk 6
4-34
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
Features of On-board RAID (MegaRAID ROMB)
This section describes the features of the on-board RAID (MegaRAID ROMB).
Rebuild
If a HDD is defected, the rebuild feature can recover the data in the defected HDD. The rebuild can be applied to
redundant virtual disks in the RAID1 or RAID5 level.
Manual Rebuild
The manual rebuild can be performed by using MegaRAID Storage Manager (called MSM hereafter), the management
utility of the on-board RAID (MegaRAID ROMB). Select a HDD and start the rebuild manually.
For the detailed operation, refer to the "MegaRAID Storage Manager™ User's Guide" in EXPRESSBUILDER
CD-ROM that comes with the server.
Auto Rebuild
The on-board RAID (MegaRAID ROMB) can automatically start the rebuild without use of any utility such as MSM.
The auto rebuild includes two types as follows:
„
Standby rebuild
Automatic rebuild by using hot-spare disks. In the configuration including hot-spare disks, the rebuild is
performed automatically if a HDD assigned to a virtual disk is defected.
„
Hot-swap rebuild
Automatic rebuild by hot-swapping defected HDD.
IMPORTANT: Note the following for the rebuild:
„
The HDD used for rebuild should have the same capacity, rotation speed, and standard
as the defected HDD.
„
During rebuild, the processing rate is decreased due to much load.
„
During rebuild, do not shutdown or reboot the server. If the server is shutdown by an
unforeseen accident such as power interruption, turn on the power again as soon as
possible. The rebuild is automatically restarted.
„
The interval from the removal of the defected HDD to the installation of a substitute
HDD should be 90 sec or longer.
„
If the hot-swap rebuild does not operate, perform the manual rebuild.
„
The following hard disk drive cannot be specified as a hot spare disk.
– Hard disk drive with partitions
– Hard disk drive used for another array
Prepare another new hard disk drive or a formatted hard disk drive.
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
4-35
Patrol Read
The patrol read gives the read & verify test in the entire area of HDDs. It can be performed for all HDDs assigned to
virtual disks and hot-spare disks.
The Patrol Read allows subsequent defects of HDDs to be detected and repaired.
For HDDs configuring redundant virtual disks or those assigned to hot-spare disks, error sectors detected during Patrol
Read can be repaired.
IMPORTANT: Note the following for the patrol read:
„
Patrol Read feature is factory-set to "Disabled".
„
To utilize Patrol Read, MSM must be installed.
„
If the system is restarted, Patrol Read is aborted. After restart of the system, Patrol Read
runs from the first step (top of HDD).
Consistency Check
The Consistency Check is used to check consistency among virtual drives. It is available for redundant virtual drives in
the RAID1 or RAID5 level.
Consistency Check can be performed through WebBIOS or MSM.
Consistency Check performs not only consistency check but also repair of error sectors. Accordingly, it can be used as
preventive maintenance.
IMPORTANT: Note the following for Consistency Check:
„
During Consistency Check, the processing rate is decreased due to much load.
„
If the system is restarted, the Consistency Check is aborted. However, the Consistency
Check resumes after restart.
Background Initialize
The Background Initialize is automatically executed when RAID5 virtual disk is created in the disk group composing of
five or more HDDs.
The Background Initialize performs the parity generation processing to the area not initialized in the background. The
processing is equivalent to that of Consistency Check.
However, the Background Initialize is not performed in the following cases.
„
Full Initialize has already been executed and completed normally before executing Background Initialize.
(*) Full Initialize is a function to clear the entire area of a virtual disk with "0".
„
Consistency Check has already been executed and completed normally before executing Background
Initialize.
„
Rebuild has already been executed and completed normally before executing Background Initialize.
„
"Yes" is specified for "Disable BGI" in VD Definition.
The Background Initialize is executed again if any of the following cases occurred in the virtual disk on which the
Background Initialize has completed.
„
When the virtual disk is degraded or offline, you execute Make Online to HDD being in offline status, and the
virtual disk becomes Optimal state.
„
When you replace the disk array controller with the maintenance parts and others.
4-36
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
„
When you execute Reconstruction to existing virtual disk to make RAID5 VD with five or more HDDs.
IMPORTANT: Note the following for Background Initialize:
„
During Background Initialize, the processing rate is decreased due to much load.
„
Background Initialize will resume a few minutes later even if it is interrupted.
Reconstruction
The reconstruction feature is used to change configuration and/or RAID level of existing virtual disk. The
Reconstruction contains the following three features, however, the on-board RAID (MegaRAID ROMB) supports
"Migration with addition" only.
Removed physical drive
Unsupported.
Migration only
Unsupported.
Migration with addition
Use this feature to add HDDs to existing virtual disk. On MSM, this feature is indicated as "Add Drive". The execution
patterns are as shown below (α: Number of HDDs to be added).
Before execution
RAID
Number
level
of HDDs
RAID0
x
RAID0
1
RAID0
x
RAID1
2
RAID1
2
RAID5
x
RAID5
x
After execution
RAID
Number
level
of HDDs
RAID0
x+α
RAID1
2
RAID5
x+α
RAID0
2+α
RAID5
2+α
RAID0
x+α
RAID5
x+α
Description
Capacity increased: equivalent to α HDDs
Capacity remains unchanged.
Capacity increased: equivalent to α-1 HDDs
Capacity increased: equivalent to α+1 HDDs
Capacity increased: equivalent to α HDDs
Capacity increased: equivalent to α+1 HDDs
Capacity increased: equivalent to α HDDs
IMPORTANT: Note the following for the Reconstruction:
„
Be sure to make backup copy of data and perform Consistency Check before starting
Reconstruction.
„
The Reconstruction is disabled in the configuration where several virtual disks are
defined in one disk group
„
During Reconstruction, the processing rate is decreased due to much load.
„
The Reconstruction is disabled for the degraded virtual disk. First execute Rebuild to
recover the virtual disk, then execute Reconstruction.
„
During Reconstruction, do not shutdown or reboot the server. If the server is shutdown
by an unforeseen accident such as power interruption, turn on the power again as soon
as possible. The Reconstruction is automatically restarted.
„
In some configuration, Background Initialize may start automatically upon completion
of reconstruction.
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
4-37
Ex: Migration with addition for RAID5 virtual disk
The figure below shows an example of adding a single 36GB HDD to a RAID5 virtual disk configured with three 36GB
HDDs.
Virtual disk(RAID5)
[Before execution]
Capacity = 72GB
36GB
36GB
36GB
36GB
Execute Migration with addition
Virtual disk(RAID5)
[After execution]
Capacity = 108GB
36GB
36GB
36GB
36GB
4-38
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
Before Using WebBIOS
Read the following sections describing supported functions and precautions before using "WebBIOS".
Supported Functions
„
Indication of model name and capacity of hard disk drive (called HDD hereafter)
„
Indication of HDD allocation status
„
Creation of virtual disk
„
Setting of RAID level
„
Setting of Stripe Block size
„
Setting of Read Policy/Write Policy/IO Policy
„
Indication of configuration information and status of virtual disk
„
Removal of virtual disk
„
Clearing of configuration
„
Execution of initialization
„
Execution of Consistency Check
„
Execution of manual rebuild
„
Execution of reconstruction
Notes on Creating Virtual Drive
The hard disk drives configuring the disk group should have the same capacity and rotation speed.
„
Be sure to execute Consistency Check after creating VD.
„
When installing an OS in VD under the Onboard RAID (MegaRAID ROMB), create a VD dedicated to OS
installation.
„
WebBIOS cannot be handled via remote console functions of NEC DianaScope.
„
The physical drive numbers shown in Physical Drives box differ from slot numbers of 3.5-inch hard disk bay.
"PD 0" denotes the physical drive number 0. See "Physical Drive Properties" described later.
„
The physical drive numbers shown in Physical Drives box of WebBIOS may differ from those shown in
MegaRAID Storage Manager.
„
The physical drive number shown in Physical Drives box of WebBIOS is identical to the Device ID shown in
Disk Properties View of MegaRAID Storage Manager.
„
In the example below, Physical Drive 2 (PD 2) in WebBIOS is displayed as Physical Drive 1 in Disk
Properties View of MegaRAID Storage Manager.
Physical Drives View of WebBIOS
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
Disk Properties View of MegaRAID Storage Manager
4-39
4-40
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
Using WebBIOS
Starting WebBIOS
1.
Press Esc when the screen with our logo appears after powering on the server.
2.
Press Ctrl + H on POST screen to start WebBIOS.
POST screen image (with no virtual disk assigned)
IMPORTANT: Do not press unnecessary key such as Pause during POST.
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
4-41
Main Menu
Shown below is [Adapter Selection] screen that appears first on WebBIOS. Select a controller to operate WebBIOS, and
click [Start].
NOTES:
„
When an optional disk array controller is installed, it is displayed as "MegaRAID SAS
8408E".
„
When an optional disk array controller is installed, it is displayed as "MegaRAID SCSI
320-2".
„
The on-board RAID controller (MegaRAID ROMB) is displayed at the bottom line.
4-42
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
When the adapter is selected on [Adapter Selection], the WebBIOS Top Menu appears.
IMPORTANT:
„
The physical drive numbers shown in Physical Drives box differ from slot numbers of
3.5-inch hard disk bay. "PD 0" denotes the physical drive number 0. See "Physical
Drive Properties" described later.
„
Do not use WebBIOS to configure MegaRAID SCSI 320-2 disk array controller.
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
Adapter Properties
When you click [Adapter Properties] on WebBIOS Top Menu, the configuration information is displayed.
Click [Next] to see the detailed settings of this controller.
4-43
4-44
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
Default settings and their explanation
Item
Battery Backup
Default
Present
None
Set Factory Defaults
[No]
Yes
Disabled
30
30
30
30
30
[Enabled]
Disabled
[None]
128MB-way
1GB-way
300
[Disabled]
Enabled
Silence
4
Cluster Mode
Rebuild Rate
Patrol Read Rate
BGI Rate
CC Rate
Reconstruction Rate
Adapter BIOS
Coercion Mode
PDF Interval
Alarm Control
Cache Flush
Interval
Spinup Drive Count
Spinup Delay
StopOnError
2
6
[Disabled]
Enabled
Description
Displays Properties.
• When battery is installed: Present
• When battery is not installed: None
Restores factory defaults.
Change
–
–
Recommended value: 30
Recommended value: 30
Recommended value: 30
Recommended value: 30
Recommended value: 30
–
Prohibited
Permitted
Permitted
Permitted
Permitted
Permitted
Prohibited
–
Prohibited
–
Disabled: Does not issue an alarm.
Prohibited
Prohibited *2
–
Prohibited
–
–
–
Prohibited *1
Prohibited *1
Prohibited
Permitted
*1 After performing Set Factory Defaults, change values of "Spinup Drive Count" and "Spinup Delay" as shown in the
table above, if they are not.
*2 Error notification by beep sound is not issued even if Alarm Control is set to Enabled.
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
4-45
How to change setting value
On [Adapter Properties] screen, change a parameter to desired value, and then click [Submit] at the centre of the screen
to determine the new value.
The status of "Battery Backup" is indicated as "Present". Clicking [Present] opens the Battery Status screen as shown
below.
IMPORTANT: You cannot change values for "Auto Learn Period", "Next Learn Time",
and "Learn Delay Interval".
NOTES:
„
Status field shows "Charging" when the battery is in charged status.
It shows "Discharging" when the battery is in discharged status.
„
When powering on the server after replaced the battery, the Status may not immediately
change to "Charging". In that case, power on the server for several hours, and check
"Status" again.
4-46
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
Scan Devices
When you click [Scan Devices] on WebBIOS top menu, the HDDs connected are detected again. Use this feature when
you have installed a new HDD additionally while the WebBIOS is running.
IMPORTANT: If the newly connected HDD contains another configuration information,
[Foreign Configuration] screen as shown below appears. To use the HDD as new one, click
[ClearForeignCfg] to clear the configuration information in HDD.
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
Virtual Disks
When you click [Virtual Disks] on WebBIOS top menu, the screen for operating the VD that has already been
configured.
IMPORTANT: If no virtual disk exists, the upper right column of the screen will be blank.
Use this menu only when a virtual disk exists.
4-47
4-48
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
Physical Drives
When you click [Physical Disks] on WebBIOS top menu, the screen for operating the physical drive (HDD) appears.
IMPORTANT: If no physical disk exists, the upper right column of the screen will be
blank. Use this menu only when a physical disk exists.
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
4-49
Physical Drives Properties
Take the following procedures to check Physical Drive Properties. Shown below is an example to check property of
physical drive number 0.
1.
Click the desired PD number (PD 0).
2.
Click the checkbox for [Properties].
3.
Click [Go].
4-50
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
The Slot Number field shows a slot number to which a 3.5-inch disk bay is installed. In the example, the disk
bay is installed in slot 2.
NOTE: If you click the checkbox for [Locate] and then
, nothing happens,
this feature is not supported.
Configuration Wizard
Use this wizard to configure a RAID using the HDDs. The detailed explanation of this feature is given in "Configuring
Virtual Disk".
Adapter Selection
If several disk array controllers N8103-90F are installed in the server, you need to select an adapter controlled by
WebBIOS to configure each adapter. Clicking [Adapter Selection] on WebBIOS top menu opens the [Adapter
Selection] screen again.
Physical View / Logical View
If the virtual disk has been configured using the disk array controller, DG (disk group) is displayed on WebBIOS top
menu. Clicking [Physical View] displays information for HDDs in DG. Clicking [Logical View] displays virtual disk in
DG.
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
4-51
Events
The Events screen is used to confirm the system events.
IMPORTANT: The On Board RAID (MegaRAID ROMB) does not support Events
feature.
Exit
When you click [Exit] on WebBIOS top menu, a confirmation screen to exit from WebBIOS is displayed. Click [Yes] to
exit from WebBIOS.
The screen as shown below appears when WebBIOS is terminated. Restart the server.
4-52
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
Configuring Virtual Disk
This section describes the procedures for configuration of VD (virtual disk) using WebBIOS.
Configuration Wizard
When you click [Configuration Wizard] on WebBIOS top menu, the screen as shown below appears. Select the relevant
operation, and click [Next] at lower right of the screen.
Clear Configuration
Allows you to clear existing configuration.
New Configuration
Clears the existing configuration and creates a new VD. If you have
any existing data in the earlier defined virtual disk, the data will be
lost.
Add Configuration
Retains the old configuration and then adds new virtual disk.
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
When you select [New Configuration] or [Add Configuration], the screen as shown below appears.
Custom Configuration:
Allows you to define all aspects of the configuration, RAID level,
size, and others.
Auto Configuration with
Redundancy:
Automatically creates redundant virtual disk.
Auto Configuration
without Redundancy:
Automatically creates non-redundant virtual disk.
IMPORTANT: The On Board RAID (MegaRAID ROMB) supports "Custom
Configuration" only.
4-53
4-54
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
Use this menu to define several physical drives (PD) as a disk group (DG).
IMPORTANT: The physical drive number is not identical to the slot number of disk bay.
To define several Disk Groups in ascending order of the slot number of disk bay, confirm
the slot number on Properties screen of Physical Drive.
4.
To add physical drives (HDD) to a Disk Group, hold Ctrl while selecting UNCONF GOOD drives.
5.
Upon completion of selection, click [Accept DG] at the lower right of the screen.
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
6.
4-55
A new DG is defined in the Disk Groups frame. After DG has been defined, click [Next] at the lower right of the
screen.
Define the virtual disk (VD) in DG that has been created in previous step. When DG was defined, [VD Definition]
screen is displayed. The defined DG is displayed in Configuration column. Available RAID levels and maximum size
for VD are also displayed.
NOTE: Disk Cache Policy field may be displayed as "Disable" depending on firmware
version of On Board RAID (MegaRAID ROMB). It is not a problem in operating the
system.
4-56
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
As an example, define a RAID5 VD of YYYYY MB.
1.
Specify the necessary parameters in Virtual Disk column.
2.
Enter "YYYYY" (the maximum size allowed for RAID5) in "Select Size" field.
3.
Click [Accept] at the lower centre of the screen.
NOTE: Disk Cache Policy field may be displayed as "Disable" depending on firmware
version of On Board RAID (MegaRAID ROMB). It is not a problem in operating the
system.
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
4-57
4.
VD 0 is created in DG 0 as shown in the screen below.
5.
After making sure that the VD is created correctly, click [Accept] at the lower right of the screen.
6.
The confirmation message "Save this Configuration?" appears. Click "Yes" to save the configuration.
7.
The confirmation message "Want to Initialize the New Virtual Disks?" appears. Normally, select "Yes".
8.
"Virtual Disks" operation screen is displayed. If no other operation is required, click [Home] at the lower left of
the screen.
4-58
9.
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
The WebBIOS top menu is displayed. Virtual Disk you have created is displayed in the lower right frame of the
screen.
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
Configure SPAN
The following explains the sample procedure to configure the spanning of RAID1 with four HDDs.
IMPORTANT: To define two or more Disk Groups (DG) to the disk bay in ascending
order of the slot number, the physical drive numbers do not match the slot numbers of disk
bay. You need to check the actual slot number on Properties view of Physical Drives.
1.
Click [Configuration Wizard] on WebBIOS top menu to start Wizard.
2.
To add physical drives (HDD) to a Disk Group, hold Ctrl while selecting UNCONF GOOD drives. (In the
example, two DGs will be configured and spanned.)
3.
Upon completion of selection, click [Accept DG] at the lower right of the screen.
4-59
4-60
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
4.
4-61
A new DG is defined in the Disk Groups frame. After DG has been defined, click [Next] at the lower right of the
screen.
Configure the spanning of RAID1 using the DG that has been created in previous step. When DG was defined,
[VD Definition] screen is displayed. The defined DG is displayed in Configuration column. Available RAID
levels and maximum size for VD are also displayed.
5.
Hold Ctrl and click the two DGs in the Configuration column to select.
6.
Specify the necessary parameters in Virtual Disk column.
NOTE: Disk Cache Policy field may be displayed as "Disable" depending on firmware
version of On Board RAID (MegaRAID ROMB). It is not a problem in operating the
system.
4-62
7.
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
Enter YYYYY x 2 (multiply the maximum size of each DG by the number of DGs) in "Select Size" field.
IMPORTANT: To enter the value of virtual disk size below, multiply "the maximum size
of each DG allowed for the RAID level" by the number of DGs.
8.
Click [Accept] at the lower centre of the screen.
NOTE: Disk Cache Policy field may be displayed as "Disable" depending on firmware
version of On Board RAID (MegaRAID ROMB). It is not a problem in operating the
system.
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
9.
4-63
VD 0 is created in DG 0 as shown in the [Preview] screen below.
10.
After making sure that the VD is created correctly, click [Accept] at the lower right of the screen.
11.
The confirmation message "Save this Configuration?" appears. Click "Yes" to save the configuration.
12.
The confirmation message "Want to Initialize the New Virtual Disks?" appears. Normally, select "Yes".
13.
"Virtual Disks" operation screen is displayed. If no other operation is required, click [Home] at the lower left of
the screen.
14.
The WebBIOS top menu is displayed. Virtual Disk you have created is displayed in the lower right frame of the
screen.
Parameters for VD Definition
Listed below are parameters for Configuration Wizard.
Item
RAID Level
Strip Size
Access Policy
Read Policy
Write Policy
Parameter
RAID 0 / RAID 1 / RAID 5
8 KB / 16 KB / 32 KB / 64 KB / 128 KB
RW / Read Only / Blocked
Normal / Ahead / Adaptive
WBack / WThru / BadBBU
IO Policy
Disk Cache Policy
Disable BGI
Direct / Cached
Unchanged / Enable / Disable
No / Yes
Remarks
Recommended value: 64KB
Recommended value: RW
Recommended value: Normal
WBack: WriteBack
WThru: WriteThru
BadBBU: Unavailable
Recommended value: Direct
Recommended value: Uncharged
Specify whether to perform
Background Initialize after creation
of VD.
Recommended value: No
IMPORTANT: BGI (Back Ground Initialize) is available only for RAID5 VD configured
with five or more HDDs.
4-64
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
Operation of Various Features
Check Consistency
1.
Start WebBIOS.
2.
Click [Virtual Disks] on WebBIOS top menu.
3.
Select a VD to perform Check Consistency from the upper right frame of Virtual Disks screen.
4.
Click the checkmark column for Check Consistency from the lower right frame of Virtual Disks screen.
5.
Make sure that Check Consistency is checked, and click [Go].
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
6.
The progress of Check Consistency is displayed on the left frame of Virtual Disks screen.
7.
Click [Home] at the lower left of Virtual Disks screen to return to the top menu.
IMPORTANT: Click [Home] while the background task such as Consistency Check,
Rebuild, or reconstruction is being executed. With the progress indication being displayed,
the background task may be processed at slow rate.
4-65
4-66
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
Manual Rebuild
Described below are procedures based on assumption:
One of the HDDs failed in a RAID5 virtual disk configured with three HDDs.
Replace the failed HDD with new one after turning off the power of the server. Auto Rebuild feature is disabled for
non-hot-swap replacement. Use Manual Rebuild feature to recover the virtual disk as described below.
1.
Start WebBIOS.
Make sure that the status for the replaced HDD is indicated as "UNCONF GOOD" in the right frame of the
top menu.
In the example below, the hard disk drive in slot number 2 has been replaced.
The indication "PD Missing from DGx:Slot 2:xxxxx MB" represents that the PD (physical drive) having been
installed in slot number 2 was removed.
2.
Select "PD2" (newly connected HDD) in [Physical Drives].
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
4-67
3.
The properties for Physical Drive are displayed.
4.
Select "Make Global HSP" or "Make Dedicated HSP" on the lower part of the screen, and then click [Go] on the
lower centre of the screen.
4-68
5.
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
When [Rebuild Progress] is displayed, click [Home] at the lower left of the screen to go back to WebBIOS top
menu.
IMPORTANT: Click [Home] while the background Consistency Check, Rebuild, or
reconstruction the progress indication being displayed, the background processed at slow
rate.
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
4-69
Setting Hot Spare Disk
Described below are procedures based on assumption:
Add a HDD to a RAID5 virtual disk configured with three HDDs and assign a newly added HDD as Hot Spare Disk.
1.
Start WebBIOS.
Make sure that the status for the added HDD is indicated as "UNCONF GOOD" in the right frame of the top
menu.
2.
Select "PD3" (newly connected HDD) in [Physical Drives].
3.
The properties for Physical Drive are displayed.
4-70
4.
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
Select [Make Global HSP] or [Make Dedicated HSP] on the lower right of the screen, and then click [Go] on the
lower centre of the screen.
Global HSP:
Indicates the Hot Spare Disk available for all DGs.
Dedicated HSP:
Indicates the Hot Spare Disk available only for the specific DG.
You need to specify the target DG.
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
5.
The status for the newly connected HDD changes to "HOTSPARE".
6.
Click [Home] at the lower left of the screen to go back to WebBIOS top menu.
4-71
4-72
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
Reconstruction
Described below are procedures based on assumption:
Add a HDD to a RAID5 virtual disk configured with three HDDs to make a RAID5 virtual disk configured with four
HDDs.
7.
Start WebBIOS.
Make sure that the status for the added HDD is indicated as "UNCONF GOOD" in the right frame of the top
menu.
8.
Select "VD 0" (already been constructed) in [Virtual Drives].
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
9.
Setting menu for VD 0 is displayed.
4-73
4-74
10.
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
On the right of the screen, items required for reconstruction are displayed.
Information of HDDs in the disk
group in which a VD is defined.
11.
Select "Migration with addition".
12.
Specify the RAID level used after reconstruction.
13.
Select a HDD to be added.
14.
When you finished steps 5 to 7, click [Go] at the lower right of the screen.
15.
The progress of reconstruction is displayed on the lower left of the screen. Click [Home] at the lower left of the
screen to return to the WebBIOS top menu.
IMPORTANT:
„
The capacity of virtual disk may be incorrectly displayed after reconstruction. In this
case, perform Scan Devices from the top menu.
„
Click [Home] while the background task such as Consistency Check, Rebuild, or
reconstruction is being executed. With the progress indication being displayed, the
background task may be processed at slow rate.
„
When selecting an option from a pull-down menu, you cannot use a mouse. After you
click the option, please use up/down cursor keys and then press enter key to choose the
option instead of using a mouse.
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
4-75
Battery for Onboard RAID (MegaRAID ROMB)
This section describes the features operations of battery for onboard RAID (MegaRAID ROMB).
Features
The onboard RAID (MegaRAID ROMB) has factory-installed battery.
With the following features, the possibility of data loss due to an unexpected accident (e.g., an instantaneous power
failure which may occur in Write Back mode) can be avoided.
„
Backup of data in cache memory of disk array controller
„
Improvement of reliability in Write Back mode
„
Adoption of reusable nickel hydrogen battery
Checking Battery Status
Use the disk array management utility MegaRAID Storage Manager to check status of battery for onboard RAID
(MegaRAID ROMB).
1.
Start OS, and run MegaRAID Storage Manager (MSM).
2.
If the battery is properly connected, the [Battery Backup Unit] icon is shown under the [Physical] tab at the left
frame of MSM.
Physical
[Battery Backup Unit] icon
NOTE: If the battery is properly connected, the status of "Battery Backup" is indicated as
"Present" in [Adapter Properties] menu of WebBIOS.
4-76
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
3.
Next, select the [Logical] tab, and then the desired [Virtual Disk].
4.
Select [Properties] tab at the right frame of window.
If the battery is fully charged, the Current Write Policy shows "Write Back".
Logical
Properties
Current Write Policy
Default Write Policy
IMPORTANT:
„
While the battery is being charged or discharged, "Write Through" is displayed in
[Current Write Policy].
At this time, the POST displays the message as follows:
Your battery is bad or missing, and you have VDs configured for write-back mode.
Because the battery is not usable, these VDs will actually run in write-through mode until
the battery is replaced.
The following VDs are affected: XX
Press any key to continue.
„
To check the charged rate of battery cell, select [Physical] → [Properties] → [Relative
State of Charge] or [Absolute State of Charge] on MegaRAID Storage Manager.
NOTES:
„
The Default Write Policy is factory-set to "Write Back".
„
For more information of Write Policy, refer to the MegaRAID Storage Manager™
User's Guide stored in NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM provided with the server.
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
4-77
Refresh Battery (Learn Cycle)
The disk array controller performs discharging and charging cycle at every 30 days to extend the service life of battery.
You can set the refresh operation (Learn Cycle) on Auto Learn Mode of MSM. Click the [Physical] tab and [Battery
Backup Unit] in the left frame of MSM, then click the [Operations] tab in the right frame of MSM, as shown in the
figure below.
The default setting of MSM is "Auto". This setting is recommended.
The Onboard RAID (MegaRAID ROMB) performs the following steps during refresh operation.
1.
Discharges the battery.
The following log is recorded in the MSM and the application log.
Controller ID:x Battery relearn started
Controller ID:x Battery is discharging
Controller ID:x BBU disabled; changing WB logical drives to WT
2.
The discharging completes.
The following log is recorded in the MSM and the application log.
Controller ID:x Battery relearn completed
3.
Charges the battery again.
When charging starts, the following log is recorded in the MSM and the application log.
If charging does not start after certain time has passed, reboot the server to check if it start charging or not.
Controller ID:x Battery started charging
4-78
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
4.
The charging completes.
The following log is recorded in the MSM and the application log.
Hereafter, the battery is discharged and charged in a regular basis (every 30 days).
Controller ID:x Battery charge complete
Controller ID:x BBU enabled; changing WT logical drives to WB
POST displays the following message while the above steps are being performed.
Your battery is bad or missing,and you have VDs configured for write-back mode. Because the battery is
not usable,these VDs will actually run in write-through mode until the battery is replaced.
The following VDs are affected:XXPress any key to continue.
„
If the [Auto Learn Mode] is set to "Disabled", refresh operation is not performed.
„
If the [Auto Learn Mode] is set to "Warn", refresh operation is not performed. However, if no refresh
operation is performed for 30 days, the following log is recorded in MSM and application log at the system
start-up, prompting you to perform Learn Cycle. If you perform Learn Cycle in manual mode, the log will no
longer be recorded.
Controller ID:x Battery requires reconditioning; please initiate a LEARN cycle
„
When performing Learn Cycle in manual mode, select "Learn" appeared on MSM window, and then select
"Go", as shown in the figure below.
NOTES:
„
„
Before performing Learn Cycle in manual mode, set the Auto Learn Mode of MSM to
"Warn" or "Disabled".
„
When you performed Learn Cycle in manual mode, be sure to set the Auto Learn Mode
back to "Auto" before exiting the Learn Cycle.
Immediately after you changed the setting to "Auto" from "Disabled" or "Warn", the refresh operation starts.
IMPORTANT: If the following log is recorded in the MSM and the application log at
every system startup while the Auto Learn Mode is set to "Auto", perform Learn Cycle in
manual mode.
Controller ID:x Battery requires reconditioning;
please initiate a LEARN cycle
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
4-79
Others
When you install the additional HDD cage in the server, the WebBIOS Top Menu is as shown below. [Physical Drives]
box shows two enclosures having the different enclosure numbers.
To confirm the channel to which the enclosure is connected:
On WebBIOS Top menu, click "Enclosure X" you want to confirm the channel number. The progress bar at the bottom
left of the screen shows percentage of completion. Click [Home] to go back to WebBIOS Top menu.
4-80
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
The Channel 1 is connected with the standard 3.5-inch disk bay. "0" is displayed in "Connected Port" field.
"50001c107160000x" is displayed in "SAS Address" field.
The Channel 2 is connected with the additional 3.5-inch disk bay. "4" is displayed in "Connected Port" field.
"50001c107160020x" is displayed in "SAS Address" field.
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
4-81
REMOTE MANAGEMENT FUNCTION
Remote Management Function enables your system to monitor the status of power supply unit, fan and temperature of
servers by BMC (Baseboard Management Controller) and a remote KVM (Keyboard, Video, Mouse) console feature by
communicating through a management LAN PORT feature.
NOTE: The screen which can be displayed by the remote KVM side becomes resolution
1024x768 and less than refresh rate 75 Hz.
Since a screen is not displayed by remote PC when a setup beyond this is performed, please
set it as less than this.
Moreover, if many numbers of colours of a screen are set up, an exact colour may be unable
to be displayed by remote PC.
When your server is connected to the network where broadcasting occurs frequently, the
performance about remote control may be affected.
Default Network Settings
When linking the management LAN port at the rear of the server to a network, refer to the following for default
settings.
IP Address
User Name
Password
Host Name
„
:
:
:
:
192.168.1.1
administrator
(None)
ARMCXXXXXXXXXXXX
Using a DHCP function, the host name in the case of performing automatic registration to a DNS server turns
into the above-mentioned host name.
Host Name: ARMCXXXXXXXXXXXX, where the 12 Xs are the MAC address of the Management Card.
„
When you link without a DHCP server, please access the above-mentioned IP address in the local network
which can use a default IP address "192.168.1.1."
NOTE: For security reasons, change these default settings (Password, an IP address, host
name) by your network environment. See "BMC Configuration" described later for the
setting method.
Server Setup
This section explains the operations which must be carried out on the server side, when using the Remote Management
Feature.
Initial Setup
To use the Web server feature, change settings as shown below.
Start the EXPRESSBUILDER from CD-ROM, and select [System Management] → [Set Advanced Remote
Management Card] from the Tools menu.
On the [Set Advanced Remote Management Card], select [Remote Management Console] → [Enabled], and then select
[Register].
IMPORTANT: For security, the Web server feature of BMC is disabled at the shipment.
4-82
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
Setting of Graphics Accelerator Driver
„
When your server's operating system is Windows
Use the driver which is installed at initial setup by Express Setup or system update.
„
When a server's operating system is Linux
Since it may be automatic and a setup of a monitor/Driver/video memory may not be able to be performed by
composition when operating system is Linux. We recommend you to use it in text mode.
Setting of Mouse Properties
Clear the "Enhance pointer precision" check box in "Motion" in "Pointer Options" in "Mouse properties", when the
server operating system is Windows Server 2003.
Please adjust "Select a pointer speed", when you cannot move a mouse pointer up to the bottom right side of the host
server screen via the remote KVM console.
Configuring Management PC
This section provides information on what you need to do for management PCs and requirements of the browsers to
establish connection.
Setting Your Browser
Make the following settings.
Enable TLS 1.0 or SSL 3.0 and disable SSL 2.0.
Supported Browsers
The following browsers are supported.
„
Microsoft® Internet Explorer 6.0
„
Netscape 7.0
„
Mozilla 1.6
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
4-83
Java2 Runtime Environment
Java2 Runtime Environment, Standard Edition 1.4.2_04 or later, which you can download from the following, is
required.
http://java.sun.com/j2se/
If you access the login page without installing the product mentioned above, you may see a dialog box for security
warning. Read the message and take actions according to the message.
Using Remote Management Console
Overview
You can control power-on/off of a server and use Remote KVM Console from a web browser by using the web server
functions of BMC.
This function is achieved through Java Applet.
Connecting to the Web Server from a Web Browser on the Management PC
Access the following URL from the web browser in the management PC.
URL: http://BMC_HostPort/index.htm
NOTES:
„
"BMC_HostPort" is a colon and port number added after the BMC address or host name.
If the http port number is 80h (default), you can skip the port number.
„
When you use DHCP functions as well as performing auto registration to the DNS
server, the BMC default name is "ARMC"+MAC Address.
There is the MAC address on the Management Main Card.
IP address: 192.168.1.1
User name: Administrator
Password : (none)
Host name: ARMC00004C9FXXXX
„
Default host name
If you want to use the Remote Management Function with DHCP disabled, first use the
default IP address "192.168.1.1" and make access in a local network where this IP
address is available, and then adjust configurations such as IP address according to your
network environment. For information on configuration, see "BMC Configuration"
described later in this section.
4-84
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
When you use the Remote Management Function for the first time, you may see a dialogue box for security warning as
shown below. Read the message well and click either "Yes" or "Always." If you are not sure about the information,
select "No."
NOTE: When a connection is done with SSL, you may see some dialogue boxes for
security warning.
Login and Logout
Login
When the login page appears, enter the user name and password, and then click [Login].
If you are logging in for the first time, use the following default user name and password.
Default user name: administrator
Default password: None (enter no information)
IMPORTANT: Because no password is set by default, make sure to configure a password
immediately after you log in.
For security reasons, it is recommended to change the default user name as well.
For information on configuration and modification, see "BMC Configuration" described
later in this section.
When the password you entered is authorized, the following licensing agreement appears.
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
4-85
Read the information well and click "Yes" If you cannot agree, click "No", and you will return to the login window.
Logout
To log out, select "Exit" on the File menu.
When you log out, the main window closes and the login window for the browser appears.
Main Window
1
2
4
3
1
File menu
The File menu allows you to quit this applet.
2
Window menu
The Window menu allows you to open various windows including Remote KVM Console window.
3
Main frame
Various windows open here.
4
Help menu
With the Help menu, you can check the version of the Remote Management Console.
Control Panel
You can use Control Panel to see server status and to control power-on/off.
Control Panel also starts up various windows including Remote KVM Console.
4-86
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
Functions of Control Panel
1
10
11
12
2
13
3
14
4
15
5
16
6
17
7
18
8
19
9
20
1
Shows the BMC host name.
2
Shows the server LCD.
3
Server power lamp that shows the server power-supply status.
4
Server power switch (Equivalent to the POWER switch on the server. This switch does not forcebly power
off the server even when pressed for four seconds or longer.)
5
Forcefully powers off the server.
6
Forcefully resets the server.
7
Starts up Remote KVM Console.
8
Starts up BMC Configuration.
9
Starts up Firmware Update.
10
Displays a user name.
11
Indicates status of connection with BMC.
12
Indicates status of communication security.
13
Indicates network access status.
14
Server status lamp that shows server status.
15
Makes the server collect memory dump (provides the same functionality as achieved by pressing the DUMP
switch in the server.)
16
Makes the server unit ID lamp flash.
17
Opens the window to show system event logs (SEL.)
18
Opens the window to show sensor data records (SDR).
19
Opens the window to show field replaceable unit (FRU) information.
20
Hides Control Panel.
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
4-87
Remote KVM Console
By using Remote KVM Console functions of BMC, you can transfer local console of a server to the browser in the
management PC over network.
You can make full access from the management PC to the server by using video, keyboard and mouse.
NOTES:
„
The following five types of resolution are supported for a server.
– 1024×768
– 800×600
– 640×480
– 720×400
– 720×350
„
KVM is an acronym for Keyboard, Video, and Mouse.
Unlike using a conventional serial console remotely, KVM allows you to remotely use
graphics as they are.
„
The remote KVM console cannot be used for connection via proxy.
Starting Up Remote KVM Console
When you click [
opens.
], the icon to start up Remote KVM Console, on Control Panel, the Remote KVM Console window
IMPORTANT: Never open Remote KVM Console if you have logged in BMC of the
local server from the local console of a server. Otherwise entry by keyboard or mouse
becomes disabled.
4-88
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
Names of Components in the Remote KVM Console Window
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
1, 2, 3, 4
Special key icon
5
Screen refresh icon
6
KVM properties icon
7
Zoom in icon
8
Zoom out icon
9
Default size icon
10
Window resize icon
11
KVM indicator
12
Remote KVM Console screen
IMPORTANT: When pressing Shift + CapsLock on the remote KVM console, the
indication may not be the same as the CapsLock LED on the management PC. In addition,
the CapsLock status on the management PC may change after the remote KVM console has
been used.
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
4-89
Entry via Special Keys
For special keys, even if you press these keys in a remote keyboard, it will not take effect in the host server. Using the
following three special key icons will take effect in the host server.
(raised state) and
(raised state) and
(pressed-in state): toggles whenever clicked.
(pressed-in state): toggles whenever clicked.
IMPORTANT: For example, to enter "Ctrl + Alt + Del", press the [CtrlAlt] icon and
press Delete on your keyboard. By doing so "Ctrl + Alt + Del" takes effect in the host
server. When this takes effect, click the [CtrlAlt] icon again to release the effect of entry of
this special key. If you press Delete on the keyboard while the [CtrlAlt] icon has been
selected, "Ctrl + Alt + Del" also takes effect in the host server.
(Windows key icon)
("|" pipe key icon)
Zoom In and Zoom Out
When you click [
] to zoom in, what is shown becomes larger.
When you click [
] to zoom out, what is shown becomes smaller.
When you click [
], the default size icon, what is displayed will be the same size as the host server.
When you click [
screen size.
], the window resize icon, the size of the Remote KVM Console window is adjusted to the remote
Screen Refresh
When you click [ ], the screen refresh icon, the Remote KVM Console screen will be refreshed. When the screen
display is disturbed, refresh the screen.
Modifying Properties
When you click [ ], the KVM properties icon, the KVM properties window appears. In this window, you can specify
the screen refresh interval which is executed automatically.
NOTE: By having a shorter refresh interval, garbage on the screen will be reduced.
However, note that screen refresh will give burden. A too short refresh interval can slow
response speed of terminals or affect traffic performance of the network.
4-90
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
IPMI Information
You can see system event logs (SEL), sensor data records (SDR), and field replaceable units (FRU) information, which
are called IPMI information. By using the IPMI information, you can see and examine troubles and events on the host
server, and determine a part to be replaced.
Displaying System Event Logs (SEL)
When you click [ ] to display system event logs (SEL) on Control Panel, SEL information is loaded from BMC, and
the following window showing system event logs (SEL) opens.
On the upper part of the window, a list of logs appears. On the lower part of the window, detailed information of the
entry selected from the list appears.
When you click [
latest.
] for reloading, the SEL information is reloaded from BMC, and you can update the information to
Clearing SEL Information
You can clear the SEL information on BMC by clicking [ ], the icon for SEL clearing. When you see the message for
confirmation, click [Yes] if you want to clear SEL. If not, click [No] so that SEL clearing will not be performed.
Displaying Sensor Data Records (SDR)
When you click [ ] to display sensor data records on Control Panel, SDR information is loaded from BMC, and the
following window showing sensor data records appears.
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
On the upper part of the window, a list of sensor data records appears. On the lower part of the window, detailed
information of the entry selected from the list appears.
NOTE: SDR information is information on definitions for each sensor on the server.
BMC monitors server sensors according to this information.
4-91
4-92
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
Displaying Field Replaceable Units (FRU) Information
When you click [ ] to display field replaceable units (FRU) information on Control Panel, FRU information is loaded
from BMC, and the following window showing field replaceable units (FRU) information appears.
On the upper part of the window, a list of FRUs appears. On the lower part of the window, detailed information of the
entry selected from the list appears.
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
BMC Configuration
You can configure BMC settings.
Starting Up the BMC Configuration Window
When you click [ ], the icon to start up BMC Configuration on Control Panel, the BMC Configuration window
appears as shown below.
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Loads a file
Saves the file
Edits information
Reloads from BMC
Makes global settings of BMC
Item selection tree
Currently configured values
NOTE: Use "Global settings of BMC" when configuration information is loaded from a
file.
7
4-93
4-94
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
User Configuration
By clicking [User Configuration] in the left pane of the BMC Configuration window, a list to show 20 accounts opens
in the right pane and you can set up user accounts.
Choose the account you want to modify or add and click [
edit a user account as shown below opens.
] to edit information. The User Configuration window to
1
2
3
1
Enter a user name.
2
Enter a password. To avoid a mistake, enter the password in the two boxes.
3
Configure an access privilege.
Level :
Administrator: the user is allowed to do all operations.
User:
the user can see information but is not allowed modify settings.
Remote KVM Console: Specify whether or not to enable Remote KVM Console.
If you select this check box, you can make Remote KVM Console enabled (permit)
settings.
NOTE: You can make settings of Remote KVM Console regardless of the access privilege
levels. You can make "disable" settings for Administrator and "enable" settings for User.
When you click [OK], all the information in the User Configuration window will be written into BMC.
When you click [Cancel], the User Configuration window closes discarding what you have configured in the window.
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
4-95
Network Configuration
IMPORTANT:
„
Before setting the default gateway, the gateway, the server, and the management PC
must be ready to communicate.
„
If the default gateway is set while they are not ready to communicate, you must cycle
the power of the server after they are ready to communicate through network.
The ports listed below are used for remote management.
If your network has a firewall, provide setting for firewall appropriately.
Module name
Remote KVM client
Mail server
WEB client
WEB client (SSL)
Port number
Undefined
25 (*1)
Undefined
Undefined
Protocol
UDP
TCP
TCP
TCP
Direction
←→
←→
←→
←→
Module name
BMC
BMC
BMC
BMC
Port number
623
Undefined
80 (*2)
443 (*3)
*1: To change the port number, select [BMC Settings] → [Alert Mail] → [E-Mail Alert Settings] → [SMTP] → [SMTP Port
Number].
*2: To change the port number, select [BMC Settings] → [WEB Server] → [WEB Server Settings] → [HTTP Port Number].
*3: To change the port number, select [BMC Settings] → [WEB Server] → [WEB Server Settings] → [SSL Port Number].
By clicking [Network Configuration] in the left pane of the BMC Configuration window, you will see a window as
shown below and you can make network-related settings for BMC including IP address.
When you click [
below appears.
], the icon for editing information, in this window, the Network Configuration window as shown
The Network Configuration window has three tabs.
4-96
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
1
2
3
1
The MAC address owned by BMC appears in this box.
2
Choose whether or not to acquire an IP address automatically by DHCP.
3
If DHCP is not used to automatically acquire an IP address, make settings here.
If DHCP is used, information automatically acquired appears here.
IMPORTANT: When you change the IP address, the current connection will be
disconnected after you click OK and settings of BMC is completed.
Close the window once, and then enter the IP address (or host name) that has been newly
configured in the browser to log in.
Because the login page that remains to be displayed in the browser has been accessed by
the old address, you cannot use it to log in.
1
2
1
Choose whether or not to acquire the IP address of the DNS server automatically by
DHCP.
2
If DHCP is not used to automatically acquire the IP address of the DNS server, make
settings here. If DHCP is used, information automatically acquired appears here.
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
4-97
1
2
3
4
1
The default host name to be used when no host name is configured for using DHCP
2
Enter the host name of BMC. If nothing is set here, the default host name in the previous
step will be used.
3
Enter the domain name of the network to which BMC belongs.
4
Choose whether or not to register the host name to the DNS server.
NOTE: It is recommended to specify a name that is easy to imagine the host name in the
server operating system (for Windows, a computer name) for a BMC host name.
For example, if the host name on the server operating system is "sapphire", you may set
BMC "sapphire_bmc" for a BMC host name.
IMPORTANT: Because BMC uses a LAN controller independent of the server operating
system, a BMC host name and a domain name cannot be exactly the same as those on the
server operating system. If BMC belongs to a different network domain, you can have the
same host name.
When you click [OK], all the information in the Network Configuration window with three tabs will be written into
BMC.
When you click [Cancel], the Network Configuration window closes discarding what you have configured.
4-98
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
HTTP Configuration
By clicking [HTTP Configuration] in the left pane of the BMC Configuration window, you will see a window as shown
below and you can make web server-related settings for BMC such as HTTP port.
IMPORTANT: If you change the settings of HTTP port number, Enable SSL, or SSL Port
Number, the current connection will be disconnected.
Close the window once, and then enter the port number that has been newly configured in
the browser to log in.
Because the login page that remains to be displayed in the browser has been accessed by
the old address, you cannot use it to log in.
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
When you click [
below appears.
4-99
], the icon for editing information, in this window, the HTTP Configuration window as shown
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
Specify an HTTP port number
2
Choose enable/disable SSL communication. If you select this check box, you can make SSL
enabled settings. And, if you clear this check box, you can make SSL disabled settings.
NOTE: Unless there is any specific reason such use of SSL not being allowed, it is
recommended to use the HTTPS protocol, which is encrypted.
By default, SSL is disabled.
3
Specify an SSL port number in this box.
4
In Login attempt period, specify a time period during which you can retry login if your attempt
to log in has failed.
5
In Failed login attempts, specify the number of login attempts during the period specified in
the previous step, exceeding which prompts to deny login as specified in the following step.
6
In Account lock period, enter a time period during which login is denied.
NOTE: The three configuration items mentioned above are effective to deny unauthorized
login accesses that are attempted automatically. However, they cannot prevent such
accesses completely.
When you click [Default], default values for HTTP port number, SSL port number, Login attempt interval, Login
attempts, and Account lock interval appear. But, SSL Enable/Disable check box is not changed.
When you click [OK], all the information in the HTTP Configuration window will be written into BMC.
When you click [Cancel], the HTTP Configuration window closes discarding what you have configured in the window.
4-100
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
Alert Mail Configuration
By clicking [Alert Main Configuration] in the left pane of the BMC Configuration window, you will see a window as
shown below and you can make alert mail-related settings.
When you click [ ], the icon for editing information, in this window, the Alert Mail Configuration window as shown
below appears. The Alert Mail Configuration window has four tabs.
1
2
3
1
You can choose to enable or disable alert mail functions. If you select this check box, you
can make mail-related settings.
2
Specify an alert level from six levels.
Alert levels are categorized according to severity of event causing an alert.
3
You can send a test mail by clicking the button in this box.
IMPORTANT: If you want to send a test mail, complete all alert mail settings detailed in
the following pages.
Note that entering information in the Alert Mail Configuration window does not complete
settings. When you have entered all the information you need to enter, click [OK], and the
information will be written into BMC and settings will be completed.
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
NOTE: According to severity of event causing an alert, X-Priority: field in the alert mail
header changes as below.
Non-recoverable/Critical
Non-critical
OK/Information/Monitoring
X-Priority: 1
X-Priority: 3
X-Priority: 5
1
2
3
4
1
Specify email addresses of alert mail. You can specify up to four addresses.
2
Specify the sender’s email address.
3
Type in the subject of the alert mail.
4
Type in a message that appears in the message body of all alert mails. If you do not need
such message, you can clear the check box. If you click "Acquire default message", the
recommended message appears.
NOTE: The subject and message you configure here will be attached to all alert mails.
4-101
4-102
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
1
2
3
4
1
Specify the SMTP server address. You can use the IP address as well.
2
Specify the port number of the SMTP server.
3
Specify how many retries can be made when attempt to send the mail has failed.
4
Specify a retry interval that waits for the next retry when attempt to send the mail has failed.
IMPORTANT: This product doesn't support SMTP Authentication (SMTP-AUTH).
When you click [Default], default values for SMTP port number, retry count, and retry interval appear. Unless there is
any specific reason not to, it is recommended to use the default values.
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
4-103
1
2
1
Specify information to be included in the body of alert mails.
Product Information
The product name, code and number of the server
IP Address
IP address of BMC
Event Time
The time the event occurred
SEL Dump Data
Data representing system event logs (SEL) in hexadecimal
BMC URL
URL of the ARMC login page
BMC FQDN
Full domain name of BMC
LCD Message
LCD message in the server at the time of event occurrence
BMC FW Rev.
Revision information of BMC firmware/SDR/PIA
2
The information here will appear in the Date field in the header of alert mails.
Firmware Update
You can update applet, KVM firmware, BMC firmware, sensor data records (SDR), and platform information (PIA)
Starting the Firmware Update Window
When you click [ ], the icon to start Firmware Update, on Control Panel, revision information is loaded from BMC,
and the Firmware Update window as shown below appears.
4-104
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
When you click [Cancel], the Firmware Update window closes without any changes made.
The following pages provide information about update procedures.
Loading Update Data Files
When you click [
] to add update files, a window as shown below opens prompting you to select files.
Select update data files.
When you click [Open] after selecting files, loading of the files begins.
It will take a little while for loading to be completed.
NOTE: Because update can be made globally for each update target, make sure to load
everything you need.
You can specify multiple files to be loaded simultaneously.
Checking Revisions
When loading of data files is completed, the current revision and new revisions appear with information on files (file
names and time stamps) in the Firmware Update window.
Check the revisions and information.
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
NOTE: Check each revision well because downgrade can be performed as well.
If you click [ ] to clear update data, all data that has been loaded will be discarded. If you
click [Cancel], the Firmware Update window closes discarding all information that has
been loaded.
Selecting Update Target
Select update targets in the Update check boxes.
NOTE: Only what you specify here will be written into BMC.
Data will not be written for those items with file loaded but not specified here.
IMPORTANT: If you want to update both SDR and PIA, perform writing simultaneously.
If you update SDR and PIA separately, the first update data will be cleared when the second
update is performed.
4-105
4-106
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
Writing Update Data into BMC
When you click [
], update data will be written into BMC.
For each update target, the window showing update progress appears.
If any error is detected during update, an error message appears and the update is terminated.
Completion of Writing
When writing is completed, results appear in the [Status] column per [Target].
OK
OK
OK
NOTES:
„
For targets other than applet, reboot the server or power off and then on the server to
apply the update.
„
If you reboot the server or power on the server to apply the BMC firmware update,
connection to BMC is disconnected. To continue using, log in again.
„
To apply applet update, log out and shut down all browsers, and then log in again. You
do not need to reboot the server.
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
4-107
Troubleshooting
Error messages
Fatal errors
No
1
2
Error Message
Fatal error. JavaVM quits.
A fatal software error has
occurred.
What to do
Try logging in again.
If the same message continues to appear, contact your service representative.
Try logging in again.
If the same message continues to appear, contact your service representative.
Login error
No
1
Error Message
Authentication error
What to do
Check the user name and password, and then enter them again.
Access privilege error
No
1
Error Message
Unauthorized operation. You
have no privilege to perform
the operation.
What to do
Try performing the operation with administrator’s privileges. Consult your
administrator.
Network errors
No
1
4
Error Message
The HTTP communication
failed.
Could not resolve the IP
address.
Unable to reach the target
host.
A network error occurred.
5
Failed to download applet.
6
The RMCP+ session is
closed.
Failed to establish the
RMCP+ session.
The RMCP+ transmission
failed.
The specified RMCP+
protocol cannot be used.
BMC resources to establish
a new RMCP+ session are
insufficient.
The RMCP+ session
time-out occurred.
2
3
7
8
9
10
11
What to do
Check the network environment and try again. Contact your service
representative if the error persists.
Check the network environment.
You cannot use Remote KVM Console for connections via proxy.
Check the network environment.
You cannot use Remote KVM Console for connections via proxy.
Check the network environment and try again. Contact your service
representative if the error persists.
Check the network environment and try again.
When SSL has been enabled, more than one client cannot connect to the
network simultaneously. Try again after a connection from other client is
finished.
Contact your service representative if the error persists.
Check the network environment.
If there is no network problem, contact your service representative.
Check the network environment.
If there is no network problem, contact your service representative.
Check the network environment.
If there is no network problem, contact your service representative.
Check the network environment.
If there is no network problem, contact your service representative.
Try again after a connection from other client is finished.
Check the network environment and server.
If you do not find the problem, contact your service representative.
BMC-related errors
No
1
2
3
Error Message
The IPMI request was
aborted.
Received bad response from
BMC.
BMC does not support IPMI
2.0 functions.
What to do
The network may be busy. Try again. If the error persists, contact your
service representative because a failure may have occurred in BMC.
Check the server. A failure may have occurred in BMC.
If you do not find the problem, contact your service representative.
Contact your service representative.
4-108
No
4
5
6
7
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
Error Message
Failed to run the IPMI
command.
Failed to send the IPMI
message.
Illegal IPMI message was
requested.
Specified target is not present.
What to do
Check the server. A failure may have occurred in BMC.
If you do not find the problem, contact your service representative.
Check the network environment.
If the network has no problem, contact your service representative.
Contact your service representative.
Check the server. A failure may have occurred in BMC.
If you do not find the problem, contact your service representative.
Remote KVM Console errors
No
1
3
Error Message
Failed to disable Remote KVM
Console.
Failed to enable Remote KVM
Console.
KVM packet transmission failed.
4
5
The KVM request was aborted.
UDP packet transmission failed.
6
9
Remote KVM console can not
activate because it is disabled.
Remote KVM Console is used by
other client.
Failed to shut down Remote KVM
Console.
Failed to make settings.
10
The UDP connection is closed.
2
7
8
What to do
Check the network environment and try again.
Contact your service representative if the error persists.
Check the network environment and try again.
Contact your service representative if the error persists.
Check the network environment and server.
If you do not find the problem, contact your service representative.
This is not a problem. Click OK and close the message box.
Check the network environment and server.
If you do not find the problem, contact your service representative.
Make a remote KVM console enable.
See "Remote KVM Console" in Chapter 4.
Try again after the client has finished using Remote KVM Console.
Use Remote KVM Console after waiting 3 or more minutes.
Check the network environment and try again.
Contact your service representative if the error persists.
Check the network environment and server.
If you do not find any problem, contact your service representative.
System event logs (SEL) display errors
No
1
2
Error Message
Failed to clear session event logs
of BMC.
Failed to acquire system event
logs.
What to do
The network may be busy. Try again. If the error persists, contact your
service representative because a failure may have occurred in BMC.
The network may be busy. Try again. If the error persists, contact your
service representative because a failure may have occurred in BMC.
Sensor data records (SDR) display error
No
1
Error Message
Failed to acquire sensor data
records.
What to do
The network may be busy. Try again. If the error persists, contact your
service representative because a failure may have occurred in BMC.
Field replaceable unit (FRU) information display error
No
1
Error Message
Failed to acquire field replaceable
units information.
What to do
The network may be busy. Try again. If the error persists, contact your
service representative because a failure may have occurred in BMC.
BMC configuration errors
No
1
2
3
4
Error Message
Failed to make settings:
Failed to acquire BMC
Configuration:
Used by other software program.
Try again after a while.
Invalid BMC configuration file.
What to do
Check the network environment and try again.
Contact your service representative if the error persists.
Try again after a while.
The BMC configuration file may be corrupted. Check the file.
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
No
5
6
Error Message
The required XML tag is not
found.
Failed to write the file.
7
Invalid user name
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
The user name is too long
The password is too long.
Passwords are not matched.
Invalid HTTP port number
Invalid SSL port number
HTTP/SSL should not be the
same.
Invalid login attempt period
Invalid failed login attempts
Invalid account lock period
Invalid IP address
Invalid subnet mask
Invalid default gateway
Invalid DNS server IP address
Invalid host name
22
Invalid domain name
23
The SMTP server address is too
long.
Invalid SMTP port number.
Invalid retry count
Invalid retry interval
"To" is too long.
"From" is too long.
"Subject" is too long.
The message is too long.
Failed to open the file:
Failed to close the file:
Can’t open the file:
Timeout has occurred.
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
4-109
What to do
The BMC configuration file may be corrupted. Check the file.
The BMC configuration file is not saved successfully. Change the
location to save the file and try again.
You can use only alphanumeric characters, minus sign (–), and
underscore (_) for a user name. A user name should be 32 characters or
less.
A user name should be 32 characters or less.
Use 16 or less characters.
Again, input passwords.
You can use only numeric values.
You can use only numeric values.
The same port number cannot do them. Specify different value.
You can use only numeric values.
You can use only numeric values.
You can use only numeric values.
Use numerals and periods to specify an IP address.
Use numerals and periods to specify a subnet mask.
Use numerals and periods to specify a default gateway.
Use numerals and periods to specify the IP address of DNS server.
You can use only alphanumeric characters, minus sign (–), and
underscore (_) for a host name. A host name should be 64 characters or
less.
You can use only alphanumeric characters, minus sign (–), and
underscore (_) for a domain name. A domain name should be up to 256
characters.
Specify within 256 characters.
You can use only numeric values.
You can use only numeric values.
You can use only numeric values.
Specify within 256 characters.
Specify within 256 characters.
Specify within 512 characters.
The message should be up to 4064 characters.
The specified file may not exist. Check the file name.
The specified file may be corrupted.
The specified file may not exist. Check the file name.
Try again. If the error persists, contact your service representative
because a failure may have occurred in BMC.
Firmware update errors
No
1
2
3
4
5
6
Error Message
There are uncompleted update
images on BMC as follows:
Failed to acquire status of the
update area.
Update data is too large:
Failed to prepare update
7
Invalid file size:
Could not find the revision
information:
Failed to create rollback image.
8
Failed to erase.
9
Unsupported format version:
What to do
Reboot the server and complete the update.
The network may be busy. Try again. If the error persists, contact your
service representative because a failure may have occurred in BMC.
Some update files may be corrupted. Acquire update files again.
The network may be busy. Try again. If the error persists, contact your
service representative because a failure may have occurred in BMC.
The update file may be corrupted. Acquire the update file again.
Some update files may be corrupted. Acquire update files again.
Try again. If the error persists, contact your service representative
because a failure may have occurred in BMC.
Try again. If the error persists, contact your service representative
because a failure may have occurred in BMC.
Some update files may be corrupted. Acquire update files again.
4-110
No
10
11
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
Error Message
Failed to load the update image
file.
Update has failed.
13
Could not switch to the update
mode.
Could not find the update targets:
14
Invalid address:
15
Writing has failed.
16
Unsupported token is detected:
17
Invalid segment information:
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
Invalid data length:
Failed to open the file:
Failed to close the file:
Invalid file checksum:
Failed to parse files.
Failed to parse files:
Failed to load files:
Could not find files:
Failed to verify
27
Update will be stopped because
interruption has occurred.
Online update is now being used.
12
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
Failed to acquire the current
revision.
Failed to acquire lines:
Invalid line length:
Unexpected EOF is detected:
Unexpected token is detected:
PIA does not suit this server.
What to do
Some update files may be corrupted. Acquire update files again.
Try again. If the error persists, contact your service representative
because a failure may have occurred in BMC.
Try again. If the error persists, contact your service representative
because a failure may have occurred in BMC.
Some update files may be corrupted.
Acquire update files again.
Some update files may be corrupted.
Acquire update files again.
Try again. If the error persists, contact your service representative
because a failure may have occurred in BMC.
Some update files may be corrupted.
Acquire update files again.
Some update files may be corrupted.
Acquire update files again.
Some update files may be corrupted. Acquire update files again.
The specified file may not exist. Check the file name.
The specified file may be corrupted.
Some update files may be corrupted. Acquire update files again.
Some update files may be corrupted. Acquire update files again.
Some update files may be corrupted. Acquire update files again.
Some update files may be corrupted. Acquire update files again.
Some update files may be corrupted. Acquire update files again.
Try again. If the error persists, contact your service representative
because a failure may have occurred in BMC.
Check clients. A software program other than you are using may have
interrupted.
Try again as necessary after online update performed by other tool is
completed.
The network may be busy. Try again. If the error persists, contact your
service representative because a failure may have occurred in BMC.
Some update files may be corrupted. Acquire update files again.
Some update files may be corrupted. Acquire update files again.
Some update files may be corrupted. Acquire update files again.
Some update files may be corrupted. Acquire update files again.
It is not Platform Information (PIA) of this server. Acquire update files
again.
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
4-111
CONFIGURING I/O BOARD JUMPERS
With the pre-installed SETUP utility, you can set desired passwords to protect the data stored in the server against
access from unauthorized users. When you forget the passwords, however, you may want clear them. The following
describes how to clear these passwords. You can also use the following procedure to clear the CMOS data in the server.
IMPORTANT: Clearing the CMOS data resumes the factory-set configuration data.
To clear passwords or the CMOS data, use the jumper switch on the I/O board of the server.
The following describe the clearing procedure.
WARNING
Do not disassemble, repair, or alter the server.
Never attempt to disassemble, repair, or alter the server on any occasion other than described
in this manual. Failure to follow this instruction may cause an electric shock or fire as well as
malfunctions of the server.
1.
Record the current BIOS settings.
2.
Power off the server and unplug the power cord.
3.
Remove the rear access cover from the server (see Chapter 9).
4.
Remove the processor access cover from the server (see Chapter 9).
5.
Change the desired jumper switch setting.
IMPORTANT:
„
Do not change any other switch settings. Any change may cause the server to fail or
malfunction.
„
Use the clip over jumper pins (pins 1 and 2) on the I/O board.
„
Do not lose the clip.
The following figure illustrates the jumper switch location.
Pins for protecting/clearing
the passwords.
Pins for
protecting/clearing the
CMOS data.
Jumper clip
4-112
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
„
Pins for protecting/clearing the passwords
Short-circuit these two pins to clear the passwords.
Open these two pins to protect the passwords (factory-set).
„
Pins for protecting/clearing the CMOS data
Short-circuit these two pins to clear the CMOS data.
Open these two pins to protect the CMOS data (factory-set).
6.
Reassemble the server and press the POWER switch.
7.
When the POST screen appears, power off the server and unplug the power cord.
8.
Restore the jumper switch setting.
NOTE: Place the clip over the jumper pins 11 and 12 after use to keep the pin. Placing the
clip over any other pins may cause malfunction of the server.
Pins 11 and 12
9.
10.
Reassemble the server and press the POWER switch.
Run BIOS setup utility and restore the parameter settings recorded in Step 1.
If you have cleared the password, set it again as needed.
11.
Save and exit the utility.
Chapter 5
Installing the Operating System with Express Setup
This section describes information on using Express Setup to install and configure the following operating systems to
the server.
„
Microsoft® Windows Server™ 2003 Standard Edition / Microsoft® Windows Server™ 2003 Enterprise
Edition
„
Microsoft® Windows Server™ 2003 R2 Standard Edition / Microsoft® Windows Server™ 2003 R2
Enterprise Edition
To use the server with another operating system than described in this section, contact your service representative.
IMPORTANT: Before installing the operating system, adjust the system date and time by
using the BIOS set up utility "SETUP." See Chapter 4 for detail.
5-2
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
About Express Setup
"Express Setup" helps you to install the Windows Operating System. The setup automatically configures the RAID
system and installs the Operating System and some management software.
IMPORTANT: Executing the Express Setup erases all data on the hard disk.
You can also use "Configuration disk" at "Express Setup" in order to save or backup parameters for installation.
The Configuration disk is able to have has some parameter files that include the configuration information for the server
setup.
If you want to set up the server as before, execute the Express Setup with the parameter file you have saved before.
NOTES:
„
The parameters file is not mandatory to set up the system.
„
If you want to create a parameters file, have a blank floppy disk (MS-DOS 1.44 MB
format) ready.
„
If you want to use the drivers located on the "OEM-Disk for Mass Storage Device"
that ships with optional boards, a parameters file is mandatory.
„
You can create a parameters file in advance using "Configuration Diskette Creator"
included in EXPRESSBUILDER.
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
5-3
Microsoft® Windows Server™ 2003
This subsection provides information on installing Microsoft® Windows Server™ 2003 in the server. Read instruction
in this section before proceeding to the installation.
IMPORTANT: When using Windows Server 2003 with this equipment, surely apply
Service Pack 1.
NOTES:
„
Express Setup does not support the installation of Windows Server™ x64 Editions. If
you want to install it, see Appendix D.
„
If you install Windows Server 2003 without using Express Setup, see Appendix E.
Installation Notice
This section explains precautions and matters you should be aware of before beginning installation in order to install
Windows Server 2003 correctly.
Supported operating system on this model
The server supports the following edition:
„
Microsoft® Windows Server™ 2003 Standard Edition / Microsoft® Windows Server™ 2003 Enterprise
Edition (hereinafter, referred to as "Windows Server 2003")
„
Microsoft® Windows Server™ 2003 R2 Standard Edition / Microsoft® Windows Server™ 2003 R2
Enterprise Edition (hereinafter, referred to as "Windows Server 2003")
On installing other operating system, contact sales dealer or the maintenance service representative.
BIOS Specification
Before installing Windows Server 2003, confirm if the BIOS specification of the hardware is correct. See Chapter 4 to
specify them.
NEC ESMPRO Agent
NEC ESMPRO Agent requires installing the necras.sys driver on your Windows system.
If you install the Windows without using the Express Setup, run the Update the system in Master Control Menu.
5-4
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
Optional Board Supported by EXPRESSBUILDER
EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM attached to your system supports the following optional boards:
NOTE: If you want to install the other boards except ones listed below by using a driver
floppy disk ("OEM-FD for Mass storage device"), see "Exceptional setup" and "Installing
Optional Mass Storage Driver" of "Configuration Diskette Creator" in Chapter 6.
„
Supporting installation of operating system in EXPRESSBUILDER
„
– LSI Logic MegaRAID™ SAS PCI EXPRESS™ ROMB (Controller on the I/O board)
– SecuRAID 321 Disk Array Controller (SCSI 2ch)
Other optional boards
– Adaptec 29160LP SCSI Controller
Windows Server 2003
Express Setup can install Windows Server 2003 operating system. However, note the following issue:
IMPORTANT:
„
Before starting the installation, complete all the process of adding the optional device
and the setup of Bull NovaScale server mainframe (BIOS and optional board
specification)
„
A document for installing Windows Server 2003 is also attached to the other software
package which is sold separately, but refer to this document when you install Windows
Server 2003 on this model.
„
After completing Express Setup, see "Setup for Solving Problems" described later to
specify the settings for trouble recovery such as "Specifying Memory Dump".
Installing on the Mirrored Volume
If you want to install Windows Server 2003 on the volume that is mirrored using "Disk Management", invalid the
mirroring before operating the installation to set back to the basic disk, and valid the mirroring again after the
installation has completed.
Creating, invalid, delete mirror volume can be operated from "Disk Management" in "Computer Management".
Connecting MO Device
If you are installing Windows Server 2003 with MO device connected, the installation may not be completed normally.
In such case, disconnect the MO device and then re-install the system from the beginning.
Media such as DAT
During the operating system installation, do not attach the unnecessary media for operating system installation to the
system, such as DAT.
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
5-5
Connecting Hard Disk
Connect the hard disk that operating system is not going to be installed on after installing the operating system.
NOTE: If you connect the SecuRAID 321 board / LSI Logic MegaRAID SAS 8480E as a
data disk, clear disk array controller's configuration information before you perform the
Express Setup. The process for clearing configuration information is described in the
manual attached to the SecuRAID 321 board.
Creating Partition Size
The size for the partition that the system is to be installed can be calculated from the following formula.
Size necessary to install the system + Paging File Size + Dump File Size + Application Size
Size necessary to install the system = 3500 MB (Windows Server 2003 R2)
3500 MB (Windows Server 2003 with Service Pack1)
4400 MB (Windows Server 2003 + Service Pack1 CD-ROM)
Paging File Size (Recommended) = Mounted Memory Size * 1.5
Dump File Size
= Mounted Memory Size + 12 MB
Application Size
= Required Size
IMPORTANT:
„
The above-mentioned paging file size is recommended for collecting debug
information (memory dump). The paging file with initial size large enough to store the
dump file in the boot drive is required.
It may not be possible to collect correct debug information due to virtual memory
shortage when the paging file is insufficient, so set a paging file size large enough for
the entire system.
„
The maximum paging file size which can be set on one partition is 4095 MB. If the
above paging file size exceeds 4095 MB, specify 4095 MB for the paging file size.
„
The maximum dump file size for the system with more than 2 GB memory mounted is
'2048 MB + 12 MB'.
„
If you install any application program or the like, add necessary space to the partition
to install these programs.
For example, if the mounted memory size is 512 MB, the partition size will be calculated by the above formula as
follows:
3500 MB + (512 MB * 1.5) + (512 MB + 12 MB) + Application Size = 4792 MB + Application Size
Dividing the recommended storage space size over multiple disks as written below will solve problem of the size of the
partition on a single disk.
1.
Set the "Size required for installation + Paging file size" as the system partition size.
2.
Specify that debugging information (equivalent to the dump file size) must be written to a separate disk. See
Chapter 5 for more information on the procedure.
Re-installing to the hard disk which has been upgraded to Dynamic Disk
You cannot re-install Windows Server 2003 with the current partition of the hard disk upgraded to Dynamic Disk kept
remained.
If you want to keep the current partition remained, see Appendix E to re-install the system.
5-6
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
About maintenance partition (the area displayed as "MAINTE_P")
The maintenance partition for server maintenance is reserved in the head of Hard Disk Drive (a partition of
approximately 55 MB). This area is for saving some maintenance utilities. Do not delete the maintenance partition.
Application of Service Pack
When using Windows Server 2003 with this equipment, surely apply ServicePack 1. When installing Windows Server
2003 R2, it is not necessary to apply Service Pack 1.
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
Setup Flow
This section visually describes Express Setup flow.
: Process that proceeds automatically
: Process that needs to input or select
Do you want to proceed the setup using the setup parameter file?
Yes
No
Read notes and restrictions
Confirmed
Insert floppy disk into the floppy disk drive
Confirmed
New File
Confirmed
(Select Setup Parameter File)
Existing File
Check Setup Parameter File
Correct
Skipped
Select whether or not to confirm/modify the setting
Confirmed
Disk Array Configuration Screen
Creating Maintenance Partition and Installing Utilities
Operating System Installation Menu
Create the OS partition after the reboot
Confirm Setup File
Create New File
Select OS to install
In case [Skip] is selected
Confirm the specification and input the value
Remove the Floppy Disk and CD-ROM
from the Drive
Insert Windows CD-ROM
Agree Software License Agreement
Install OS Automatically
↓
Log on Automatically
After restarting the computer, the
installation is completed.
Copying NEC Modules
↓
Copying Selected Application Modules
No Floppy Disk
5-7
5-8
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
Installing Windows Server 2003
Express Setup proceeds to the setup by specifying the necessary information in the wizard. You can also save the setup
information created in the wizard on a floppy disk as a setup file.
NOTE: One floppy disk formatted by MS-DOS 1.44 MB is necessary to save the setup
information. Please prepare a floppy disk by yourself before the installation.
Using the same setup file you saved and used before allows you to omit specifying the
setup information in the wizard.
And if you use a floppy disk which is attached to the optional device such as disk array
controller and contains device driver to install optional mass storage driver while
processing the Express Setup, you have to save the setup information in the setup file.
Please prepare one empty floppy disk for setup file in this case, too.
1.
Turn the power of peripheral devices on, and then turn on the server.
NOTES:
„ If you are installing Windows Server 2003 with an MO device connected, the
installation may not be completed normally. In such case, detach the MO device and
then re-install the system from the beginning.
„ Connect the hard disk drive that operating system is not going to be installed to after
installing operating system.
„ If you create multiple logical drives in your system, refer to "Reinstalling the operation
system when multiple logical drives exist" (Appendix E).
2.
Insert the EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM into the DVD-ROM drive of the server.
3.
Press the RESET switch or press Ctrl, Alt, and Delete to reboot from the EXPRESSBUILDER. (You may
also turn off and then on again to reboot the server.)
The system will boot from the CD-ROM and EXPRESSBUILDER starts.
4.
Click [Express Setup].
5.
The message, "Do you want to use the parameter file in order to set up the Bull NovaScale Server or
Workstation", will be displayed.
If you use the setup parameter file, click [Yes] and if you do not use the setup parameter file, click [No].
6.
"Note" will be displayed. Read the instruction carefully and click [Confirm].
7.
Notes and restrictions are displayed.
Read the messages carefully and click [Confirm].
NOTE: If some operating system has already been installed on the hard disk, a message
asking if you want to continue the installation appears.
If you wish to continue the installation, click [Continue].
8.
If you selected "Yes" at step 5, place a floppy disk into the floppy disk drive mounted on the server.
If not, go to next step.
NOTE: If you set the floppy disk at this step, do not remove the floppy disk from the
server until the message as removing the floppy disk appears.
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
5-9
[Using the existing Configuration Disk]
The parameters files in the floppy disk are listed in dialogue-box.
1) Select a parameters file to use in the Express Setup, and then click [Use].
After the parameters file is specified, the message "Do you want to review or modify the Setup File
parameters?" appears.
2) If you want to modify or confirm the parameters file, click [Review]. If not, click [Skip].
Click [Review] → Go to next step.
Click [Skip] → Go to step 10.
[Using a blank disk]
1) Click the box under [Setup File Name: (A)] or press A.
The dialog box appears.
2) Type the file name and click [Use].
9.
Confirm or modify the parameters of disk array configuration.
[Configure RAID] screen appears. Confirm the specification, modify if necessary, and then click [OK].
NOTE: Choose RAID0 when you install it in one hard disk.
When the dialogue-box is closed, the Express setup automatically performs the RAID configuration, creating
Maintenance partition and installing several utilities.
10.
Select the installing Operating system.
Select "Windows" from the menu.
11.
Next, [Basic Information] wizard appears. Confirm the parameters, modify if necessary, and then click [Next].
After that, click [Next], [Back], or [Help] to continue. Modify the parameters each time necessary.
IMPORTANT:
„
Reserve the partition to install the operating system more than the minimally required
size.
„
If you select "Use Existing Partition" as "System Partition", the contents of the first
non-maintenance partition will be erased and formatted. The contents of other
partitions will be retained. The figure below shows which partition will be deleted if a
maintenance partition exists.
First Partition
<Maintenance Partition>
Retained
Second
Partition
Deleted
Third
Partition
Retained
Fourth
Partition
Retained
„
You cannot re-install the system if the disk has been upgraded to Dynamic Disk. Do
not select "Use Existing Partition" as "System Partition".
„
If you specify other than 4095 MB for the "Installing Partition", it is necessary to
convert to NTFS.
„
If "Use Existing Array" as "New/Existing RAID Configuration" is selected but the
partition other than the one to install Windows Server 2003 does not exist (excluding
maintenance partition), Express Setup will reserve the maximum area of the hard disk
to install Windows Server 2003.
„
You cannot go to the next screen if the specification is incorrect.
„
On specification, an error may occur in relationship with the specified contents of the
former screen and require to go back to modify the specification.
During the setup, the screen to specify the partition that Windows Server 2003 is to be
installed appears. The first 55 MB area displayed on the screen is a partition that is
used to store the configuration information or utilities unique of the server. We do not
„
5-10
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
recommend to delete this area, but if you do not want to reserve this 55 MB area,
perform the installation by manual setup. It is not possible to delete this area by
Express Setup.
„
To specify the setup parameters, the number of characters must not exceed the limit as
shown in the table below. (Double-byte character shall be counted as two characters.)
Item
Value specified
Create Users
User Name
Group Name
Full Name
Explanation
Group Name
Explanation (Group Name)
Create Groups
Max. number
of characters
19
20
63
47
20
47
NOTE: If you click [OK] in [Role of Computer] screen, the setup automatically selects
default value for the later specification to continue the installation.
12.
Copy the modules for the optional mass storage driver.
If you want to install the optional mass storage driver, insert the floppy disk attached to mass storage driver
into the floppy disk drive and follow the message to perform the installation.
NOTE: You can use this function only when the floppy disk drive is attached to the
system.
13.
Remove EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM from the DVD-ROM drive according to the message.
If you proceed to the setup by using setup parameter file, remove the floppy disk from the floppy disk drive.
Insert Windows Server 2003 CD-ROM into the DVD-ROM drive.
[Agree Software License Agreement] screen appears.
14.
Read the contents carefully and click [I agree.] or press F8 if you do agree. If you do not agree, click [I
disagree] or press F3.
IMPORTANT:
15.
„
If you do not agree to this agreement, the setup terminates and Windows Server 2003
will not be installed.
„
If "NetWare Gateway (and Client) Service" is specified to install, the window to
specify the details of "NetWare Gateway (and Client) Service" pops up on the first
logon. Specify the appropriate value.
If you selected [Yes] on [Apply Service Pack] at Basic Information, follow the procedure below.
1) Follow the message to take Windows Server 2003 CD-ROM out of the DVD-ROM drive.
2) Follow the message to insert Windows Server 2003 Service Pack 1 or later into the DVD-ROM drive.
Windows Server 2003 and the specified application will be installed automatically and logon to the system.
Install and configure the device drivers.
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
16.
5-11
If you install Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2, insert Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 Standard
Edition DISK 2 or Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 Enterprise Edition DISK 2 into the DVD-ROM drive
after the OS installation.
Hereinafter, proceed to operations according to the message.
When the installation has finished, remove Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 Standard Edition DISK 2 or
Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 Enterprise Edition DISK 2 from the DVD-ROM drive, and restart the
system.
Now the Setup using Express Setup has completed.
5-12
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
Installing and Setting Device Drivers
Follow these steps to install and configure the device drivers.
PROSet
PROSet is a utility that confirms the function of network contained in network driver.
Utilizing PROSet enables the following items:
„
Confirm detailed information about the adapter.
„
Diagnose loop back test, packet transmission test, etc.
„
Setup of teaming.
Configuring several network adapters as one team provides the server a tolerant environment on any trouble and
enhance throughput between the switches.
PROSet is necessary to use these features.
Follow the procedure below to install PROSet.
1.
Insert the EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM into the DVD-ROM drive.
2.
The [Windows Explorer] dialog starts.
* Procedure with the standard start menu
Click Start menu and click [Windows Explorer].
* Procedure with the classic start menu
Click Start menu, point to [Programs], [Accessories] and click [Windows Explorer].
3.
Run "DXSETUP.EXE" in the following directory.
DVD-ROM Drive Letter:\WINNT\DOTNET\ NS4\PROSET\2KXPWS03
The [Intel(R) PROSet - InstallShield Wizard] dialog starts.
4.
Click [Next].
5.
Choose "I accept the terms in the license agreement" and click [Next].
6.
Choose "Typical" and click [Next].
7.
Click [Install].
8.
When [InstallShield Wizard Completed] window is displayed, click [Finish].
9.
Restart the system.
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
5-13
Network Driver
Specifying the details of network driver.
Two standard network drivers that are mounted will be installed automatically, but the link speed and Duplex mode
need to be specified manually.
[When PROSet is not installed]
1.
The [Local Area Connection Properties] dialog box appears.
* Procedure with the standard start menu
1. Click Start menu, then [Control Panel], [Network Connections], and finally [Local Area Connection].
* Procedure with the classic start menu
1. Click Start menu, [Settings] and then [Network Connections].
The [Network Connections] dialog box appears.
2. Right-click [Local Area Connection] and click [Properties] from the drop-down menu.
2.
Click [Configure].
The property dialog box for network adapter appears.
3.
Click [Advanced] and specify [Link Speed & Duplex] value the same as the value specified for the HUB.
4.
Click [OK] on the property dialog box for network adapter.
[When PROSet is installed]
1.
The [Intel PROSet] dialog box appears.
* Procedure with the standard start menu
Click Start menu, point to [Control Panel] and click [Intel PROSet].
* Procedure with the classic start menu
1. Click Start menu, point to [Settings] and click [Control Panel].
2. Double-click [Intel(R) PROSet] on the [Control Panel] window.
2.
Click [(Network Adapter Name)] in the list.
3.
Click [Speed] and specify [Link Speed & Duplex Settings] value the same as the value specified for the HUB.
4.
Click [Apply] and click [OK].
Specify the other network driver with the same process as above.
Also, add or delete any protocols and services if necessary.
You can operate the process on the property dialog box for local area network which can be appeared from [Network
and Dial-up Connection].
NOTE: We recommend you to add [Network Monitor] at [Adding Services]. [Network
Monitor] can monitor the frame (or the packet) that the computer installing [Network
Monitor] sends or receives. This tool is valuable when analyzing network trouble. For
information on how to install the tool, see the "Setting for Solving Problems" described
later in this chapter.
5-14
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
Optional Network Board Driver (Intel PRO/1000 PT Dual Port - Intel PRO/1000 MT Dual Port Intel PRO/1000 XT Single Port – Intel Pro/1000 MF)
If you want to use an optional Network Board, install the network driver stored in EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM.
In case of using Intel PRO/1000 PT Dual Port - Intel PRO/1000 MT Dual Port - Intel PRO/1000 XT Single Port
"DVD-ROM Drive Letter:\WINNT\DOTNET\NS4\PRO1000\WS03XP2K"
If the procedure of installation is not clear, refer to the installation procedure described in the section "Installation of the
Optional Network Board Driver".
Installation of the Optional Network Board Driver
1.
Start Device Manager.
2.
Click [Network adapters] and double-click [(Network Adapter Name)].
[(Network Adapter Name) Properties] appears.
NOTE: [(Intel(R) PRO/1000...)] is the name of On-Board adapter. All other names show
the Optional Network Board.
3.
Click [Driver] tab and click [Update Driver...].
[Hardware Update Wizard] appears.
4.
Select the [Install from a list or specific location (Advanced)] radio button and click [Next].
5.
Select the [Search for the best driver in these locations] radio button and check off the [Search removable
media (floppy, CD-ROM...)] check box.
6.
Check the [Include this location in the search] check box and when using [Intel Pro/1000 PT Dual - Intel
Pro/1000 MT Dual – Intel Pro/1000 MF] specify
[DVD-ROM driveletter:\WINNT\DOTNET\NS4\PRO1000\WS03XP2K].
When using [INTEL PRO/100+], specify
[DVD-ROM driveletter:\WINNT\DOTNET\NS4\PRO100\WS03XP2K].
Then click [Next].
7.
Click [Finish].
Installing SCSI Controller Driver (Adaptec 29160LP)
If you use SCSI controller driver (Adaptec 29160LP), update your system with EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM
attached to your system.
The SCSI controller driver will be installed automatically.
Installing Disk Array Controller Driver (SecuRAID 321)
To additionally install the SecuRAID 321 in a system containing Windows Server 2003, connect the controller and
install the driver as follows:
1.
Start [Device Manager] from [Start] menu → [Control Panel] → [Administrative Tools] → [Computer
Management].
2.
Double-click the [LSI Logic Megaraid SCSI 320-2] which Device Manager lists.
3.
Click the [Driver] tab and click [Update Driver...].
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
5-15
4.
When the "Update Device Driver Wizard" appears, select "Install from a list or specific location [Advanced]"
and click [Next].
5.
Select the "Search for the best driver in these locations." and check the "Search removable media [floppy,
CD-ROM...]" check box.
6.
Insert "Windows Server 2003 OEM-DISK for EXPRESSBUILDER" into the floppy disk drive and click
[Next].
7.
Copying of the driver is completed, and the [Completing the Hardware Update Wizard] dialog box appears.
Click [Finish]
Graphics Accelerator Driver
Standard graphics accelerator drivers that are mounted will be installed automatically. The following is the procedure
when it is necessary to install manually.
If you want to use optional Graphics Accelerator Driver board, follow the document attached to the board to install the
driver.
1.
Insert the EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM into the DVD-ROM drive.
2.
Click Start menu, point to [Programs], [Accessories] and click [Windows Explorer].
3.
Run "SETUP.EXE" in the following directory.
<DVD-ROM Drive Letter>:\WINNT\DOTNET\VIDEO\SETUP.EXE
4.
Follow the on-screen instructions to continue the installation.
If the dialog message "Digital Signature could not been found." appears, select [Yes] to continue.
5.
Remove the EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM from the DVD-ROM drive, follow the on-screen instructions
and restart the system.
5-16
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
Available Switch Options for Windows Server 2003 Boot.ini File
Many different switches will be available if you edit Boot.ini file.
For the available switch options, refer to the following information:
„
Microsoft Knowledge Base - Article ID: 833721
"Available switch options for the Windows XP and the Windows Server 2003 Boot.ini files"
If your system has a memory capacity in excess of 4 GB in its installing, adding /PAE switch in Boot.ini file will enable
the system to be installed with over 4 GB of memory.
However, the Microsoft operating system products which support /PAE switch option are limited.
Refer to the following article in Microsoft Knowledge Base to check the supported products.
„
Microsoft Knowledge Base - Article ID: 291988
"A description of the 4 GB RAM tuning feature and the Physical Address Extension switch"
Below is the example on how to add /PAE switch to Boot.ini file.
1.
Click [Start], point to [Settings], and then click [Control Panel].
2.
In [Control Panel], double-click [System].
3.
Click the [Advanced] tab, and then click [Settings] under [Setup and Recovery].
4.
Under [System Setup], click [Edit] to open [Boot.ini].
5.
Add "/PAE" to [Operating Systems] section in [Boot.ini] file, and then save it.
<Example of Boot.ini file>
[boot loader]
timeout=30
default=multi(0)disk(0)rdisk(0)partition(2)\WINDOWS
[operating systems]
multi(0)disk(0)rdisk(0)partition(2)\WINDOWS="Windows Server 2003 " /fastdetect
multi(0)disk(0)rdisk(0)partition(2)\WINDOWS="Windows Server 2003, PAE" /fastdetect /PAE
C:\CMDCONS\BOOTSECT.DAT="Microsoft Windows Recovery Console" /cmdcons
This is the end of editing Boot.ini file.
NOTE: If you choose one of the items in the "Default operating system" drop-down list
box in [Setup and Recovery] group box, you can make your system start automatically
from the switch you specified.
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
Setting for Solving Problems
Setup the following issue in advance so that your computer can recover from any trouble precisely and as soon as
possible when it should occur.
Memory Dump (Debug Information)
This section describes the procedures for collecting memory dump (debug information) in the server.
IMPORTANT: Cautions for the Memory Dump
„
The staff of your maintenance service representative is in charge of collecting memory
dump. Customers need only to specify the memory dump.
„
If any trouble occurs after specifying the process below, the message to inform that the
system is in short of virtual memory may appear, but continue to start the system. If
you restart the system in such case, memory dump may not be stored correctly.
Follow the procedure below to specify.
1.
Select [Control Panel] and click [System].
The [System Properties] dialog box appears.
2.
Select [Advanced] tab.
3.
Click [Settings] on the [Startup and Recovery] group box.
IMPORTANT:
Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions
„
Specifying "Complete Memory Dump" to write the debug information is
recommended.
If the mounted memory size is larger than 2 GB, "Complete Memory Dump" cannot
be specified, in this case specify "Kernel Memory Dump" instead.
„
Specify a drive where there is a free area greater than the size of "the memory capacity
mounted on Bull NovaScale server + 1 MB".
„
In case the mounted memory size exceeds 2 GB due to the added memory, change the
write debugging information to [Kernel Memory Dump] before adding memory. The
size of debugging information (memory dump) to be taken also changes due to adding
memory. Verify the size of the empty space in the debugging information (memory
dump) write destination drive.
Windows Server 2003
„
Specifying "Complete Memory Dump" to write the debug information is
recommended.
If the mounted memory size is larger than 2 GB, "Complete Memory Dump" cannot
be specified, in this case specify "Kernel Memory Dump" instead.
„
Specify a drive where there is a free area greater than the size of "the memory capacity
mounted on Bull NovaScale server + 12 MB" (In case the memory capacity is larger
than 2 GB, a free area of "2048+12 MB" or more).
„
In case the mounted memory size exceeds 2 GB due to the added memory, change the
write debugging information to [Kernel Memory Dump] before adding memory. The
size of debugging information (memory dump) to be taken also changes due to adding
memory. Verify the size of the empty space in the debugging information (memory
dump) write destination drive.
5-17
5-18
4.
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
Specify "Complete memory dump" and modify [Dump file:] in the [Write debugging information] group box.
e.g. Write the debug information in D drive write the file name "MEMORY.DMP".
D:\MEMORY.DMP
5.
Click [Settings] on the [Performance] group box.
The [Performance Options] window appears.
6.
Click [Advanced] tab on the [Performance Options] window.
7.
Click [Change] on the [Virtual memory] group box.
8.
Modify [Initial Size] in the [Paging file size for selected drive] box to a value larger than [Recommended],
and click [Set].
IMPORTANT:
9.
„
The above-mentioned paging file size is recommended for collecting debug
information (memory dump). The paging file with initial size large enough to store the
dump file in the boot drive is required.
Correct debug information might not be able to be collected due to virtual memory
shortage when the paging file is insufficient, so set the paging file size large enough
for the entire system.
„
For more information on "Recommended" value, see "Partition Size to be Created"
described earlier.
„
In case the memory is expanded, re-specify the paging file to suit the new memory
size.
Click [OK].
The message to restart the system may appear according to the modified specification. In such case, follow
the message to restart the system.
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
5-19
Windows Dr. Watson
Windows Dr. Watson is a debugger for application errors. If any application error is detected, Dr. Watson diagnoses the
server and logs diagnostic information (log). Follow the procedure below and specify Dr. Watson to collect diagnostic
information.
1.
Click [Run] on Start menu.
2.
Type "drwtsn32.exe" in the [Open] box, and click [OK].
The [Dr. Watson for Windows] dialog box appears.
3.
Specify the location to store the diagnostic information in the [Log File Path] box.
The diagnostic information will be stored with the file name "DRWTSN32.LOG".
NOTE: You cannot specify network path. Specify the path on local computer.
4.
Specify the location of crash dump file in the [Crash Dump] box.
NOTE: "Crash Dump File" is a binary file that can be read with Windows Debugger.
5.
Check the following check boxes on the [Option] box.
† Dump Symbol Table
† Dump All Thread Contexts
† Add To Existing Log File
† Create Crash Dump File
For more information on each function above, refer to Online Help.
6.
Click [OK].
Network Monitor
Using Network Monitor helps you to investigate and manage network troubles. To use Network Monitor, you need to
restart the system after the installation has completed, we recommend installing Network Monitor before any network
trouble may occur.
1.
Point to [Settings] from Start menu and click [Control Panel].
The [Control Panel] dialog box appears.
2.
Double-click [Add or Remove Programs].
The [Add or Remove Programs] dialog box appears.
3.
Click [Add/Remove Windows Component].
The [Windows Components Wizard] dialog box appears.
4.
Click [Management and Monitoring Tools] and click [Details].
The [Management and Monitoring Tools] dialog appears.
5.
Click to select the [Network Monitor Tools] check box, and then click [OK].
6.
The [Windows Components Wizard] dialog box appears again, so click [Next].
7.
If the setup requests the install disk, insert Windows Server 2003 CD-ROM into the DVD-ROM drive and
click [OK].
8.
Click [Complete] in the [Windows Component Wizard] dialog box.
9.
Click [Close] in the [Add/Remove Application] dialog box.
10.
Close the [Control Panel] dialog box.
5-20
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
To start Network Monitor, point to [Program] → [Administrative Tools] and click [Network Monitor]. For information
on how to operate Network Monitor, refer to Online Help.
Installing Maintenance Utilities
Various maintenance utilities are contained in your EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM. See Chapter 6 for installing the
utilities to your server or management workstations.
Updating the System - Applying Service Pack IMPORTANT: If you install Windows Server 2003 CD-ROM which contains Service
Pack 1 to your system, you do not have to apply Service Pack 1 again.
„
Processor is expanded (expanded from single processor to multi-processor).
„
Modified system configuration.
„
Recovered the system using recovery process.
Log on to the system with an account that has administrative authority (e.g. Administrator) and insert the
EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM into the DVD-ROM drive of the server.
[Setup Software] in [Master Control Menu] screen appears, so left-click the item. Click [Update Bull NovaScale
System] from the menu and the setup will start. After that, follow the message to continue the setup process.
Making Backup Copies of System Information
The system information includes the current BIOS settings and any specific information for the server.
Save the information after completing the system setup.
Without the backup data, you will not be able to recover the information.
You can save the information by the following process.
1.
Insert the EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM in the DVD-ROM drive and reboot the system.
2.
Select [Tools].
3.
Select [Off-line Maintenance Utility].
4.
Select [System Information Management].
5.
Set a floppy disk in the floppy disk drive.
6.
Select [Save].
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
Installing with the OEM-FD for Mass Storage Device
This section explains how to setup with the OEM-FD. You usually do not have to do as follows. The detailed
information is provided by the manual of the Mass Storage Device.
Installation of Mass Storage Device not Supported by ExpressSetup
If you would like to install or re-install the operating system when the system has new mass storage device not
supported by EXPRESSBUILDER, you have to set as follows.
1.
Read the manual supplied with the mass storage device before setting the server.
2.
If the mass storage device is a disk array controller, configure the RAID system before running
EXPRESSBUILDER.
3.
Boot the system from EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM.
4.
(a) When the Disk Array Configuration dialog box appears, check "Use Existing Array".
(b) Check "Apply OEM-FD for Mass storage device".
5.
Copy the driver for the mass storage device in the ExpressSetup.
Insert the floppy disk attached the mass storage device into the floppy disk drive.
Continue the ExpressSetup, referring to the on-screen messages.
5-21
5-22
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
This page is intentionally left blank
Chapter 6
Installing and Using Utilities
This section describes how to use the EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM that comes with your server and to install the
utilities stored on the EXPRESSBUILDER.
6-2
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
EXPRESSBUILDER
EXPRESSBUILDER has some maintenance utilities and management software. EXPRESSBUILDER also helps you to
install NOS (Windows Server 2003).
NOTE: Before using EXPRESSBUILDER for initial setup, complete the hardware
configuration.
EXPRESSBUILDER has three executing modes depending on your operating environments. One is for using on
Windows system, and the others are booted from EXPRESSBUILDER CD.
„
DOS-based with local console
The following menu appears on the local display after booting from EXPRESSBUILDER CD. You can install
NOS or run the diagnostic program and so on.
„
DOS-based with remote console
Used to set up the server from the management workstation by accessing the server over the network or via
COM B (serial) port.
NOTE: No keyboard connected to the server is permitted to run this program.
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
„
Windows-based
This program is called as "Master Control Menu" that can run under the Microsoft Windows system
(Windows 95 or later and Windows NT 4.0 or later). You can install the several applications and read the
documentation from the menu.
6-3
6-4
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
EXPRESSBUILDER for DOS-Based with Local Console
This subsection describes the procedures for using EXPRESSBUILDER for DOS-based with local console.
Starting EXPRESSBUILDER
The following procedure instructs you to start EXPRESSBUILDER.
IMPORTANT: Do not remove the EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM while
EXPRESSBUILDER is running.
1.
Turn on peripheral devices and the server in this order.
2.
Insert the EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM supplied with your server into the DVD-ROM drive of your server.
3.
Ensure that the floppy disk drive is empty.
4.
Press the RESET switch or press Ctrl, Alt, and Delete to reboot from the EXPRESSBUILDER. (You may
also turn off and then on again to reboot the server.)
EXPRESSBUILDER boots up displaying the top menu.
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
6-5
Express Setup
"Express Setup" is intended for initial setup of the server. Its automatic installation mode guides the user easily through
the process by detailing specific hardware features and providing screen prompts for software selection and
configuration. The program loads the utilities and drivers, applies RAID settings, partitions the disk, and installs the
desired operating system.
If you install Windows Server 2003, after a few tasks are completed, all that remains to be done is to remove the
EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM and insert the Windows CD-ROM, input a product ID number, and acknowledge the
license agreement.
IMPORTANT:
„
Express Setup is intended for the initial setup of the server system and, therefore,
Express Setup clears the contents of the hard disk.
„
When the setup is started, do not turn off the server until the setup is completed, and
also make sure not to remove the "Configuration Diskette" from the floppy disk drive
until the message that allow you to remove it appeared.
Tools
"Tools" is also intended for initial setup of the server. It provides more installation options than Express Setup and
permits the user to quickly create utility support disks, run the Off-line Maintenance Utility and system diagnostic
utility, set up a maintenance partition, and update the various BIOS programs.
Tools Menu
Save/Restore RAID Configuration Data
Off-line Maintenance Utility
System Diagnostics
Create Support Disk
Setup Maintenance Partition
BIOS/FW/etc. Update
System Management
Help
Return to the Top Menu
„
RAID Board: Present
Total Drives: 1
Drives in Group: 1
Hot Spares: 1
RAID Level: 7
Write Mode: WRITE_THRU
Maint Part: Present
Save/Restore RAID Configuration Data
The item allows the configuration information on the disk array system to be saved or restored from the
floppy disk.
– Save Disk Array Configuration Data
The configuration information on the disk array controller is saved into the floppy disk. If you set or
change RAID, always use this function to save the configuration information into a floppy disk.
– Restore Disk Array Configuration Data
The configuration information saved in a floppy disk is restored to NVRAM and hard disk on the disk
array controller.
If the configuration information is broken or changed by mistake, restore the configuration information.
When the defected disk array controller is replaced, the configuration information on the hard disk must
be saved into the disk array controller.
However, if the configuration information on the new disk array controller is saved into a hard disk, use
this function to restore the configuration information.
IMPORTANT: Some Disk Array Controllers do not support this function. In that case,
this menu will not be shown.
6-6
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
„
Off-line Maintenance Utility
Off-line Maintenance Utility is an operating system independent maintenance program that performs
preventive maintenance and error analysis for your server. See Chapter 8 or online help for details.
„
System Diagnostics
System Diagnostics runs various tests on the server system to check if the server functions are normal and if
the connection between the server and additional board is normal.
After the System Diagnostics is run, a system check program assigned to each model starts. See Chapter 7 for
details.
„
Create Support Disk
EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM contains a number of device drivers and utilities that you can put on floppy
disks and load onto your system.
Using this menu creates a support disk by copying from the EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM. If your system
has Windows operating system, you may find it more convenient to use EXPRESSBUILDER for
Windows-based to make support disks
Write the displayed title on the floppy disk label, which is useful for management in the future. Customers are
to provide a floppy disk to create a support disk.
– Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition OEM-DISK for EXPRESSBUILER
Creates a support disk for installing Windows Server 2003 Standard x64 Edition and Windows Server
2003 Enterprise x64 Edition.
– Windows Server 2003 OEM-DISK for EXPRESSBUILDER
Creates a support disk for installing Windows Server 2003 Standard Edition and Windows Server 2003
Enterprise Edition. (No need to create this disk when installing the operating system with the Express
Setup.)
– ROM-DOS Startup FD
Creates a support disk for starting the ROM-DOS system.
– Off-line Maintenance Utility Bootable FD
Creates a support disk for activating the Off-line Maintenance Utility.
– System Management FD
Creates a support disk for activating the System Management.
„
Setup Maintenance Partition
Maintenance partition is a specific partition for the server and created on your system disk. About 55 MB of
the maintenance partition includes the various maintenance utilities and executable commands.
In this menu, you can create the maintenance partition, install the various utilities, and update the utilities. The
maintenance utilities installed in the maintenance partition are system diagnostics, System Management, and
Off-line Maintenance Utility.
IMPORTANT:
„
Do not reset or turn off the server while the running this menu. If the processing is
discontinued, the system becomes unable to start.
„
The existence of the maintenance partition may be identified from the operating
system. In order to retain the Configuration Data, do not delete the partition.
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
6-7
NOTES:
„
The maintenance partition, once created, will not be recreated again.
„
When the maintenance partition does not exist, some menu items do not appear.
– Create Maintenance Partition
EXPRESSBUILDER creates about 55 MB of the maintenance partition on the system disk (or disk array
system) as work area. The various utilities are installed when the maintenance partition is created
successfully or when the maintenance partition is already created.
– Install Maintenance Partition Utilities
Various utilities are installed in the maintenance partition from the CD-ROM.
– Maintenance Partition Update
Various utilities are copied in the Maintenance Partition from the update disk. This menu is only used
when the update disk is supplied from your service representative or attached with your system.
– FDISK
Execute FDISK command of ROM-DOS system. You can create/delete partitions, etc.
„
BIOS/FW/etc. Update
This menu allows you to update software modules such as BIOS and firmware of the server by using the
update disk (3.5-inch floppy disk) that is distributed from our customer service representative.
After rebooting the system, an update program is started automatically from the floppy disk, and the various
BIOS and firmware programs are updated.
IMPORTANT: Do not turn off the server while the update program is running. If the
update processing is discontinued, the system becomes unable to start.
„
System Management
The parameters of BMC (Baseboard Management Controller) are set for remote control and alert.
„
Help
Displays explanations about various functions of EXPRESSBUILDER.
„
Return to the Top Menu
Choosing this menu returns to the Top Menu.
6-8
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
EXPRESSBUILDER for DOS-based with Remote Console
This subsection describes the procedures for using EXPRESSBUILDER for DOS-based with remote console.
EXPRESSBUILDER contains the remote console feature that allows the system administrator to set up the server from
the management workstation (management PC) via the network or the server's COM2 (serial) port.
IMPORTANT:
„
Do not use this feature on any other computer than the server, or on any other server
obtained without EXPRESSBUILDER. Doing so may cause a failure of the server.
„
When a keyboard is connected to the server, the remote console feature is disabled.
EXPRESSBUILDER determines that the server has a console. (Nothing is displayed
on the management PC.)
Starting
The following two methods are available to start the server.
„
Running EXPRESSBUILDER from the management PC via LAN
„
Running EXPRESSBUILDER from the management PC via direct connection (COM2)
For the procedure for starting EXPRESSBUILDER for DOS-based with Remote Console, see "DianaScope".
IMPORTANT: Do not change the boot device order in BOOT menu in BIOS SETUP.
EXPRESSBUILDER cannot be used if the DVD-ROM drive is not the first device to
launch the system.
To use this feature, you need a 3.5-inch floppy disk. Please prepare a floppy disk.
NOTE: The following items of BIOS setup information will be set as shown below.
„
LAN Controller 1 (10/100): [Enabled]
„
Serial Port A:
Base I/O address:
Interrupt:
[Enabled]
[3F8]
[IRQ 4]
„
Serial Port B:
Base I/O address:
Interrupt:
[Enabled]
[2F8]
[IRQ 3]
„
Serial Port Address:
[On-board COM B]
„
Baud Rate:
[19.2k]
„
Flow Control:
[CTS/RTS]
„
Console Type:
[PC ANSI]
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
6-9
Top Menu
Shown below are the top menu items.
„
Setup
Automatically sets up the server.
„
Tools
Launch the features of EXPRESSBUILDER individually.
„
Help
Help message on EXPRESSBUILDER.
„
Quit
Quit EXPRESSBUILDER.
Setup
The EXPRESSBUILDER checks the hardware configuration of the server. The disk array and maintenance partition are
automatically configured.
Tools
When you select the [Tools] on the Top Menu, the following screen appears.
The menu items available only in remote console operation among those described in section "EXPRESSBUILDER for
DOS-Based with Local Console" are displayed. See the previous subsection for detailed explanation of menu items.
6-10
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
EXPRESSBUILDER for Windows-Based (Master Control Menu)
The Master Control Menu is used to,
„
Read the User's Guide or the other documents,
„
Update the server (Windows drivers), and
„
Install the management software.
NOTES:
„
Master Control Menu requires Microsoft Windows 95 (or later) or Windows NT 4.0
(or later).
„
Some documents are provided in the PDF format. Use the Adobe Reader to view or
print these documents.
Insert the EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM into the DVD-ROM drive.
Master Control Menu appears on the screen automatically. If the CD-ROM Autorun function is invalid in your system,
run the \MC\1ST.EXE file in the CD-ROM directly.
Some menu items are greyed-out when the logon user does not have the administrator authority or the menu item is not
available for this system.
To use Master Control Menu,
„
Click [Online Document],[Setup] or [Quit], or
„
Click the right mouse button on the Master Control Menu window.
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
6-11
CONFIGURATION DISKETTE CREATOR
"Configuration Diskette Creator" is a tool to create [Configuration Diskette] that is used for configuring the server with
the Express Setup (see Chapter 5 for details).
If you use the Configuration Diskette created by the Express Setup and Configuration Diskette Creator to run the setup,
you can setup from the installation of operating system to several utilities automatically except for a few key input to
confirm the specification. Also, you can install the system with the same specification as before when re-installing the
system. We recommend you to create [Configuration Diskette] to setup the servers from EXPRESSBUILDER.
IMPORTANT: You can not create [Configuration Diskette] for Microsoft® Windows
Server™ 2003 x64 Editions.
NOTE: You can install Windows Server 2003 without [Configuration Diskette]. Also, you
can modify/newly create [Configuration Diskette] during the setup with
EXPRESSBUILDER.
Creating Configuration Diskette
This section describes about specifying setup information that is necessary for operating system installation and creating
[Configuration Diskette]. Follow the procedure below.
NOTE: In the procedure below, the folder name that is specified when installing Trekking
command is assumed as [Configuration Diskette Creator].
1.
Start the operating system.
2.
Insert the EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM into the DVD-ROM drive.
Master Control Menu will appear.
3.
Right-click on the screen or left-click [Setup]. The menu will appear.
4.
Click [Configuration Diskette Creator].
Configuration Diskette Creator window is displayed.
6-12
5.
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
Click [Create New Information files] from the [File] menu.
The [Disk Environment] dialog box will be displayed.
6.
Specify each item and click [OK].
The dialog boxes to specify setup information will be displayed in order, such as [Basic Information] dialog
box.
7.
Follow the message to specify each item on the dialog box and click [Next].
NOTE: If you click on [Cancel], all the input value will be deleted.
When completing the specification of setup information, the [Save Setup Information] dialog box will appear.
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
6-13
8.
Confirm that the [Configuration Diskette] check box is checked and type the file name for the Setup File in
[File Name].
9.
Insert the floppy disk formatted by 1.44 MB into the floppy disk drive and click [OK].
Now [Configuration Diskette] has been created. [Configuration Diskette] is used when you install Windows
Server 2003. Put a label and keep it in a safe place.
NOTE: For information on the contents of each item, refer to the Online Help.
If you want to modify the information file that already exists, click [Modify information files] on
Configuration Diskette Creator window. Refer to the Help to modify the inf file.
6-14
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
Installing Optional Mass Storage Driver
To install an optional Mass Storage Driver that is supported by Express Setup, follow the procedure below to create
[Configuration Diskette]:
1.
Display Configuration Diskette Creator window.
2.
From the [File] menu, click [Create new information files].
[Disk Environment] dialog box will be displayed.
3.
Specify each item and click [OK].
The dialog boxes to specify setup information will be displayed in order, such as [Disk Environment] dialog
box.
4.
Follow the message to specify each item on the dialog box and click [Next].
NOTE: If you click [Cancel], all the input value will be deleted.
5.
When [User and application setup] is displayed, check [Apply OEM-FD for mass storage device].
6.
When the [Save Setup Information] dialog box is displayed, confirm that the [Configuration Diskette] check
box is checked and input file name for the Setup File in [File Name].
7.
Insert the floppy disk formatted by 1.44 MB into the floppy disk drive and click on [OK].
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
6-15
NEC ESMPRO
NEC ESMPRO (referred to as ESMPRO hereafter) lets a system administrator manage remote servers across a network.
NEC ESMPRO monitors server hardware and software configurations, failures, and performance. With log data
collected by NEC ESMPRO, a system administrator can track long-term and short-term performance, monitor server
usage, create graphs to record trends, and check server failure rates. The administrator can use the information collected
to create more efficient data routing procedures and optimize server usage.
Functions and Features
NEC ESMPRO offers many functions and features for managing remote servers across a network. These features help
the system administrator perform daily system operation, system extension, and transfer tasks. Some features of NEC
ESMPRO Manager include:
„
Hardware and software server configuration
– Hardware resources mounted in servers, such as the processor, memory, disks, disk arrays, and LAN
boards.
– Software resources, such as operating system information and drivers running on each server.
„
Server failures
– On-screen real-time displays provide the system administrator with the failure type, location, cause, and
suggested corrective action.
– Failure data includes hardware failure information such as system board temperature, memory failure,
crashes, and software failure information.
„
Performance
– ESMPRO monitors server performance and displays server usage on the screen and displays information,
such as the rate of processor load, memory usage, disk usage, and LAN traffic. Usage threshold values can
help the system administrator monitor and prevent server overloads.
For installation procedure and detailed explanations on NEC ESMPRO, refer to the online document in the
EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM.
Supplement
Note the following in addition to the NOTE that has been described to the online document for NEC ESMPRO.
„
Indication on NEC ESMPRO Data Viewer after Hot-Add/Remove Memory
If you add or remove a memory board dynamically by using hot-add/remove feature, the added or removed
memory size will not be indicated correctly on Data Viewer of NEC ESMPRO Manager unless the system is
rebooted.
6-16
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
NEC DianaScope
NEC DianaScope is a software application for remote management of the server.
See the online documents for details on the functions and installation of NEC DianaScope.
NOTES:
„
One server license is required for each server to be managed remotely by using NEC
DianaScope.
„
Please contact your service representative in order to purchase this accessory.
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
6-17
MegaRAID Storage Manager™ (Server)
MegaRAID Storage Manager™ (hereinafter abbreviated to MSM) is an application to manage or monitor the LSI Logic
MegaRAID SAS 8408E disk array controller. You can use MSM for management of arrays and error notification by
event monitoring while the system is running.
Before attempting to operate MSM, read the "MegaRAID Storage Manager™ User's Guide" included in
EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM. The manual explains the MSM installation procedure and notes on operating MSM.
Setup with Express Setup
You can install MSM with Express Setup contained in EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM. When you start the Express
Setup, a dialog to specify an application appears. Select [MSM] on the dialog.
Manual Setup
See the online document "MegaRAID Storage Manager™ User's Guide" contained in EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM
for details.
MegaRAID Storage Manager™ (Management PC)
Install the MegaRAID Storage Manager™ (hereinafter abbreviated to MSM) in a management PC that manages servers
via the network.
Before attempting to operate MSM, read the "MegaRAID Storage Manager™ User's Guide" included in
EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM. The manual explains the MSM installation procedure and notes on operating MSM.
IMPORTANT:
Before using Configuration Wizard, Rebuild, or Reconstruction feature of MegaRAID
Storage Manager, make sure the slot number of disk bays.
The slot number of 3.5-inch disk bay is not displayed when executing any of these
features. You must select a Physical Drive number assigned for 3.5-inch disk drive. The
Physical Drive number that appears in Physical view at the left of MegaRAID Storage
Manager is not identical to the slot number of 3.5-inch disk bay. Check the slot number of
3.5-inch disk bay by viewing the Properties view of MegaRAID Storage Manager.
6-18
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
IMPORTANT: To perform Reconstruction within MegaRAID Storage Manager, you must
specify a hard disk drive you want to add or remove in Device ID field. Therefore, you
need to check the slot number and Device ID on Disk Properties View of MegaRAID
Storage Manager before performing Reconstruction.
You can select the disk drive to be removed as shown below.
You can select the disk drive to be added as shown below.
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
IMPORTANT:
„
If you have executed Set Factory Defaults on Adapter Properties menu of WebBIOS,
you must specify the Patrol Read feature again in MegaRAID Storage Manager. If
Patrol Read feature is not used, set the scheduling of Patrol Read to "Disabled".
„
When you install the additional HDD cage in the server, the MegaRAID Storage
Manager operation menu is as shown below. [Physical] view shows two enclosures
having the different enclosure numbers.
You can confirm the port to which the factory-installed 3.5-inch disk bay or additional
3.5-inch disk bay in the following procedure:
On MegaRAID Storage Manager operation menu, click "Enclosure X" you want to
confirm the connected port.
If "5" is displayed for "Number of Slots" in Properties view, the port is connected to
the factory-installed 3.5-inch disk bay.
If "8" is displayed for "Number of Slots" in Properties view, the port is connected to
the 3.5-inch disk bay in additional HDD cage.
6-19
6-20
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
Power Console Plus
Power Console Plus is a utility to control the RAID system. Use of Power Console Plus enables operations (e.g.,
monitoring and maintenance) of RAID systems that are constructed on local Bull NovaScale servers and Bull
NovaScale servers connected through networks (TCP/IP). The operations can be done online on graphical screens
without the system being stopped.
Major Functions
Power Console Plus has the following features:
„
Supporting the Wizard function to facilitate configuration
„
Enabling the change of RAID levels
„
Being compatible with SAF-TE
„
Supporting the performance monitor
„
Supporting enclosure functions such as temperature monitoring, power monitoring, and fan monitoring
„
Enabling the settings of Write, Read, and Cache policies for each logical drive
„
Supporting the save and restore functions for configuration
„
Enabling the display of the SCSI transfer rate
Components
Power Console Plus consists of the following five components:
„
SNMP Agent
This function is not yet supported. Do not install SNMP Agent.
„
MegaRAID Service Monitor
This function enables NEC ESMPRO to monitor the MegaRAID controller by registering event logs. Install
MegaRAID Service Monitor in the Bull NovaScale server in which the MegaRAID controller is mounted.
„
MegaRAID Client
This function controls the RAID system on graphical screens. Install MegaRAID Client in the Bull NovaScale
server in which the MegaRAID controller mounted or in the management PC that is connected through the
Bull NovaScale server and network.
„
MegaRAID Server
Enables control of the MegaRAID controller via the network. Install MegaRAID Server in the Bull
NovaScale server in which the MegaRAID controller mounted.
„
MegaRAID Registration Server
Enables control of the MegaRAID controller via the network. Install in one of Bull NovaScale servers and
management PCs that are connected through network. The above components must be installed correctly for
establishing the environment to use Power Console Plus.
Power Console Plus components to be installed are different between the target servers and management PC.
„
Server:
Express server in which the MegaRAID controller is mounted
Install the following two components in this server:
– MegaRAID Service Monitor
– MegaRAID Client
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
„
6-21
Management PC:
Management PC that monitors and controls servers via the network (TCP/IP)
When managing array on Terminal Server working on Windows NT Server Version 4.0 Terminal Server
Edition, prepare PC, and install Management PC component. Management PC does not guarantee operation
on Client, which used Terminal Server, Terminal Server Emulator, WBT.
Start Power Console Plus of management PC, after powering on the machines where "Server" and
"Management Server" are installed.
Install the following component in this PC:
– MegaRAID Client
„
Management server:
Machine that manages all servers that are monitored and controlled by management PCs
Install the following components in one of the servers or management PCs:
– MegaRAID Server
– MegaRAID Registration Server
Server Setup
Operating Environment
This section explains the operating environment required for Power Console Plus to operate on a server.
„
Hardware
– Memory:
Size large enough for operating system operation + 10 MB or more
– Free space of the hard disk:
10 MB or more
– Display unit:
Screen size 1024 × 768 or larger
– Required peripheral equipment:
Network Interface card
CD-ROM unit
Pointing device such as a mouse
6-22
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
Management PC Setup
This section explains Power Console Plus setup in a computer that manages servers via the network (TCP/IP).
Operating Environment
This section explains the operating environment required for Power Console Plus to operate on a management PC.
„
Hardware
– Machine:
Bull NovaScale series
PC/AT-compatible machine (which contains Intel Pentium or a processor at least equivalent to it)
– Memory:
Size large enough for operating system operation + 10 MB or more
– Free space of the hard disk:
10 MB or more
– Display unit:
Screen size 1024 × 768 or larger
– Required peripheral equipment:
Network Interface card
CD-ROM unit
Pointing device such as a mouse
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
BMC ONLINE UPDATE
The BMC firmware is updated with the BMC Firmware file.
IMPORTANT: Do not turn off the DC power during while updating the BMC Firmware.
The updated BMC firmware becomes valid after restarting the system.
Hardware Requirement
„
Hard disk drive
2 MB
„
Supported operating systems:
Windows® 2000 Server
Windows® 2000 Advanced Server
Windows Server™ 2003 Standard Edition
Windows Server™ 2003 Enterprise Edition
Red Hat Linux Enterprise Linux ES 3
Red Hat Linux Enterprise Linux AS 3
Installation
Windows Server 2003
1.
Insert the EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM into the DVD-ROM drive.
Master Control Menu of EXPRESSBUILDER starts automatically.
2.
Select [BMC Online Update].
BMC Online Update installer starts. Follow the installer instructions to install.
6-23
6-24
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
Linux
1.
Copy the following file in the suitable directory from CD-ROM.
cp /mnt/cdrom/BMCTOOL/OnlineUp/BmcOnlineUpdate.i386.
2.
Expand the rpm file.
rpm –ivh BmcOnlineUpdate.i386
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
Startup
Windows Server 2003
Select [All Programs] → [BmcOnlineUpdate] → [BmcOnlineUpdate].
Linux
Enter the following command to start the program.
cd /usr/BmcOnlineUpdate
./BmcOnlineUpdate
6-25
6-26
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
Uninstallation
Windows Server 2003
1.
Select [All Programs] → [Control Panel] → [Add or Remove Programs].
2.
Click [BmcOnlineUpdate].
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
Linux
1.
Enter the following command to remove the file.
rm /usr/BmcOnlineUpdate/*
2.
Enter the following command to remove the directory.
rmdir /usr/BmcOnlineUpdate
Error Messages
Message
Action
Update isn't necessary.
Illegal data.
The firmware is in up-to-date state.
The data is not for the target device.
Update the firmware with the data of the target device.
Check if the remote management card is correctly installed.
Update the firmware after making sure that the card is
correctly installed.
BMC is possibly in Busy state.
Try again several minutes later.
BMC information can't be acquired.
Cannot enter the online mode.
Failed to save the current data.
Cannot enter the update mode.
An error was occurred while data is
being updated.
Termination process failed.
The IPMI Driver not found.
BMC is not supported.
Install the IPMI driver.
The BMC does not support the update function. Updating
by this tool is unavailable.
If updating still fails, contact your service representative.
6-27
6-28
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
This page is intentionally left blank
Chapter 7
Maintenance
This chapter describes the daily maintenance of the server and precautions when relocating or storing the server.
MAKING BACKUP COPIES
It is recommended that you make backup copies of your valuable data stored in hard disks of the server on a regular
basis. For backup storage devices suitable for the server and backup tools, contact your service representative.
When you have changed the hardware configuration or BIOS configuration, select "System Information Management"
and then "Save" of the Off-line Maintenance Utility to make a backup copy of the system information.
Also make a backup copy of the disk array configuration data if your system is in the array configuration. When your
hard disks have been auto-rebuilt due to a failure, it is recommended to make a backup copy of the configuration data.
To make a backup copy of the configuration data, use the configuration utility that is resident in the FLASH memory on
the optional disk array controller board. Refer to the manual supplied with the board.
Clean the server on a regular basis to keep the serer in a good shape.
WARNING
Observe the following instructions to use the server safely. Failure to follow these instructions
may result in death or serious personal injury. See pages 1-3 to 1-8 for details.
Do not disassemble, repair, or alter the server.
Do not look into the DVD-ROM drive.
Do not remove the lithium battery.
Disconnect the power plug before cleaning with the server.
CAUTION
Observe the following instructions to use the server safely. Failure to follow these instructions
may cause a fire, personal injury, or property damage. See pages 1-3 to 1-8 for details.
High temperature
Make sure to complete board installation.
7-2
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
CLEANING
Cleaning the Server
For daily cleaning, wipe the external surfaces of the server with a dry soft cloth. Follow the procedure below if stains
remain on the surfaces:
IMPORTANT:
„
To avoid altering the material and colour of the server, do not use volatile solvents such
as thinner and benzene to clean the server.
„
The power receptacle, the cables, the connectors on the rear panel of server, and the
inside of the server must be kept dry. Do not moisten them with water.
1.
Make sure that the server is off-powered (the POWER/SLEEP lamp goes off).
2.
Unplug the power cord of the server from the power outlet.
3.
Wipe off dust from the power cord plug with a dry cloth.
4.
Soak a soft cloth in neutral detergent that is diluted with cold or lukewarm water, and squeeze it firmly.
5.
Rub off stains on the server with the cloth prepared in Step 4.
6.
Soak a soft cloth in water, squeeze it firmly, and wipe the server with it once again.
7.
Wipe the server with a dry cloth.
8.
Wipe off dust from the fan exhaust opening on the rear of the server with a dry cloth.
Cleaning the Interior
One of the most important items in a good maintenance program is regular and thorough cleaning of the interior of the
server, especially around the I/O board.
Dust build-up inside the server can lead to several problems. As dust acts as a thermal insulator, a build-up can prevent
proper system cooling. Excessive heat will shorten the life of server components. Also, dust may contain conductive or
corrosive materials that can cause short circuits or corrosion of electrical contacts.
How often you should clean the interior of the server depends on the environment in which it is located. For most office
environments, you probably should clean the server every 12 months. For more severe environments, clean the interior
every 6 months.
Cleaning the interior of the server entails powering off the server and removing the left side cover. You will need a
small vacuum cleaner (with plastic tipped nozzle and electrostatic protection), computer grade canned air, and a small
brush for cleaning the interior.
Follow the procedure below to clean the interior of the server.
WARNING
Unplug all power cords.
Unplug all power cords before performing any maintenance. Voltage is present inside the server
and display unit even after the power is turned off. All voltage is removed only when the power
cord is unplugged.
1.
Turn off the server and unplug all power cables.
2.
Remove the top cover. (See Chapter 9.)
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
3.
Use a small brush to loosen any dust and debris on the I/O board.
4.
Use computer grade canned air to blow dust off components on the I/O board.
5.
Use a small vacuum cleaner with plastic tip to vacuum out dust and debris from the interior of the server.
6.
Reinstall the top cover. (See Chapter 9.)
7.
Reconnect all power cables and turn on the server.
7-3
Cleaning the Keyboard and Mouse
Make sure that the server and peripheral devices are all off-powered (the POWER lamp goes off), and then wipe the
keyboard surface with a dry cloth.
The mouse operation depends on the degree of smoothness of the internal ball rotation. To keep the mouse ball clean,
use the mouse in a place with little dust. Follow the steps below to clean the mouse regularly:
1.
Prepare cold or lukewarm water, neutral detergent, alcohol, two dry soft clothes, and cotton swabs.
2.
Make sure that the server is off-powered (the POWER/SLEEP lamp goes off).
3.
Turn the mouse upside down, and rotate the mouse ball cover counter clockwise to remove it.
4.
Take out the ball from the mouse. Cover the bottom of the mouse with your hand, and turn your hand holding
the mouse (the mouse is on your palm with the button upward). The mouse ball is released onto your palm.
Mouse ball
Mouse ball cover
Bottom View
Roller
5.
Soak a soft cloth in neutral detergent that is diluted with cold or lukewarm water, and squeeze it firmly.
6.
Rub off stains on the mouse ball. Softly wipe the mouse ball with the cloth prepared in Step 5.
7.
Wipe the mouse ball with a dry soft cloth.
8.
Wipe three small rollers inside the mouse with a cotton swab soaked with alcohol. Wipe stains slowly and
carefully by rotating rollers with the tip of the cotton swab.
9.
Blow out any dust from the mouse. Protect your eyes from the dust.
10.
Put the mouse ball back into the mouse.
11.
Place the mouse ball cover, and rotate it clockwise until it is locked.
7-4
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
Cleaning CD/DVD-ROM
A dusty CD/DVD-ROM or dust-accumulated tray causes the device to fail to read data correctly.
Follow the procedure below to clean the tray and CD/DVD-ROM regularly:
1.
Make sure that the server is powered (the POWER/SLEEP lamp is lit).
2.
Press the Open/Close button on the front of the DVD-ROM drive.
The tray comes out.
3.
Hold the CD/DVD-ROM lightly and take it out from the tray.
NOTE: Do not touch the signal side of the CD/DVD-ROM with your hand.
4.
Wipe the tray with a dry soft cloth.
IMPORTANT: Do not wipe the lens of the DVD-ROM drive. Doing so may damage the
lens and may cause a malfunction of the drive.
5.
Press the Open/Close button or gently push on the tray front to close the tray.
6.
Wipe the signal side of the CD/DVD-ROM with a dry soft cloth.
IMPORTANT: Wipe CD/DVD-ROMs from the centre to the outside. Use
CD/DVD-ROM cleaner only if necessary. Cleaning a CD/DVD-ROM with record
spray/cleaner, benzene, or thinner causes damage to the CD/DVD-ROM contents. At worst,
inserting the CD/DVD-ROM into the server may cause failure.
OK
NG
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
SYSTEM DIAGNOSTICS
The System Diagnostics runs several tests on the server.
Select [Tools] – [System Diagnostics] in EXPRESSBUILDER provided with the server to diagnose the server.
Test Items
The following items are tested in system diagnostics.
„
Memory
„
Processor cache memory
„
Hard disk used as a system
IMPORTANT: When running the System Diagnostics, make sure to disconnect the LAN
cable. When running the System Diagnostics with the LAN cable connected, the network
may be influenced.
NOTE: On checking the hard disk, no data is written into the disk.
Starting and Ending the System Diagnostics
There are two ways to diagnose the server: using the local console (keyboard) of the server itself, and using the
management PC via serial port (remote console).
IMPORTANT: Two methods (LAN and serial port) are mentioned in the Chapter 6
"EXPRESSBUILDER" as the way of communicating in remote console. Use the serial port
to run System Diagnostics with remote console. The LAN connection is not for System
Diagnostics.
Start the diagnostics program as follows:
1.
Shutdown the operating system and power off the server. Then, unplug the power cord.
2.
Disconnect all the LAN cables from the server.
3.
Plug the power cord and power on the server.
4.
Use the EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM to start the server.
See Chapter 6 "EXPRESSBUILDER" for details.
7-5
7-6
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
The following menu is displayed when starting the server using the EXPRESSBUILDER.
Local console
5.
Select [Tools].
6.
Select [System Diagnostics].
Remote console
The System Diagnostics starts and completes in approximately three minutes.
When the diagnostics completes, the display changes as shown in the figure below.
Diagnostics tool title
Test window title
TeDoLi (TEst & Diagnosis On Linux) Ver001.00 (Build020901.1.1m)
Test result
Test End
Start 10:06:58 End 10:09:58 Pass 000:03:00 TestTime 000:03:00
Test End : NormalEnd 03 AbnormalEnd 00 ForceEnd 00
<System>
MEM
Memory
CACHE
Cache
<SCSI>
HDD_02:000 DK32DJ-36W
16 count
49 count
NormalEnd
NormalEnd
89 count
NormalEnd
[Enter] Detail Information [ESC] Return to Enduser Menu
Guide line
Test summary window
Diagnostics tool title:
Shows the name and version of the diagnostic tool.
Test windows title:
Shows the progress of the diagnostics. "Test End" is displayed
when the diagnostics completes.
Test Result:
Shows the start, end, and elapsed time and completion status of the
diagnostics.
Guide line:
Shows a description of keys to navigate the window.
Test summary window: Shows the results of each test that executed the diagnostics.
Move the cursor and press Enter to view the detail of the test.
When an error is detected by the system diagnostics, the relevant test result in the test Summary window is
highlighted in red, and "Abnormal End" is displayed in the result on the right side.
Move the cursor to the test that detected the error, and press Enter. Record the error message that has been
output to the Detail Information screen and contact your service representative.
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
7.
Follow the guideline shown at the bottom of the screen and press ESC. The [Enduser Menu] shown below is
displayed.
TeDoLi (TEst & Diagnosis On Linux) Ver001.00 (Build020901.1.1m)
Enduser Menu
<Test Result>
<Device List>
<Log Info>
<Option>
<Reboot>
Please choose a function by the arrow key and push Enter key.
<Test Result>
Shows the diagnostics completion screen of the above diagnostics.
<Device List> Shows a list of connected devices.
8.
<Log Info>
Shows the log information of the diagnostics. It can be saved on a floppy disk.
To save it on a floppy disk, insert a formatted floppy disk into the floppy disk drive, and
select <Save[(F]>. )>.
<Option>
Changes the output destination of a log.
<Reboot>
Reboots the system.
Select <Reboot> in the [Enduser Menu] above.
The server restarts and the system is started from the EXPRESSBUILDER.
9.
7-7
Exit the EXPRESSBUILDER, and remove the CD-ROM from the DVD-ROM drive.
10.
Power off the server and unplug the power cord from the receptacle.
11.
Reconnect all the LAN cables that have been disconnected in Step 2 to the server.
12.
Plug in the power cord.
This completes the System Diagnostics.
7-8
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
RELOCATING/STORING THE SERVER
Follow the procedure below to relocate or store the server:
CAUTION
Observe the following instructions to use the server safely. Failure to follow these instructions
may cause a fire, personal injury, or property damage. See pages 1-3 to 1-8 for details.
Never attempt to lift the server only by yourself.
Do not install the server in any place other than specified.
Do not connect/disconnect any interface cable with the power cord of the server plugged to
a power source.
IMPORTANT:
„
If the server needs to be relocated or stored due to a change in the floor layout to a great
extent, contact your service representative.
„
Make sure to make a backup copy of your valuable data in the hard disk, if any.
„
Make sure not to apply a shock to hard disks when relocating the server if it contains
any.
„
It is recommended that the server and the internal devices should be stored in a place
where the room temperature can be maintained. It is important for the server or internal
devices to work normally after storage. Store the device in a place where temperature
ranges between -10 to 55ºC and humidity ranges between 20 to 80% without dew
condensation.
„
If you use the server after transported or relocated, check the system timer and adjust it
if necessary. If the system timer advances or delays remarkably with the passage of time,
contact your service representative to repair it. The server or internal option device may
be dewed if it is brought to a warm place from a cold place suddenly. Using a server or
an internal device with dew attached may cause malfunction or failure. Make sure to
adapt them to the operating environment before using them.
1.
Take floppy disk and CD-ROM out of the server, if any.
2.
Power off the server (the POWER lamp goes off).
3.
Unplug the power cord of the server from a power outlet.
4.
Remove all the cables from the server.
5.
Hold the server by its bottom with at least four persons to carry the server.
6.
Protect the server with the shock-absorbing materials, and pack it securely.
Chapter 8
Troubleshooting
If your server does not operate as expected, read this chapter before assuming a failure.
NOTE: For provision against an unexpected failure, it is recommended to install the
Off-line Maintenance Utility, NEC ESMPRO, on the server and client computers.
8-2
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
SYSTEM VIEWERS
Monitor the occurrence of fault by NEC ESMPRO during system operation.
Especially take note on whether any alert is reported to NEC ESMPRO Manager on the language PC. Check whether
any alert is reported on the Operation Window, Data Viewer, or Alert Viewer of NEC ESMPRO Manager.
[Example]
NEC ESMPRO Manager
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
8-3
EXPRESSSCOPE MONITORS
The following describes lamps on the server and their indications.
POWER/SLEEP Lamp
POWER/SLEEP lamp
The green POWER/SLEEP lamp lights to indicate normal operation while the server is powered. When the server is
off-powered, the POWER/SLEEP lamp stays unlit.
The POWER/SLEEP lamp indicates that the server is running in the power-saving mode (sleep mode). If the operating
system supports the power-saving mode such as Windows 2003, pressing the SLEEP switch blinks the POWER/SLEEP
lamp in green and place the server in the power-saving mode. Press the POWER switch to turn out the POWER/SLEEP
lamp and place the server back in the normal mode.
The power-saving mode is only available when the operating system supports the power-saving feature. Some operating
systems allow you to set the server to automatically turn in the power-saving mode when no access is made to the server
for a certain period of time or to select the power-saving mode with a command.
STATUS Lamp
The STATUS lamp stays lit green when the server is in successful operation. When the STATUS lamp is unlit, flashing
green or lit/flashing amber, it indicates that the server has failed.
The following table lists indications of the STATUS lamp, descriptions, and actions to take.
NOTES:
„
If the server has NEC ESMPRO or Off-line Maintenance Utility installed, you can view
the System Event Log (SEL) to identify the cause of a trouble.
„
To cycle power to the server, shut down the server from the operating system and reboot
it, if available. If the shutdown from the operating system is not available, reset or
execute the forced shut down or disconnect and connect the power cord to reboot the
server.
STATUS lamp
8-4
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
STATUS lamp
indication
Flashing green
Description
Action
The server is in operation with its
processor degraded.
Contact your service representative.
Start the BIOS SETUP and select [Main] - [Processor
Settings] to identify the degraded processor and replace it
as soon as possible.
Or, start the BIOS SETUP and select [Main] - [Processor
Settings] - [Processor Retest] - [Yes], and then select [Exit] [Exit Saving Changes] to solve the problem.
Contact your service representative.
Start the BIOS SETUP and select [Advanced] - [Memory
Configuration] to identify the degraded memory (DIMM) and
replace it as soon as possible.
Or, start the BIOS SETUP and select [Advanced] - [Memory
Configuration] - [Memory Retest] - [Yes], and then select
[Exit] - [Exit Saving Changes] to solve the problem.
The system can continue operation if the status lamp
flashes green. However, consult with your service
representative.
Power on the server.
Wait for a while. The STATUS lamp will light in a few
seconds after POST completion.
Cycle power to the server. If POST displays an error
message, take a note on the message and contact your
service representative.
The server is in operation with its
memory degraded.
A correctable memory or bus
error was detected.
Unlit
Lit amber
Flashing
amber
The server is powered off.
POST is in progress.
A processor error occurred
(IERR).
A processor thermal error was
detected. (Thermal-Trip)
A watchdog timer has timed out.
A PCI system error occurred.
A PCI parity error occurred.
An uncorrectable memory error
was detected.
An uncorrectable bus error was
detected.
POST terminates with error.
Memory dumping is requested.
A thermal error (critical) was
detected.
A voltage error (critical) was
detected.
A power supply(ies) failed to
operate.
A power alarm was detected in a
power supply unit.
A fan alarm was detected.
A thermal error (warning) was
detected.
A voltage error (warning) was
detected.
Wait until memory dumping completes.
Check internal fans for dust or debris. Also make sure that
the fans are firmly connected.
If this error indication persists, contact your service
representative.
Contact your service representative.
Contact your service representative.
Identify the failed power supply unit and contact your
service representative.
Make sure that the fan units are firmly connected.
If this error indication persists, contact your service
representative.
Check internal fans for dust or debris. Also make sure that
the fan units are firmly connected.
If this error indication persists, contact your service
representative.
Contact your service representative.
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
8-5
DISK ACCESS Lamp
The DISK ACCESS lamp indicates the state of hard disks in the 3.5-inch disk bay.
This lamp lights green every time any of such hard disk is accessed.
When the DISK ACCESS lamp is lit amber, it indicates that a hard disk error occurred. To identify a failed hard disk,
see the lamps provided for each hard disk.
When the DISK ACCESS lamp flashes green or amber alternately, the hard disk drive connected to an internal disk
array controller is under rebuilding.
DISK ACCESS lamp
LAN1/LAN2 ACCESS Lamp
The LAN1/LAN2 ACCESS lamp is lit green when the server is connected to LAN. The lamp blinks while the server is
accessed through the LAN (for packet transmission). The value next to the icon indicates the number of the network
port on the rear panel.
LAN1 ACCESS lamp
LAN2 ACCESS lamp
UID Lamp
The UID is located on the front and rear panel of the server. Pressing the UID switch on the front panel turns UID lamp
blue, and allows you to locate the server you are working on. Use this switch when several servers are installed in the
system.
Pressing the UID switch again turns off the UID lamp.
You can make NEC ESMPRO Manager, NEC DianaScope, or the remote management feature of Web server to flash
the UID lamp. When you finished working, turn off the UID lamp.
UID switch
UID lamp
8-6
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
Attention Lamp
Attention lamp
The Attention lamp lights amber when location where an error occurred cannot be identified automatically or errors
occurred in two or more locations. Check the error log to identify the location.
Processor Board Error Lamp
Two processor board error lamps are located at the front and the rear of the server. These lamps light amber when an
error occurs on the processor board. If the lamp lights, check the lamp indication on processor VRM error lamp in front
of the processor board. The lamp being lit amber indicates that the relevant processor or VRM fails.
Processor board error lamp
Processor board error lamp
REAR
Processor/VRM error lamps
FRONT
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
8-7
Memory Board Error Lamp
Memory board error lamp
The memory board error lamp lights amber if an error occurs on memory board or on DIMM installed in memory board.
Check the memory board Attention lamp being lit amber to identify the failed memory board.
In addition, when you press the switch for DIMM slot error lamp on the failed memory board, the DIMM slot error
lamp lights amber. Then, you can identify the slot containing the failed DIMM.
Switch for DIMM slot error lamp
DIMM slot error lamps
Memory board
Attention lamp
8-8
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
I/O Board Error Lamp
The front I/O board error lamp lights amber when an error occurs on I/O board or PCI board installed in your server.
Check the lamp indication on the rear of the server.
When the rear I/O board lamp lights amber, the I/O board may be failed. When any of the PCI slot error lamps below
the PCI slots light amber, the relevant PCI board or I/O board slot itself may be failed.
I/O board error lamp
I/O board error lamp
PCI slot error lamps
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
Power Unit Error Lamp
Power unit error lamp
The Power unit error lamp lights amber when an error occurs on the power supply unit.
Check the power unit error lamp to identify the failed power supply unit.
Power unit error lamps
8-9
8-10
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
Fan Error Lamp
The fan error lamp lights amber when an error occurs on the fan. Check the Fan Fault lamp being lit red to identify the
failed fan (see "FAN Fault Lamps" described later).
Fan error lamp
Thermal Error Lamp
Thermal error lamp
The thermal error lamp lights amber when an abnormal temperature in the server is detected. Check the room
temperature where the server is installed.
Access Lamps
The access lamp for the DVD-ROM drive lights when access is made to a media in the drive.
ACCESS lamp
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
Memory Board Lamps
3
2
1
1
2
3
Memory board POWER lamp
Lights green during power-on. Flashes green during rebuilding (e.g., memory board is hot-added).
Memory board Attention lamp
Lights amber when an error occurred on memory board or DIMM.
Memory board Redundancy lamp
Lights green in memory mirroring or memory RAID configuration.
8-11
8-12
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
Hard Disk Drive Lamp (DISK Lamp)
The disk lamp on the 3.5-inch disk bay has different meanings depending on the display status.
DISK lamps
„
Lit green
The hard disk is installed and powered on.
„
Blinking green
Indicates that the hard disk is accessed.
„
Lit amber
Indicates that the installed hard disk is defected in the disk array configuration.
NOTE: While hard disks are in the disk array configuration (RAID1/RAID5 or RAID0+1),
a single failed hard disk does not affect the operation of the server. However, it is
recommended to replace the failed hard disk and auto-rebuild (reconfigure) the hard disks
as soon as possible. (You can hot-swap such a failed hard disk.)
„
Alternate lighting green or amber
Indicates that the hard disk is being rebuilt (this status is not a failure). If the defected hard disk is replaced
with a new one in the disk array configuration, the data is automatically rebuilt (auto rebuild function). During
the rebuild operation, the lamp is lit green or amber alternatively.
The lamp goes off when the rebuild is terminated normally. The lamp goes on amber if the rebuild fails.
IMPORTANT: To abort rebuilding, power off the server. In such a case, restart the server,
hot-swap the failed hard disk, and restart rebuilding. Observe the following notes to use the
auto-rebuild feature.
„ Do not power off the server. (If the server is powered off before rebuilding hard disks,
the auto-rebuild feature will not start.)
„ When you removed a hard disk, wait at least 60 seconds before installing the hard disk
back again.
„ Do not replace another hard disk while rebuilding is in progress.
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
8-13
LAN Connector Lamps
LAN1 and LAN2 connectors on the rear panel have two lamps as follows.
LINK/ACT lamp
LAN port 2
1000/100/10 lamp
LAN port 1
1000/100/10 lamp
„
LINK/ACT lamp
The link/ACT lamp indicates the state of each network port normally equipped with the server. If the power is
supplied to the server and the hub and they are correctly connected with each other, the lamp is lit green
(LINK state). If information is transmitted through a network port, the lamp blinks green (ACT state).
If the lamp is not lit in the LINK state, check the network cable and the cable connection. If the lamp is not lit
still after the checking, the network (LAN) controller may be defected. Contact your service representative.
„
1000/100/10 lamps
The 1000/100/10 lamp indicates whether the LAN2 port normally equipped with the server is operated
through the 1000BASE-T, 100BASE-TX or 10BASE-T network interface. If the lamp is lit amber, the
network port is operated through 1000BASE-T. If the lamp is lit green, the network port is operated through
100BASE-TX. If the lamp is off, the network port is operated through 10BASE-T.
8-14
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
PCI Slot Lamps
PCI Slot
Fault Lamp
PCI Slot
Power Lamp
PCI Slot Power Lamp
The PCI slot power lamp lights in green when a PCI board is installed in the slot and powered up.
PCI Slot Fault Lamp
This lamp is available only when the operating system is Windows 2003.
If the driver of a Hot Plug PCI board is stopped under Windows 2003 and then the PCI board is logically disconnected
from the system, PCI slot fault lamp blinks in amber.
If an error occurred on a PCI board or the slot where is installed the PCI board, this lamp lights in amber.
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
8-15
FAN Fault Lamps
FAN Fault lamp is adjacent to each fan module. These lamps are triangular in shape and point to their respective fans.
When the cooling fan is working normally, the lamp does not light. When a fan is not working normally, the lamp lights
in red. A cooling fan failure is also indicated by the status lamp located on the front panel. The failed fan may be
hot-swapped.
IMPORTANT: Do not remove a fan that is normally operating. Ask your service
representative for replacement of the cooling fan. If a cooling fan fails, do not continue to
operate the system, but ask your service representative for replacement as soon as you can.
FAN Fault lamp
FAN Fault lamp
8-16
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
ERROR MESSAGES
If an error occurs in the server, an error message appears on the display unit connected to the server.
Error Messages after Power-on
Powering on the server automatically starts the self-diagnostic program, POST (Power On Self-Test). When the POST
detects any error, it displays an error message and its measure on the display unit.
Follow the table below to troubleshoot such errors. However, even when there is no hardware failure, use of the
keyboard or mouse at the following timing causes the POST to assume a keyboard controller error and stop processing.
„
Immediately after the server is powered
„
Immediately after the system is rebooted in response to a keyboard instruction (simultaneous key entry of Ctrl
+ Alt + Delete)
„
Immediately after the system is rebooted in response to an operating system instruction
„
During hardware initialization following restart of the POST
When the POST detects a hardware failure due to one of the above reason, restart the server once again. If the same
error message reappears, you may assume there is no hardware error. To ensure normal operation of the server, however,
make sure to follow the following restrictions.
„
Do not make any keyboard entry or use the mouse before the memory count appears on the screen following
the server power-on.
„
Do not make any keyboard entry or use the mouse before the start-up message of the SCSI Configuration
Utility appears on the screen following the server reboot.
IMPORTANT: Take a note on the on-screen message before contacting your service
representative. The alarm indication would be a great help for maintenance.
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
8-17
POST Error Messages
When POST detects an error, it displays an error message on the display unit screen. The following table lists error
messages, descriptions, and actions to take.
IMPORTANT: Take a note on the messages displayed before consulting with your service
representative. Alarm messages are useful information for maintenance.
Error
code
0200
0210
0211
0212
Error message
Recommended Action
Failure Fixed Disk.
Stuck Key.
Keyboard error.
Keyboard Controller Failed.
Contact your service representative.
Disconnect the keyboard and connect it again.
• Disconnect the keyboard and connect it again.
• Restart the system. If the error cannot be corrected, contact
your service representative.
Release the lock of the key switch. If the error cannot be
corrected in spite of the release of the lock, contact your service
representative.
Start the SETUP. If the error cannot be corrected in spite of the
start of SETUP, contact your service representative.
Contact your service representative.
0213
Keyboard locked - Unlock key switch.
0220
Monitor type does not match CMOS - Run
SETUP.
System RAM Failed at offset.
Shadow RAM Failed at offset.
Extended RAM Failed at address line.
System battery is dead - Replace and run
SETUP.
0230
0231
0232
0250
0251
System CMOS checksum bad - Default
configuration used.
0252
Password checksum bad - Passwords
cleared.
System timer error.
Real time clock error.
Check date and time setting.
Previous boot incomplete – Default
configuration used
Diskette drive A error.
Diskette drive B error.
0260
0270
0271
0280
02B0
02B1
02B2
2B3
02D0
02D1
02F5
02F6
02F7
0500
0501
0502
0503
0504
0505
0506
0507
0508
0611
0613
0614
Contact your service representative to replace the battery. (After
restarting the computer, start the SETUP to provide the setting
again.)
The default values have just been set. Start the SETUP to provide
the setting again. If the error cannot be corrected, contact your
service representative.
The password has just been cleared. Start the SETUP to provide
the setting again.
Start the SETUP to set the date and time again. If the same error
occurs successively in spite of the resetting, contact your service
representative.
Contact your service representative.
Start the SETUP to set the "Legacy Floppy A" and "Legacy
Floppy B" in the Main menu again. If the same error occurs
successively in spite of the resetting, contact your service
representative.
Start the SETUP to provide the setting again. If the error cannot
Incorrect Drive A type - run SETUP.
be corrected, contact your service representative.
Incorrect Drive B type - run SETUP.
System cache error - Cache disabled.
The cache cannot be used. Contact your service representative.
System Memory exceeds the CPU's caching Contact your service representative.
limit.
DMA Test Failed.
Software NMI Failed.
Fail-safe Timer NMI Failed.
Expansion ROM not initialized - PCI Slot 01
Expansion ROM not initialized - PCI Slot 02
Expansion ROM not initialized - PCI Slot 03
Expansion ROM not initialized - PCI Slot 04
Expansion ROM not initialized - PCI Slot 05
Expansion ROM not initialized - PCI Slot 06
Expansion ROM not initialized - PCI Slot 07
Expansion ROM not initialized - PCI Slot 08
Expansion ROM not initialized - PCI Slot 09
IDE configuration changed.
COM A configuration changed.
COM A config. error - device disabled.
8-18
Error
code
0615
0616
0617
0618
0619
061A
0B00
0B1B
0B1C
0B28
0B29
0B2A
0B2B
0B30
0B31
0B32
0B33
0B34
0B35
0B36
0B37
0B50
0B51
0B52
0B53
0B5F
0B60
0B61
0B62
0B63
0B64
0B65
0B66
0B67
0B70
0B71
0B74
0B75
0B78
0B7C
0B7D
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
Error message
Recommended Action
COM B configuration changed.
COM B config. error - device disabled.
Floppy configuration changed.
Floppy config. error - device disabled.
Parallel port configuration changed.
Parallel port config. error - device disabled.
Rebooted during BIOS boot at Post Code.
PCI System Error on Bus/Device/Function.
PCI Parity Error on Bus/Device/Function.
Unsupported Processor detected on
Processor 1.
Unsupported Processor detected on
Processor 2.
Unsupported Processor detected on
Processor 3.
Unsupported Processor detected on
Processor 4.
Fan 1 Alarm occurred.
Fan 2 Alarm occurred.
Fan 3 Alarm occurred.
Fan 4 Alarm occurred.
Fan 5 Alarm occurred.
Fan 6 Alarm occurred.
Fan 7 Alarm occurred.
Fan 8 Alarm occurred.
Processor #1 with error taken off line.
Processor #2 with error taken offline.
Processor #3 with error taken offline.
Processor #4 with error taken offline.
Forced to use Processor with error
Contact your service representative.
Make sure that the server supports the processor. If you are
not sure, contact your service representative to request the
maintenance.
A fan failure or fan clogging may occur. Contact your service
representative to request the maintenance.
The processor is degraded. Contact your service
representative.
Because an error is detected in every processor, the system is
forcibly started. Contact your service representative.
Contact your service representative.
DIMM group #1 has been disabled
DIMM group #2 has been disabled
DIMM group #3 has been disabled
DIMM group #4 has been disabled
DIMM group #5 has been disabled
DIMM group #6 has been disabled
DIMM group #7 has been disabled
DIMM group #8 has been disabled
The error occurred during temperature sensor
reading.
A fan failure or fan clogging may occur. Contact your service
System Temperature out of the range.
representative to request the maintenance.
The error occurred during voltage sensor
Contact your service representative.
reading.
System voltage out of the range.
The error occurred during fan sensor reading
The error occurred during redundant power
Contact you service representative to replace the power supply
module confirmation
unit.
The normal operation can't be guaranteed
Contact you service representative to add an additional power
with use of only one PSU
supply unit or replace the existing power supply unit.
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
Error
code
0B80
0B81
0B82
0B83
0B8A
0B8B
0B8C
0B8D
0B8E
0B8F
8-19
Error message
Recommended Action
Turn off the power once and then on again to start the server. If
the error cannot be corrected, contact your service
representative.
0B90
0B91
0B92
BMC Memory Test Failed.
BMC Firmware Code Area CRC check failed.
BMC core hardware failure.
BMC IBF or OBF check failed.
BMC SEL area full.
BMC progress check timeout.
BMC command access failed.
Could not redirect the console - BMC Busy Could not redirect the console - BMC Error Could not redirect the console - BMC
Parameter Error BMC Platform Information Area corrupted.
BMC update firmware corrupted.
Internal Use Area of BMC FRU corrupted.
0B93
BMC SDR Repository empty.
0B94
IPMB signal lines do not respond.
0B95
BMC FRU device failure.
0B96
0B97
0B98
0B99
0B9A
0B9B
0B9C
0B9D
0B9E
0B9F
0BB0
0BB1
0BC0
BMC SDR Repository failure.
BMC SEL device failure.
BMC RAM test error.
BMC Fatal hardware error.
BMC not responding.
Private I2C bus not responding.
BMC internal exception.
BMC A/D timeout error.
SDR repository corrupt.
SEL corrupt.
SMBIOS - SROM data read error.
SMBIOS - SROM data checksum bad.
POST detected startup failure of 1st
Processor.
POST detected startup failure of 2nd
Processor.
POST detected startup failure of 3rd
Processor.
POST detected startup failure of 4th
Processor.
0BC1
0BC2
0BC3
All the commands and functions other than the FRU command
and the EMP function can be used. This is not a fatal error.
Turn off the power once and then on again to restart the server.
If the error cannot be corrected, contact your service
representative.
Turn off the power once and then on again to restart the server.
If the error cannot be corrected, contact your service
representative.
All the functions other than the function of accessing to SMC
through IPMB can be used. This is not a fatal error. Turn off the
power once and then on again to restart the server. If the error
cannot be corrected, contact your service representative.
All the commands and functions other than the FRU command
and the EMP function can be used. This is not a fatal error.
Turn off the power once and then on again to restart the server.
If the error cannot be corrected, contact your service
representative.
Turn off the power once and then on again to start the server. If
the error cannot be corrected, contact your service
representative.
Contact your service representative.
Contact your service representative to replace the processor.
8-20
Error
code
8120
8121
8122
8123
8124
8125
8126
8127
8130
8131
8132
8133
8134
8135
8136
8137
8140
8141
8142
8143
8144
8145
8146
8147
8150
8151
8160
8161
8162
8163
8170
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
Error message
Recommended Action
Unsupported DIMM detected in DIMM
group #1.
Unsupported DIMM detected in DIMM
group #2.
Unsupported DIMM detected in DIMM
group #3.
Unsupported DIMM detected in DIMM
group #4.
Unsupported DIMM detected in DIMM
group #5.
Unsupported DIMM detected in DIMM
group #6.
Unsupported DIMM detected in DIMM
group #7.
Unsupported DIMM detected in DIMM
group #8.
Mismatch DIMM Type detected in DIMM
group #1.
Mismatch DIMM Type detected in DIMM
group #2.
Mismatch DIMM Type detected in DIMM
group #3.
Mismatch DIMM Type detected in DIMM
group #4.
Mismatch DIMM Type detected in DIMM
group #5.
Mismatch DIMM Type detected in DIMM
group #6.
Mismatch DIMM Type detected in DIMM
group #7.
Mismatch DIMM Type detected in DIMM
group #8.
DIMM group #1 with error is enabled.
DIMM group #2 with error is enabled.
DIMM group #3 with error is enabled.
DIMM group #4 with error is enabled.
DIMM group #5 with error is enabled.
DIMM group #6 with error is enabled.
DIMM group #7 with error is enabled.
DIMM group #8 with error is enabled.
NVRAM Cleared By Jumper.
Password Cleared By Jumper.
Mismatch Processor Speed detected on
Processor 1.
Mismatch Processor Speed detected on
Processor 2.
Mismatch Processor Speed detected on
Processor 3.
Mismatch Processor Speed detected on
Processor 4.
Processor 1 not operating at intended
frequency
Contact your service representative to replace the two DIMMs in
the relevant group.
See the labels put on the DIMMs to make sure that the DIMMs of
the same type are installed in groups. If DIMMs of different types
are installed in one or more groups, contact the service
representative to replace DIMMs properly.
Contact your service representative to replace the two DIMMs in
the relevant group.
Turn off the power. Then recover the jumper setting to the original
setting.
Check the frequency of the processor. If it is unknown, contact
your service representative.
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
Error
code
8171
8-21
Error message
Recommended Action
Check the frequency of the processor. If it is unknown, contact
your service representative.
8200
Processor 2 not operating at intended
frequency
Processor 3 not operating at intended
frequency
Processor 4 not operating at intended
frequency
All processors not operating at intended
frequency
Cache Cautionary status detected on
Processor 1
Cache Cautionary status detected on
Processor 2
Cache Cautionary status detected on
Processor 3
Cache Cautionary status detected on
Processor 4
Online Spare Memory was not ready.
8201
Mirroring Memory was not ready.
8202
Memory RAID was not ready.
8300
8400
8401
8412
8413
8414
8420
8421
8432
8433
8434
Secondary BIOS is corrupted.
Onboard PCIE#1 Link Failure
Onboard PCIE#2 Link Failure
PCI Slot#3 PCIE Link Failure
PCI Slot#4 PCIE Link Failure
PCI Slot#5 PCIE Link Failure
Onboard PCIE#1 Link Width Error
Onboard PCIE#2 Link Width Error
PCI Slot#3 PCIE Link Width Error
PCI Slot#4 PCIE Link Width Error
PCI Slot#5 PCIE Link Width Error
8172
8173
817F
81A0
81A1
81A2
81A3
This is not a fatal error. Turn off the power once and then on again
to restart the server. If the error cannot be corrected, contact your
service representative.
DIMM type mismatch is detected when the online spare memory
feature is enabled.
Contact your service representative.
DIMM type mismatch is detected or unnecessary installation in
group #2 is detected when the memory mirroring feature is
enabled. Check the DIMM type or installation. If the error cannot
be corrected, contact your service representative.
Check if capacity, type, and installation status of all DIMMs are
correct.
Contact your service representative.
Turn off the power once and then on again to restart the server. If
the error cannot be corrected, contact your service representative.
This is not a fatal error, but performance may be reduced. Turn off
the power once and then on again to restart the server. If the error
cannot be corrected, contact your service representative.
Other POST Errors
The following message does not appear on the screen; however, it is recorded in the system event log.
Error
code
8301
Description
Recommended Action
A BIOS Checksum error was detected in
the early stage of BIOS boot-up
(Bootblock). The control was transferred
to the secondary BIOS. (See Chapter 2
"Recovering BIOS Data".)
Contact your service representative.
8-22
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
The following figures show the location of specific components referenced in the POST error codes and messages table
listed above.
NOTE: Failed processors or memory boards can be also identified with the BIOS SETUP
utility.
„
Fans
Fan 3
Fan 6
Fan 2
Fan 8
Fan 5
Fan 1
Fan 4
Fan 7
„
Processors
Processor #3
Processor #1
Processor #2
Processor #4
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
„
8-23
Memory board
The DIMM group consists of four DIMM boards.
DIMM #4
DIMM #3
DIMM #2
DIMM #1
1
2
3
4
Memory board slot #1 Memory board slot #2 Memory board slot #3 Memory board slot #4
DIMM
DIMM
DIMM
DIMM
DIMM #1
DIMM #1
DIMM #1
DIMM #1
DIMM #2 Group #1 DIMM #2 Group #3 DIMM #2 Group #5 DIMM #2 Group #7
DIMM
DIMM
DIMM
DIMM
DIMM #3
DIMM #3
DIMM #3
DIMM #3
DIMM #4 Group #2 DIMM #4 Group #4 DIMM #4 Group #6 DIMM #4 Group #8
Beep Codes
If an error occurs during the POST, the server beeps, indicating the type of error.
Each number indicates the number of short beeps, and a hyphen indicates a pause. For example, the beep interval
1-3-1-3 indicates 1 beep, pause, 3 beeps, pause, 1 beeps, pause, and 3 beeps notifying that the keyboard controller error.
Beep code
1-2
1-2
Description
Video BIOS initialization
error
Option ROM initialization
error
1-3-1-3
Keyboard controller error
1-3-3-1
Memory is not detected.
Or, DIMM type is
incorrect.
DRAM Address error
DRAM test Low Byte
error
DRAM test High Byte
error
Processor fails to start.
No processor error
Processors of various
types and voltages
coexist.
Power failure
1-3-4-1
1-3-4-3
1-4-1-1
1-5-1-1
1-5-2-2
1-5-2-3
1-5-4-4
2-2-3-1
Unexpected interrupt test
error
Recommended action
If nothing is displayed, check if the connector of the display unit is properly
connected. If the error persists, contact your service representative to
replace the I/O board.
If an expansion of Option ROM for additionally installed PCI board is not
displayed, check if the PCI board is properly installed. If the error persists,
contact your service representative to replace the I/O board or PCI board.
Disconnect the keyboard and connect it again. If the error persists, contact
your service representative to replace the I/O board.
Check if the DIMM and memory boards are properly connected. If the error
persists, contact your service representative to replace DIMM or memory
board.
Check if the processor is properly installed. If the error persists, contact your
service representative to replace processor or processor board.
Check if the additionally installed processor is supported by the server.
Check also the installation of processor. If the error persists, contact your
service representative to replace the processor or processor board.
Internal board may be faulty. Contact your service representative to identify
the faulty board and replace it with new one.
Contact your service representative to replace the I/O board.
NOTE: Beep code 1-5-4-2 informs you that AC power supply is interrupted due to power
failure or momentary voltage drop and the system is restarted. This is not an error.
8-24
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
Error Messages on Virtual LCD
The remote management feature of DianaScope and Web Server allows the managed server to display the virtual LCD
(16 digits x 2 lines) and status lamps.
The virtual LCD displays the followings:
„
POST progress
„
Error occurred during operation or DC OFF (AC power is being on)
When POST detects an error, the POST error code is displayed on the virtual LCD upon completion of POST. See the
table for POST error codes for details.
POST Progress
POST Progress Code
Product ID
System BIOS Version
POWER ON
ASF Code
READY
ASF Message
POST Error Code
POWER ON
READY
Other Messages
POWER ON
ATTENTION
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
ASF Codes
ASF code
01h
02h
03h
04h
05h
06h
07h
08h
09h
0Ah
0Bh
0Ch
0Dh
ASF message
Memory Init
lDE Init
AP Init
Enter Password
Entering Setup
USB Init
PCI Device Init
Option ROM Init
Video Init
Cache Init
SMBus Init
Keyboard Init
BMC Init
Description
Initializing ECC and checking memory
Detecting lDE device
Initializing multi-processor
Waiting for "supervisor" or "user" password entry
Entering into BIOS SETUP
Detecting and initializing USB device
Configuring PCI device
Expanding option ROM for PCI device
Initializing video controller
Setting processor cache memory
Configuring SMBus
Detecting keyboard
Checking BMC error
POST Progress Codes
POST progress code
11h
28h
2Ah
2Ch
2Eh
0Ah
2Fh
38h
20h
0Fh
67h
69h
49h
55h
4Ah
4Ch
59h
C6h
4Eh
50h
60h
62h
68h
6Ah
87h
85h
98h
93h
9Ch
BAh
C3h
ACh
B0h
BDh
97h
C0h
Description
Configuring slot for hot-plug PCI Express and initializing chipset register
Initializing memory
Zero Clear of memory (0-4MB)
Address line test of memory (0-4MB)
Memory test (0-4MB)
Initializing processor
Setting cache for processor
Shadowing BIOS
Refresh test for DRAM
Initializing lDE controller
Initializing application processor
Initializing SMl
Initializing PCI/PCI-X/PCI Express (Resource assignment)
Initializing USB
Initializing video controller
Shadowing video BIOS
Initializing display feature of POST
Initializing console redirection feature
Displaying copyright
Displaying processor information
Test for expanded memory
Address test for expanded memory
Configuring cache
Displaying cache size
Configuring I/O device
Displaying Secure Mode message, and configuring PnP ISA device
Expanding option ROM of PCI device
Configuring multi-processor
Setting up SMl
Initializing SMBIOS
Displaying POST error
Starting BIOS SETUP
Checking POST error
Displaying Boot menu
Creating MP table in EBDA area
Starting boot process
8-25
8-26
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
Messages displayed on upper line
On-screen
message
Prepare To Boot
CPU Reconfigured
Description
Action
POST completes normally.
POST completes with processor
degraded.
This is not an error.
Contact your service representative.
Try the following steps to cancel the error.
1. Start BIOS SETUP.
2. Select [Main] - Processor Settings] - [Processor
Retest] - [Yes].
3. Select [Exit] - [Exit Saving Changes].
Contact your service representative.
Try the following steps to cancel the error.
1. Start BIOS SETUP.
2. Select [Advanced] - [Memory Configuration] [Memory Retest] - [Yes].
3. Select [Exit] - [Exit Saving Changes].
The system can continue operation. However,
consult with your service representative.
Mem Reconfigured
POST completes with memory degraded.
M#1 D#1 C Err
A correctable error frequently occurs in
DIMM #1 on memory board #1.
A correctable error frequently occurs in
DIMM #2 on memory board #1.
A correctable error frequently occurs in
DIMM #3 on memory board #1.
A correctable error frequently occurs in
DIMM #4 on memory board #1.
A correctable error frequently occurs in
DIMM #1 on memory board #2.
A correctable error frequently occurs in
DIMM #2 on memory board #2.
A correctable error frequently occurs in
DIMM #3 on memory board #2.
A correctable error frequently occurs in
DIMM #4 on memory board #2.
M#1 D#2 C Err
M#1 D#3 C Err
M#1 D#4 C Err
M#2 D#1 C Err
M#2 D#2 C Err
M#2 D#3 C Err
M#2 D#4 C Err
On-screen
message
M#3 D#1 C Err
M#3 D#2 C Err
M#3 D#3 C Err
M#3 D#4 C Err
M#4 D#1 C Err
M#4 D#2 C Err
M#4 D#3 C Err
M#4 D#4 C Err
M#1 D#1 UC Err
M#1 D#2 UC Err
M#1 D#3 UC Err
M#1 D#4 UC Err
M#2 D#1 UC Err
M#2 D#2 UC Err
M#2 D#3 UC Err
M#3 D#4 UC Err
M#3 D#1 UC Err
M#3 D#2 UC Err
Description
Action
A correctable error frequently occurs in
DIMM #1 on memory board #3.
A correctable error frequently occurs in
DIMM #2 on memory board #3.
A correctable error frequently occurs in
DIMM #3 on memory board #3.
A correctable error frequently occurs in
DIMM #4 on memory board #3.
A correctable error frequently occurs in
DIMM #1 on memory board #4.
A correctable error frequently occurs in
DIMM #2 on memory board #4.
A correctable error frequently occurs in
DIMM #3 on memory board #4.
A correctable error frequently occurs in
DIMM #4 on memory board #4.
An uncorrectable error occurs in DIMM #1
or DIMM #2 on memory board #1.
An uncorrectable error occurs in DIMM #3
or DIMM #4 on memory board #1.
An uncorrectable error occurs in DIMM #1
or DIMM #2 on memory board #2.
An uncorrectable error occurs in DIMM #3
or DIMM #4 on memory board #2.
An uncorrectable error occurs in DIMM #1
or DIMM #2 on memory board #3.
The system can continue operation. However,
consult with your service representative.
The system can continue operation if the status lamp
flashes green. However, consult with your service
representative.
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
M#3 D#3 UC Err
M#3 D#4 UC Err
M#4 D#1 UC Err
M#4 D#2 UC Err
M#4 D#3 UC Err
M#4 D#4 UC Err
M#1 BD C ErrX
M#2 BD C ErrX
M#3 BD C ErrX
M#4 BD C ErrX
M#1 BD UC ErrX
M#2 BD UC ErrX
M#3 BD UC ErrX
M#4 BD UC ErrX
PROC BD C ErrX
PROC BD UC ErrX
IO BD C ErrX
IO BD UC Err1
PCI S#3 C Err
PCI S#4 C Err
PCI S#5 C Err
PCI S#1 Err
PCI S#2 Err
PCI S#3 Err
PCI S#4 Err
PCI S#5 Err
PCI S#6 Err
PCI S#7 Err
PCI S#8 Err
PCI S#9 Err
An uncorrectable error occurs in DIMM #3
or DIMM #4 on memory board #3.
An uncorrectable error occurs in DIMM #1
or DIMM #2 on memory board #4.
An uncorrectable error occurs in DIMM #3
or DIMM #4 on memory board #4.
A correctable error frequently occurs on
memory board #1.
A correctable error frequently occurs on
memory board #2.
A correctable error frequently occurs on
memory board #3.
A correctable error frequently occurs on
memory board #4.
An uncorrectable error occurs on memory
board #1.
An uncorrectable error occurs on memory
board #2.
An uncorrectable error occurs on memory
board #3.
An uncorrectable error occurs on memory
board #4.
A correctable error frequently occurs on
processor board.
An uncorrectable error occurs on
processor board.
A correctable error frequently occurs on
I/O board.
An uncorrectable error occurs on I/O
board.
A correctable error frequently occurs on
PCI board slot #3.
A correctable error frequently occurs on
PCI board slot #4.
A correctable error frequently occurs on
PCI board slot #5.
A fatal error occurs on PCI board slot #1.
A fatal error occurs on PCI board slot #2.
A fatal error occurs on PCI board slot #3.
A fatal error occurs on PCI board slot #4.
A fatal error occurs on PCI board slot #5.
A fatal error occurs on PCI board slot #6.
A fatal error occurs on PCI board slot #7.
A fatal error occurs on PCI board slot #8.
A fatal error occurs on PCI board slot #9.
8-27
The system can continue operation. However,
consult with your service representative.
The system can continue operation if the status lamp
flashes green. However, consult with your service
representative.
The system can continue operation. However,
consult with your service representative.
The system can continue operation if the status lamp
flashes green. However, consult with your service
representative.
The system can continue operation. However,
consult with your service representative.
Consult with your service representative.
The system can continue operation. However,
consult with your service representative.
Consult with your service representative.
8-28
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
Messages displayed on lower line
On-screen message
Proc Missing
240VA Power Down
Power On Cnt Alm
Proc1 VccpAlm XX
Proc2 VccpAlm XX
Proc3 VccpAlm XX
Proc4 VccpAlm XX
BB +3.3v Alm XX
BB +3.3vs Alm XX
BB +5.0v Alm XX
BB +5.0vs Alm XX
BB +12v Alm XX
BB -12v Alm XX
VBAT Alm XX
BB +1.25v Alm XX
BB +1.5v Alm XX
BB +1.8v Alm XX
BB VTT Alm XX
VDD TNB Alm XX
VCACHE1 Alm XX
VCACHE2 Alm XX
Proc 1 T-Trip
Proc 2 T-Trip
Proc 3 T-Trip
Proc 4 T-Trip
Processor 1 IERR
Processor 2 IERR
Processor 3 IERR
Processor 4 IERR
SB1 +3.3v Alm XX
SB1 +5.0v Alm XX
SB1 +12v Alm XX
Description
Processor is not found.
POWERGOOD dropped during power-on.
POWERGOOD signal error occurred at
power on/off.
VCCP voltage alarm occurred on processor
#1.
VCCP voltage alarm occurred on processor
#2.
VCCP voltage alarm occurred on processor
#3.
VCCP voltage alarm occurred on processor
#4.
+3.3V voltage alarm occurred on I/O board.
+3.3Vs voltage alarm occurred on I/O board.
+5.0V voltage alarm occurred on I/O board.
+5.0Vs voltage alarm occurred on I/O board.
+12V voltage alarm occurred on I/O board.
-12V voltage alarm occurred on I/O board.
Voltage alarm in lithium battery occurred.
+1.25V voltage alarm occurred on I/O board.
+1.5V voltage alarm occurred on I/O board.
+1.8V voltage alarm occurred on I/O board.
+1.150V voltage alarm occurred on I/O
board.
+1.500V voltage alarm occurred on
processor board.
VCACHE1 voltage alarm occurred on
processor board.
VCACHE2 voltage alarm occurred on
processor board.
Thermal Trip occurred on processor #1.
Thermal Trip occurred on processor #2.
Thermal Trip occurred on processor #3.
Thermal Trip occurred on processor #4.
IERR occurred on processor #1.
IERR occurred on processor #2.
IERR occurred on processor #3.
IERR occurred on processor #4.
+3.3V voltage alarm occurred on SCSI
backplane 1.
+5.0V voltage alarm occurred on SCSI
backplane 1.
+12V voltage alarm occurred on SCSI
backplane 1.
Action
Contact your service representative.
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
On-screen message
SB2 +3.3v Alm XX
SB2 +5.0v Alm XX
SB2 +12v Alm XX
SCSI A-1 Alm XX
SCSI A-2 Alm XX
SCSI A-3 Alm XX
SCSI B-1 Alm XX
SCSI B-2 Alm XX
SCSI B-3 Alm XX
Proc1 TempAlm XX
Proc2 TempAlm XX
Proc3 TempAlm XX
Proc4 TempAlm XX
BB Temp Alm XX
FP Temp Alm XX
OS shutdown Alm
WDT timeout
DUMP Request !
SMI timeout
AC lost Alm 1
AC lost Alm 2
AC lost Alm 3
AC lost Alm 4
Power Unit 1 Alm
Power Unit 2 Alm
Power Unit 3 Alm
Power Unit 4 Alm
Predictive Alm 1
Predictive Alm 2
Predictive Alm 3
Predictive Alm 4
CPU Fan Alarm
PWR Fan Alarm
Sys Fan 1 Alarm
Sys Fan 2 Alarm
Sys Fan 3 Alarm
Sys Fan 4 Alarm
Sys Fan 5 Alarm
Sys Fan 6 Alarm
Description
+3.3V voltage alarm occurred on SCSI
backplane 2.
+5.0V voltage alarm occurred on SCSI
backplane 2.
+12V voltage alarm occurred on SCSI
backplane 2.
SCSI channel-A voltage error occurred.
SCSI channel-A voltage error occurred.
SCSI channel-A voltage error occurred.
SCSI channel-B voltage error occurred.
SCSI channel-B voltage error occurred.
SCSI channel-B voltage error occurred.
Processor #1 thermal error occurred.
Processor #2 thermal error occurred.
Processor #3 thermal error occurred.
Processor #4 thermal error occurred.
I/O board thermal error occurred.
Front panel thermal error occurred.
Operating system shutdown alarm occurred.
Watchdog timer timeout error occurred.
Dump switch is pressed.
SMI timeout occurred.
AC lost occurred on power unit #1.
AC lost occurred on power unit #2.
AC lost occurred on power unit #3.
AC lost occurred on power unit #4.
Power unit #1 Failure occurred.
Power unit #2 Failure occurred.
Power unit #3 Failure occurred.
Power unit #4 Failure occurred.
Predictive Failure occurred on power unit #1.
Predictive Failure occurred on power unit #2.
Predictive Failure occurred on power unit #3.
Predictive Failure occurred on power unit #4.
CPU FAN alarm occurred.
Power unit FAN alarm occurred.
FAN#1 alarm occurred.
FAN#2 alarm occurred.
FAN#3 alarm occurred.
FAN#4 alarm occurred.
FAN#5 alarm occurred.
FAN#6 alarm occurred.
Action
Contact your service representative.
8-29
8-30
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
SOLVING PROBLEMS
When the server fails to operate as expected, see the following to find out your problem and follow the instruction given
before asking for repair.
If the server still fails to operate successfully after solving your problem, take a note on the on-screen message and
contact your service representative.
Problems with Server
No screen display appears with beep:
•
Are DIMMs installed securely?
→ Check whether DIMMs are connected to the mating connectors firmly.
→ Check whether DIMMs of different specifications are installed in the specific group. See Chapter 9 for
the DIMMs specifications.
Fail to power on the server:
•
Is the server is properly supplied with power?
→ Check if the power cord is connected to a power outlet (or UPS) that meets the power specifications
for the server.
→ Make sure to use the power cord provided with the server. Check the power cord for broken shield or
bent plugs.
→ Make sure the power breaker for the connected power outlet is on.
→ If the power cord is plugged to a UPS, make sure the UPS is powered and it outputs power. See the
manual that comes with the UPS for details.
Power supply to the server may be linked with the connected UPS using the BIOS setup utility of the
server.
<Menu to check: [Server] - [AC-LINK]>
•
Did you press the POWER switch?
→ Press the POWER switch on the front of the server to turn on the power (the POWER/SLEEP lamp
lights).
Fail to power off the server / SLEEP switch is disabled:
•
Is the POWER switch or SLEEP switch enabled?
→ Restart the server and start the BIOS setup utility.
<Menu to check: [Security] - [Power Switch Inhibit]>
•
Is the server running in the Secure Mode?
→ The POWER switch and the SLEEP switch are disabled in the Secure Mode. (Forced shutdown is also
not available.) To release the Secure Mode, enter the password specified with the BIOS setup utility.
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
8-31
POST fails to complete:
•
Is the DIMM board installed?
→ At least four DIMM boards are required for operation.
•
Is the memory size large?
→ The memory check may take a few seconds if the memory size is large. Wait for a while.
•
Did you perform any keyboard or mouse operation immediately after you started the server?
→ If you perform any keyboard or mouse operation immediately after start-up, POST may accidentally
detect a keyboard controller error and stop proceeding. In such a case, restart the server once again.
Do not perform any keyboard or mouse operation until the BIOS start-up message appears when you
restart the server.
•
Does the server contain appropriate memory boards or PCI devices?
→ Operation of the server with unauthorized devices is not guaranteed.
Fail to access to internal or external devices (or such devices fail to operate):
•
Are cables properly connected?
→ Make sure that the interface cables and power cord are properly connected. Also make sure that the
cables are connected in the correct order.
•
Is the power-on order correct?
→ When the server has any external devices connected, power on the external devices first, then the
server.
•
Did you install drivers for connected optional devices?
→ Some optional devices require specific device drivers. Refer to the manual that comes with the device
to install its driver.
•
Is BIOS configuration correct?
→ When the server has PCI devices connected, make sure to set the PCI device interrupt and others with
the BIOS setup utility of the server. (Most PCI devices generally do not require any change to the
configuration, but some boards do require specific settings. Refer to the manual that comes with the
board for details to make correct settings.
<Menus to check: [Advanced] - [Advanced Chipset Control] - [PCI Device]>
→ Some devices connected to the serial or parallel port may require I/O port address or operation mode
settings. Refer to the manual that comes with the board for details to make correct settings.
<Menu to check: [Advanced] - [Peripheral Configuration]>
USB device fail to operate:
•
Did you connect the USB2.0 device to the USB connector on the front panel?
→ The USB connector on the front panel is dedicated to USB1.1. Use the USB connector on the rear
panel to connect the USB2.0 device.
8-32
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
Management PC cannot detect the server:
•
Is Java2 Runtime Environment, Standard Edition 1.4.2_04 or later used for management PC?
→ Download Java2 Runtime Environment, Standard Edition 1.4.2_04 or later from
http://java.sun.com/j2se/.
•
Are LAN or ICMB cable properly connected?
→ Make sure that the cable is properly connected to the management LAN port or ICMB port. If the
cables are incorrectly connected, the sensor of the server will not be monitored. Also check if the
cables are connected to LAN connector or serial port connector by mistake.
•
Is the IP address unique in the network?
→ The IP address for management LAN port is factory-set to 192.168.1.1. If the same address exists in
the same network, the server will not be detected correctly. Change the IP address appropriately.
•
Is the server specified to be monitored by NEC ESMPRO Agent?
→ Change setting of NEC ESMPRO Agent.
Start NEC ESMPRO Agent from Windows control panel, select [System] → [Bull NovaScale Server]
→ [Monitor]. (The default is [Does not monitor].) Monitoring starts automatically. You do not need to
restart the system, however, reconfiguring the tree may be needed if the server is not detected.
•
Is any error message displayed?
→ See page 4-94 for details.
•
Is connection suppressed by settings of firewall or gateway?
→ The connection may be restricted by settings of firewall or gateway. Connect the client PC by using
the LAN cross cable and try again. If the problem is dissolved, confirm settings of firewall and
gateway according to "Remote Management Function" - "Network Configuration" in Chapter 4.
The server console is not displayed on remote KVM console:
•
Is the resolution correctly set?
→ To display the server console on the remote KVM console, the resolution must be within 1024x768,
and the refresh rate 75Hz. or less.
•
Do you use the remote KVM console in text mode?
→Under Linux, monitor, driver, and video memory settings may fail in graphical display such as
X-Windows. We recommend using Linux in text mode.
Forgotten the login name/password to use the remote management feature through Web browser:
→ If you have forgotten the login name or password, restore the factory default including password by
changing the BMC configuration jumper switch.
IMPORTANT: Restoring the factory default clears BMC configuration that is used for
DianaScope to connect with the server.
If you are using NEC DianaScope, you need to save the configuration data into a floppy
disk before clearing password.
BMC can be configured and saved with NEC DianaScope Agent and the system
management feature of EXPRESSBUILDER.
1.
Power off the server and unplug the power cord.
2.
Change the BMC configuration jumper switch setting as shown below. (See Chapter 4 for details.)
Factory-set jumper switch location
Jumper switch location for clearing password
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
3.
Connect the power cord.
4.
Wait at least 30 seconds with the power being off, then unplug the power cord.
5.
Restore the BMC configuration jumper switch setting and power on the server for reconfiguration.
8-33
The keyboard or mouse fails to operate:
•
Is the cable properly connected?
→ Make sure that the cable is connected to the correct connector on the rear of the server.
→ The keyboard or mouse does not operate if it is connected when the server is powered (not applicable
to USB devices). Power off the server first and connect it properly.
•
Is BIOS configuration correct?
→ The keyboard and mouse may be disabled with the BIOS setup utility of the server. Check the settings
with the BIOS setup utility.
<Menus to check: [Advanced] - [Peripheral Configuration] - [PS/2 Mouse], [Advanced] - [Numlock]>
•
Are the server drivers installed?
→ Refer to the manual that comes with your operating system to check that the keyboard and mouse
drivers are installed. (These drivers are installed along with the operating system.) Some operating
systems allow you to change the keyboard and mouse settings. Refer to manual that comes with your
operating system to check that the keyboard and mouse settings are correct.
•
Is the server in the Secure Mode?
→ In the Secure Mode, the keyboard and mouse are disabled. To release the Secure Mode, enter the
password specified with the BIOS setup utility.
Fail to access (read or write) to the floppy disk:
•
Does the floppy disk drive contain a floppy disk?
→ Insert a floppy disk into the floppy disk drive until it clicks.
•
Is the floppy disk write-protected?
→ Place the write-protect switch on the floppy disk to the "Write-enabled" position.
•
Is the floppy disk formatted?
→ Use a formatted floppy disk or format the floppy disk in the floppy disk drive. Refer to the manual
that comes with the operating system for formatting a floppy disk.
•
Is BIOS configuration correct?
→ The floppy disk drive may be disabled with the BIOS setup utility of the server. Check the setting with
the BIOS setup utility.
<Menus to check:
[Main] - [Legacy Floppy A]
[Security] - [Floppy Write Protect]>
•
Is the server in the Secure Mode?
→ In the Secure Mode, write access to the floppy disk may be disabled. To release the Secure Mode,
enter the password specified with the BIOS setup utility.
8-34
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
Fail to access to the CD/DVD-ROM:
•
Is the CD/DVD-ROM properly set in the DVD-ROM drive tray?
→ The tray is provided with a holder to secure the CD/DVD-ROM. Make sure that the CD/DVD-ROM
is placed properly in the holder.
•
Is the CD/DVD-ROM applicable to the server?
→ A CD/DVD-ROM for Macintosh is not available for use.
Fail to access to the CD-R disk:
•
Is the mounting surface correct?
→ Take out the CD-R disk from the tray, and then set it again with its labelled surface upward.
•
Is there any soil or crack on CD-R disk?
→ Make sure there is no soil due to fingerprint or others on the disk surface. Also make sure that there is
no crack on the disk surface. Clean the disk surface if it is soiled.
If read-out still fails, set another disk of which data has been successfully read out to check if the drive
can read the disk.
•
Is the CD-R disk closed?
→ Close the session or set the disk in closed status, and try to read again.
•
Are the CD-R disk and writing software appropriate to the disk drive?
→ The DVD-ROM drive of the server may fail if the combination of disk drive, writing software, and
CD-R is not correct.
Inserted the correct CD-ROM but the message like the following is displayed:
The CD-ROM is not inserted or the wrong CD-ROM is inserted.
Please insert the correct CD-ROM.
OK
•
Is the data side of the CD-ROM dirty or scratched?
→ Take the CD-ROM out of the DVD-ROM drive, confirm that it is not dirty or damaged, reset and click
[OK].
Fail to access the hard disk:
(Refer to the documentation supplied with the disk array controller.)
•
Is the hard disk applicable to the server?
→ Operation of any device that is not authorized by us is not guaranteed.
•
Is the hard disk properly installed?
→ Make sure to lock the hard disk with the lever on its handle. The hard disk is not connected to the
internal connector when it is not completely installed (see Chapter 9).
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
8-35
Fail to access the (internal or external) SCSI devices:
•
Is the SCSI device applicable to the server?
→ Operation of any SCSI device that is not authorized by us is not guaranteed.
•
Are SCSI devices properly configured?
→ When the server has external SCSI devices connected, device settings, including SCSI ID and
terminator, are required. Refer to the manual that comes with the SCSI device for details.
•
Are the SCSI controllers (including optional controllers) properly configured?
→ Use the BIOS setup utility for proper configuration of SCSI devices connected to the SCSI connector
on the I/O board. When the server has an optional SCSI controller installed and SCSI devices
connected to it, use the BIOS setup utility that comes with the optional SCSI controller for proper
configuration. See the manual that comes with the optional SCSI controller for details.
There are some cases that an event log shown below is registered in MegaRAID Storage Manager (MSM) every
time you power on the server.
Controller ID:a Unexpected sense PD=b:255 , CDB=0x1c, …, Sense=0x70, 0x00, 0x06, 0x00,
0x00, 0x00, 0x00, 0x0a, 0x00, 0x00,0x00, 0x00, 0x29,…
a: Controller number of LSI Logic MegaRAID™ SAS PCI EXPRESS™ ROMB
Normally, the controller ID is "0". It depends on the number of disk array controller cards N8103-90F
installed in PCI-Express slot.
b: SAS port number of LSI Logic MegaRAID™ SAS PCI EXPRESS™ ROMB
(1: Port 0-3, 2: Port 4-7)
→ It is not a problem in operating the system.
There are some cases that an event log shown below is registered in application log of Event Viewer every time
you power on the server.
Event Source: MR_MONITOR
Event Type:
Warning
Event ID:
113
Description: Controller ID:a Unexpected sense PD=b:255 , CDB=0x1c, …,
Sense=0x70, 0x00, 0x06, 0x00, 0x00, 0x00, 0x00, 0x0a, 0x00, 0x00,0x00, 0x00, 0x29,…
a: Controller number of LSI Logic MegaRAID™ SAS PCI EXPRESS™ ROMB
Normally, the controller ID is "0". It depends on the number of disk array controller cards N8103-90F
installed in PCI-Express slot.
b: SAS port number of LSI Logic MegaRAID™ SAS PCI EXPRESS™ ROMB
(1: Port 0-3, 2: Port 4-7)
→ It is not a problem in operating the system.
During operation, there are some cases that a warning message concerning SAS device is registered in
MegaRAID Storage Manager™ (MSM) log.
Controller ID:a Unexpected sense PD=b:c , CDB=0xXX, …, Sense=0xXX, …
a: Controller number of LSI Logic MegaRAID™ SAS PCI EXPRESS™ ROMB
Normally, the controller ID is "0". It depends on the number of disk array controller cards N8103-90F
installed in PCI-Express slot.
b: SAS port number of LSI Logic MegaRAID™ SAS PCI EXPRESS™ ROMB
8-36
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
(1: Port 0-3, 2: Port 4-7)
c: Slot number for the device
8 This message indicates that the command issued to SAS device is abnormally ended.
→ Normally the command is retried, therefore, it is not a problem in operating the system.
8 This message may be logged when SAS hard disk drive that has not been configured is removed from the
slot.
→ It is not a problem in operating the system.
8 If the message is displayed again for the specific hard disk drive, check if the hard disk drive is connected
correctly.
→ If the same error message appears repeatedly, contact your service representative to replace the hard
disk drive.
There are some cases that an event log concerning the SAS device is registered in application log of Event
Viewer during operation.
Event Source: MR_MONITOR
Event Type:
Warning
Event ID:
113
Description: Controller ID:a Unexpected sense PD=b:c , CDB=0xXX, …,
Sense=0xXX, …
a: Controller number of LSI Logic MegaRAID™ SAS PCI EXPRESS™ ROMB
Normally, the controller ID is "0". It depends on the number of disk array controller cards N8103-90F
installed in PCI-Express slot.
b: SAS port number of LSI Logic MegaRAID™ SAS PCI EXPRESS™ ROMB
(1: Port 0-3, 2: Port 4-7)
c: Slot number for the device
8 This message indicates that the command issued to SAS device is abnormally ended.
→ Normally the command is retried, therefore, it is not a problem in operating the system.
8 This message may be logged when SAS hard disk drive that has not been configured is removed from the
slot.
→ It is not a problem in operating the system.
8 If the message is displayed again for the specific hard disk drive, check if the hard disk drive is connected
correctly.
→ If the same error message appears repeatedly, contact your service representative to replace the hard
disk drive.
There are some cases that an event log is registered in MegaRAID Storage Manager (MSM) log at startup of OS
after rebuilding the hard disk drives with WebBIOS.
Controller ID:x VD is now DEGRADED VD x.
→ It is not a problem in operating the system.
A popup message may appear if the notification feature for NEC ESMPRO Manager is enabled.
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
8-37
There are some cases that an event log is registered in application log of the Event Viewer at startup of OS after
rebuilding the hard disk drives with WebBIOS.
Event Source: MR_MONITOR
Event Type:
Error
Event ID:
251
Description: Controller ID:x VD is now DEGRADED VD x.
→ It is not a problem in operating the system.
A popup message may appear if the notification feature for NEC ESMPRO Manager is enabled.
8-38
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
Problems with Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions
There are some cases that an event log is registered as follows when you install Windows Server 2003 x64
Editions.
Source:
DCOM
Category
Error
Event ID
10016
Description: The application-specific permission settings do not grant Local Activation permission for the
COM server application with CLSID {555F3418-D99E-4E51-800A-6E89CFD8B1D7} to the
user {NT AUTHORITY\LOCAL SERVICE} SID {S-1-5-19}.
This security permission can be modified using the component Services administrative tool.
→ It is not a problem in operating the system.
There are some cases that an event log is registered as follows when you install Windows Server 2003 x64
Editions.
Event Source: Service Control Manager
Event Type:
Error
Event ID:
7011
Description: Timeout (30000 milliseconds) waiting for a transaction response from the IMAP4Svc service.
→ When this event is not registered by rebooting the system, it is not a problem in operating the system.
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
8-39
Problems with Windows Server 2003 R2
There are some cases that an event log is registered as follows when you operate Windows Server 2003 R2.
Source:
IPMIDRV
Type:
Error
Event ID:
1001
Description: The IPMI device driver attempted to determine if the system supported an IPMI BMC device.
The driver attempted to detect the presence of the IPMI BMC by searching the SMBIOS for
Type 38 record. But either no record was found or the record was not compatible with the
version of the device driver.
If a SMBIOS Type 38 record was detected, the Dump Data field of the event contains a binary
representation of the record.
→ If you use "Hardware Management" which is provided by Windows Server 2003 R2, above-shown
event log will be registered.
For more details, refer to "Enabling the Hardware Management Feature bundled in Windows Server
2003 R2" on the following site.
http://www.nec.co.jp/express/download/W2K3_R2
Problems with Windows Server 2003
Cannot install the operating system correctly.
•
Did you confirm the notes on installing the operating system?
→ See Chapter 6.
Fail to start the operating system:
•
Is a floppy disk in the floppy disk drive?
→ Take out the floppy disk and restart the server.
•
Is the EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM in the DVD-ROM drive?
→ Take out the EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM and restart the server.
•
Is the operating system broken?
→ Use recovery process to recover the system.
The operating system presents unstable operation:
•
Did you update the system?
→ Installing a network drive after installation of the operating system may cause unstable operation. Use
the EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM to update the system. (See Chapter 6.)
When any trouble occurred, the system does not run according to the specification of "Restart automatically":
→ When any trouble occurred on Windows 2003, the system may not restart automatically even if
"Restart automatically" is specified. In such case, restart the system manually.
8-40
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
Cannot turn the power OFF at the blue screen:
→ If you want to turn off the power at the blue screen, execute forced power off (forced shut down:
continue to press POWER switch for 4 seconds). The power will not be turned off if you press the
switch just one time.
The server is not found on the network:
•
Is the LAN cable connected?
→ Make sure to connect the LAN cable to the network port on the rear of the server. Also make sure that
the LAN cable to use conforms to the network interface standard.
•
Is BIOS configuration correct?
→ The internal LAN controller may be disabled with the BIOS setup utility of the server. Check the
setting with the BIOS setup utility.
<Menus to check:
[Advanced] - [PCI Configuration] - [Embedded NIC 1], [Embedded NIC 2]>
•
Have the protocol and service already be configured?
→ Install the distinctive network driver for the server. Make sure that the protocol, such as TCP/IP, and
services are properly specified.
•
Is the transfer speed correct?
→ Open the network property dialog box in control panel to specify the "Link Speed & Duplex" value
the same as the value specified for the HUB.
The processor name displayed in [General] tab of [System Property] is not in correct position.
→ There is no problem for operation.
The system displays the message below and fails to log in.
→ In Windows Server 2003, the following message will be displayed if you use the operating system
without executing the license authentication. Select "Yes", and execute the procedure for license
authentication.
Windows Product Activation
This copy of Windows must be activated with Microsoft before you can
continue, You cannot log on until you activate Windows.
Do you want to activate Windows now?
To shut down the computer, click Cancel.
YES
NO
Cancel
About System Log when re-starting the system on Windows Server 2003
Type:
Source:
Event ID:
Description:
Warning
E100B
4
Adapter Intel(R) PRO/100 Network Connection: Adapter Link Down
→ When re-starting the system without connecting the network cable, this log may be found in system
event log.
But this has no effect on the behaviour of LAN driver.
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
8-41
Confirm that the system is connected with the LAN cable properly.
If 100Base LAN port is not used, disable 100Base LAN on device manager or disable it on BIOS
configuration. Then, the log will not be registered.
Event logs in using SNMP Service in Windows Server 2003
Event Type:
Event Source:
Event Category:
Event ID:
Description:
Warning
EvntAgnt
None
1015
TraceLevel parameter not located in registry;
Default trace level used is 32.
Event Type:
Event Source:
Event Category:
Event ID:
Description:
Warning
EvntAgnt
None
1003
TraceFileName parameter not located in registry;
Default trace file used is.
→ The system will not be affected by these event logs. SNMP will not be affected either, so that you can
ignore these logs.
A PCI board is not recognized.
•
Is the PCI board installed correctly?
→ Confirm that the PCI board is installed in the slot correctly.
•
Is the proper IRQ assigned for the board?
→ Assign the proper IRQ by referring to Chapter 4.
•
Is "Disabled" specified in [Option ROM] for the slot to install SCSI card (excluding the array board used
for operating system boot)?
→ Check the settings with the BIOS setup utility.
<Menus to check: [Advanced] - [PCI Configuration] - [PCI Slot n] (n: PCI slot number of installed
board) - [Option ROM Scan]>
•
Is "Disabled" specified in [Option ROM] for the slot for added network board which is not used for
network boot?
→ Check the settings with the BIOS setup utility.
<Menus to check: [Advanced] - [PCI Configuration] - [PCI Slot n] (n: PCI slot number of installed
board) - [Option ROM Scan]>
8-42
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
PCI hot-plug fails:
•
Is BIOS configuration correct?
→ You must change the BIOS configuration to use the PCI hot-plug feature.
<Menus to check: [Advanced] - [PCI Configuration] - [Hot Plug PCI Control] [Minimum/Middle/Maximum*]>
* Setting value depends on the board to be installed. See Chapter 4 for details.
<Menus to check: [Advanced] - [PCI Configuration] - [Hot Plug PCI Control] - [Empty Bus Default
Speed] - [PCI Slots 5-6] or [PCI Slots 7-8] - Transfer speed of the board to be installed>
The driver of a PCI board cannot be stopped from the operating system when Hot Remove or Hot Replace is
executed for the PCI board:
•
Is another software application using the PCI board for which Hot Remove or Hot Replace is to be
executed?
→ If another software application is using the PCI board for which Hot Remove or Hot Replace is to be
executed, the driver of the PCI board cannot be stopped.
Terminate the software, then stop the driver of the PCI board. If executing Hot Replace, restart the
software after having mounted a new PCI board.
The Telnet Service is not installed.
→ Adjust the computer name to 14 characters or less, and then install the Telnet Service according to <How
to install the Telnet Service>.
<How to install the Telnet Service>
1.
Click [Run] on Start menu.
2.
3.
Type "tlntsvr /service" in the [Open] box, and click [OK].
Click Start menu, point to [Control Panel] and click [Computer Management] and then click the [Services] to
specify whether the Telnet Service is registered.
* When the installation of Telnet Service is finished, there is no problem if the computer name is set to 15
characters or more.
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
8-43
Problems with EXPRESSBUILDER
When the server is not booted from the EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM, check the following:
•
Did you insert the EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM during POST and restart the server?
→ If you do not insert the EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM during POST and restart the server, an error
message will appear or the operating system will boot.
•
Is BIOS configuration correct?
→ The boot device order may be specified with the BIOS setup utility of the server. Use the BIOS setup
utility to change the boot device order to boot the system from the DVD-ROM drive first.
<Menu to check: [Boot]>
•
Is an error message appeared?
→ When an error occurs while EXPRESSBUILDER is in progress, one of the following messages
appears.
After this message appears, check the error and take the appropriate corrective action according to the
message listed in the table below.
Message
This machine is not supported.
NVRAM access error.
Hard disk access error.
The system-specific information does not exist on
the I/O board.
Please restore the backup data or write the data by
using [System Information Management] of the
Off-line Maintenance Utility.
Only the authorized personnel are allowed to do this
operation.
Cause and Remedy
This EXPRESSBUILDER version is not designed for this
server. Execute EXPRESSBUILDER on the compliant server.
An access to the non-volatile memory (NVRAM) is not
acceptable.
The hard disk is not connected or it is failed.
Check whether the hard disk is correctly connected.
The system-specific information cannot be acquired in the I/O
board exchange and so on.
8-44
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
Problems with Express Setup
Express Setup can not be used
→ Express Setup does not support the installation of Microsoft Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions.
If you want to perform re-setup, see Appendix D and perform "Manual Setup".
Following message appeared when you tried to install Express Setup to the hard disk that has smaller capacity
than the specified partition size:
The specified partition size has exceeded the capacity of the hard disk.
The setup created the partition at the maximum size that can be reserved on the hard disk.
Setup will continue the process.
OK
→ It is not an abnormal condition. Press Enter to continue the installation.
The message can not be displayed correctly when copying the files from CD-ROM or checking CD-ROM:
→ Press R. When any messages appear again even if you press R, restart the Express Setup from the
beginning. In case the same result occurred after the restart of installation, contact your service
representative and ask them to check the DVD-ROM drive.
Express Setup terminated and asks to input setup information.
→ There are some errors on the specified setup information.
Follow the instruction to input the correct value. It is not necessary to cancel the installation. On
Windows, you might be asked to press Enter again after the last reboot of the setup.
[OK] appears on the [Role of Computer] screen.
→ If you click [OK] here, the setup will select the default value of Express Setup for the later specification
to continue the process.
<The Default Value for Windows Server 2003>
The specification of network protocol
Protocol :
TCP/IP[DHCP Specified]
Service :
Select sharing Microsoft network files and printer.
Client :
Microsoft network client.
Component :
SNMP
Application :
NEC ESMPRO Agent
MegaRAID Storage Manager
Power Console Plus (When disk array system)
[OK] does not appear on [Role of Computer] screen.
→ [OK] does not appear if the setup file that has already been created is loaded.
→ [OK] appears only when you first entered the [Role of Computer] screen.
Once you go to the next screen from [Role of Computer], the [OK] will not appear even if you click
[Back] to go back to the [Role of Computer] screen.
Select [Use Existing Partition] as [System Partition], but the operating system is installed in the whole area of
the disk.
→ Is there any other partition than the partition to re-use (excluding maintenance area)? If no other partition
than the one to re-use exist, the setup will reserve the whole area of the disk to install Windows.
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
8-45
Specified to join the Domain, but the system is installed as Workgroup.
→ When the setup fails to join the Domain during the installation, it will install the system as Workgroup.
Open [System] in Control Panel to specify joining the Domain.
Specified large value as partition size, but when Windows is actually started, the system partition is created by
4095 MB.
→ Is the [Partition Size] specified by the value larger than the real area? If you want to create one partition
in all area of the hard disk (excluding the maintenance area) to install the operating system, specify [All
Area].
Entered the incorrect Product ID/CD key.
→ Even if you entered the incorrect Product ID/CD key, Express Setup will start. However, the setup will
stop and asks you to re-enter the correct value. Also in this case, input request will occur when rebooting
after GUI setup completed during Express Setup. If these 2 inputs are done correctly, there is no problem
on Windows setup.
Unable to specify the details of network adapter.
→ In Express Setup, you can not specify the details of Network adapter. Specify them from Control Panel
after starting Windows.
Windows is started with network adapter that has not been specified during Express Setup
→ Windows will install the recognized network adapter specified as default value. If you want to modify the
specification, it can be done from Control Panel after starting Windows. Also, a network adapter that has
been specified during Express Setup but is not connected will not be setup, though the protocol will only
be installed.
Connected more than two network adapters and specified a different protocol for each adapter, but all the
protocols are specified on either adapter.
→ It's a design. Each adapter is specified so that all the installed protocols can be used.
The values that cannot be specified during Express Setup will all be specified by default value.
When more than two network adapters are specified, the detailed specification of TCP/IP protocol are all set to
use DHCP.
→ When more than two network adapters are specified, the detailed specification of the protocol may all be
set by default value. Re-specify the details from Control Panel.
Not more than two network adapters are connected, but the detailed specification of the protocol are all set by
default. (e.g. Specified IP Address on TCP/IP, but DHCP is specified)
→ Are you specifying more than two protocols?
In this case, the situation will be the same as connecting more than two Network adapter, so the detailed
specification of the protocol are all set by default.
Re-specify the details from Control Panel after starting the operating system.
Changed the giga driver speed from 1000M bps to 100M bps. But the changed speed is not properly displayed in
Network Details of ESMPRO data viewer (still 1000M bps is indicated):
→ It does not affect the operation of LAN driver.
8-46
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
Setup is interrupted at "Creating a working partition" process during the Express Setup.
•
Did you connect the hard disk drive that operating system is not going to be installed on?
→ Disconnect the hard disk drive that operating system is not going to be installed on, and perform the
Express Setup.
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
8-47
Error Message during Disk Array Configuration
If the server configured with disk array does not work correctly or utility program fails, check the following and take an
appropriate action.
The operating system cannot be installed:
•
Is configuration of the disk array controller performed?
→ Perform configuration properly by using MegaRAID Configuration Utility or WebBIOS.
The operating system cannot be started:
•
Is the BIOS setting for the disk array controller changed?
→ Set it properly by using MegaRAID Configuration Utility.
•
Does POST recognize the disk array controller?
→ Check that the disk array controller is connected correctly and then turn the power ON.
→ When the disk array is connected correctly but is not recognized, it may be faulty. Contact the
maintenance service agent that you are contracted with or the dealer that you purchased this controller
from.
Rebuilding cannot be performed:
•
Is the capacity of the hard disk to be rebuilt insufficient?
→ Use a hard disk of the same capacity as the faulty one.
•
Is the RAID configuration RAID0?
→ RAID0 does not have redundancy thus rebuilding cannot be performed. Replace the "DEAD" hard
disk, create configuration information again, perform initialization and then restore using the backup
data.
Auto-rebuild cannot be performed:
•
Is the interval enough when hot swap are executed?
→ Take interval more than 60 seconds when hot swap are executed.
•
Is the BIOS setting for the disk array controller correct?
→ Check the BIOS setting for disk array controller by using MegaRAID Configuration Utility. Select
"Objects" → "Adapter" → "Auto Rebuild" from the TOP menu.
A hard disk goes into "FAIL" status:
→ Contact the maintenance service agent that you are contracted with or the dealer that you purchased it
from.
Consistency Check cannot be performed:
8 Is virtual disk indicated as "Degraded"?
→ Replace the failed hard disk drive and execute rebuild process.
8 Is RAID level of virtual disk "RAID0"?
→ The Consistency Check does not work on RAID0 because it has no redundancy.
8-48
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
Error Message for Battery for On-board RAID (MegaRAID ROMB)
The battery is discharged and charged in a regular basis (every 30 days by the default). The following error message
may be registered in event log (application log), however, it is not a problem in operating the system.
„
MegaRAID Storage Manager (MSM) log
Controller ID:x Battery is discharging.
„
Application event log
Event Source: MR_MONITOR
Event Type:
Warning
Event ID:
148
Description: Controller ID:x Battery is discharging.
„
MegaRAID Storage Manager (MSM) log
Controller ID:x BBU disables; changing WB logical drives to WT.
„
Application event log
Event Source: MR_MONITOR
Event Type:
Warning
Event ID:
195
Description:
Controller ID:x BBU disables; changing WB logical drives to WT.
The battery is charged and discharged when it is replaced. The following error message may be registered in event log
(application log), however, it is not a problem in operating the system.
„
MegaRAID Storage Manager (MSM) log
Controller ID:x Battery requires reconditioning – please initiate a LEARN cycle.
„
Application event log
Event Source: MR_MONITOR
Event Type:
Warning
Event ID:
253
Description: Controller ID:x Battery requires reconditioning – please initiate a LEARN cycle.
The battery is discharged and charged in a regular basis (every 30 days by the default). While performing this cycle, the
following error message may appear on POST screen, however, it is not a problem in operating the system.
Your battery is bad or missing, and you have VDs configured for write-back
mode. Because the battery is not usable, these VDs will actually run in
write-through mode until the battery is replaced.
The following VDs are affected : xx,xx,xx,xx,xx,xx
The battery is charged and discharged when it is replaced. While performing this cycle, the following error message
may appear on POST screen, however, it is not a problem in operating the system.
Your battery is bad or missing, and you have VDs configured for write-back
mode. Because the battery is not usable, these VDs will actually run in
write-through mode until the battery is replaced.
The following VDs are affected : xx,xx,xx,xx,xx,xx
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
8-49
Following message appears during POST:
The battery hardware is missing or malfunctioning, or the battery is unplugged.
If you continue to boot the system, the battery-backed cache will not function.
Please contact technical support for assistance.
Press 'D' to disable this warning (if your controller does not have a battery).
→ The battery of on-board RAID (MegaRAID ROMB) may be faulty.
Contact your service representative.
The battery of on-board RAID (MegaRAID ROMB) is not recognized, or the following message appears during
POST:
Your battery is bad or missing, and you have VDs configured for write-back mode.
Because the battery is not usable, these VDs will actually run in write-through mode until the battery is
replaced.
The following VDs are affected: xx
Press any key to continue.
8 The battery charging rate may be low.
→ Power on the server for several hours to charge battery. After that, check the POST message again.
You can use WebBIOS to check the status on Battery Status screen.
If the battery is still not recognized, the battery may be faulty or dead. The life of battery is
approximately two years. Contact your service representative.
8-50
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
Problems with Master Control Menu
The master control menu fails to appear:
•
Is your system Windows NT 4.0 or later, or Windows 95 or later?
→ The Master Control menu is supported by Windows NT 4.0 and Windows 95.
•
Is Shift pressed?
→ Inserting the CD-ROM with Shift pressed down cancels the Autorun feature.
•
Is the system in the proper state?
→ The menu may not appear depending on the system registry setting or the timing to set the CD-ROM.
In such a case, start the Explorer and run \MC\1ST.EXE in the CD-ROM.
Problems with Configuration Diskette Creator
The bit map of the Configuration Diskette Creator window is not displayed correctly during setting of
setup information. (When the Trekking command is used)
→ If the specified number of colours is fewer than 256 in the display setting, the bit map is not displayed
correctly, but the setup information can be displayed correctly.
The Point to Point tunnelling protocol cannot be set.
→ The protocol is not supported at present. After installation, set the protocol through Control Panel. In this
case, rebooting is not necessary.
The details of a network adapter cannot be set.
→ Configuration Diskette Creator is unable to set the details of network adapters. Start Windows, and set the
details through Control Panel.
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
8-51
COLLECTING EVENT LOG
This section describes how to collect the log of various events that occurred on the server.
IMPORTANT: If STOP error, system error, or stall occurred, follow the procedure below
after restarting the system.
NOTE: Different revisions of processors may be mixed in the additional processor kit.
When Windows is used, following message may be appeared in the System Log of the
Event Viewer after extension of different revisions of two or more processors in the Bull
NovaScale server. If this message is logged, it is no problem for operation.
1.
Click [Management Tool] → [Event Viewer] from the Control Panel.
2.
Select the type of the log to collect.
On [Application Log], the events related to the running application are archived. On [Security Log], the
events related to the security are archived. On [System Log], the events occurred at the item which configures
Windows system are archived.
3.
Click [Save as...] in the [Run] menu.
4.
Type the file name of archived log in the [File Name] box.
5.
Select the type of the log file you want to save in the [File Type] list box and click [OK].
For more information, refer to Windows Online Help.
8-52
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
COLLECTING CONFIGURATION INFORMATION
This section describes how to collect the information on hardware configuration and inside specification.
In order to collect information, "Diagnostic Program" is used.
IMPORTANT: If STOP error, system error, or stall occurred, follow the procedure below
after restarting the system.
1.
Point to [Settings] in Start menu, and click [Control Panel].
The [Control Panel] dialog box appears.
2.
Double-click [Management Tool], and double-click [Computer Management].
The [Computer Management] dialog box appears.
3.
Click [System Tool] → [System Information].
4.
Click [Save as System Information File] in the [Operation] menu.
5.
Type the file name to save in the [File Name] box.
6.
Click [Save].
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
8-53
COLLECTING DR. WATSON DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION
Dr. Watson collects diagnostic information related to application errors. The location to save the information can be
specified as you like. For more information, refer to Chapter 5.
MEMORY DUMP
If an error occurs, the dump file should be saved to acquire necessary information.
If you saved the dump to DAT, write down that it is saved as "NTBackup" or "ARCServe" on the label. You can specify
the location to save the diagnostic information as you like. For more information, refer to "Specifying Memory Dump
(Debug Information (refer to Chapter 5 for detail)".
IMPORTANT:
„
Contact your service representative before dumping the memory. Dumping the memory
while the server is in the successful operation may affect the system operation.
„
Restarting the system due to an error may display a message indicating insufficient
virtual memory. Ignore this message and proceed. Restarting the system may result in
dumping improper data.
Preparing for Memory Dumping
Memory dumping with the DUMP switch may disable the server to restart. In such a case, it is required to force the
server to shut down. This forced shutdown, however, is not available if "Enable" is selected for "Power Switch Inhibit"
on the Security menu of the BIOS setup utility, because this setting disables POWER switch operation.
Follow the procedure below to change the setting to enable the forced shutdown and restart of the server.
1.
Power on the server and start the BIOS setup utility.
2.
Select "Disable" for "Power Switch Inhibit" in the Security menu.
3.
Save the configuration data and exit the SETUP.
8-54
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
Saving the Dump File
Press the DUMP switch to save the dump file when an error occurs. Insert a metal pin (a straightened large paper clip
will make a substitute) into the switch hole to press the DUMP switch.
DUMP switch
Pressing the DUMP switch saves the dump file in the specified directory. (Memory dumping may not be available when
the processor stalls.)
IMPORTANT: Do not use a toothpick or plastic stick that is easy to break. Use a pin
having the length of 1 inch (25 mm) or longer.
25 mm or longer
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
8-55
RECOVERY FOR Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions and Windows
Server 2003
If the system fails to start by some reasons, recover the system with the recovery console. However, recovery using this
method should be performed only by system administrator or a user who has an expert knowledge. See Online Help for
details.
8-56
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
OFF-LINE MAINTENANCE UTILITY
The Off-line Maintenance Utility is an operating system independent maintenance program. When you are unable to
start the operating system dependent NEC ESMPRO to troubleshoot a problem, the Off-line Maintenance Utility can be
used.
IMPORTANT:
„
The Off-line Maintenance Utility is intended for use by your service representative. The
EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM and the Off-line Maintenance Utility Bootable floppy
disk you have created contain a file that describes operation of the utility, but do not
attempt to use the utility by yourself. Contact your service representative and follow
instructions.
„
Starting the Off-line Maintenance Utility disables any access from a client to the server.
Starting the Off-line Maintenance Utility
The Off-line Maintenance Utility may be started in the following ways.
„
From the CD-ROM
Insert the EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM in the DVD-ROM drive and reboot the system.
After the menu is displayed on the screen, select "Tools" - "Off-line Maintenance Utility".
The Off-line Maintenance Utility program starts from the CD-ROM.
„
From the floppy disk
Insert the Off-line Maintenance Utility Bootable floppy disk in the floppy disk drive and reboot the system.
The Off-line Maintenance Utility program starts from the boot disk.
The Off-line Maintenance Utility Bootable floppy disk is created by selecting "Tools" - "Create Support FD"
on the EXPRESSBUILDER.
„
Manual start (by pressing F4)
When the Off-line Maintenance Utility is installed, press F4 while the start-up screen of the server is on
screen. The Off-line Maintenance Utility starts from the hard disk.
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
8-57
Features of Off-line Maintenance Utility
The Off-line Maintenance Utility provides the following features. (Available features vary depending on the way you
started the Off-line Maintenance Utility.)
IMPORTANT: See the on-line help for details of the Off-line Maintenance Utility. For
further information, ask your service representative.
„
IPMI Information Viewer
Provides the functions to view the system event log (SEL), sensor data record (SDR), and field replaceable
unit (FRU) and to make a backup copy of them.
Using this feature, you can find system errors and events to determine a maintenance part.
„
BIOS Setup Viewer
Provides the functions to export the current configuration data defined with the Setup utility to a text file.
„
System Information Viewer
Provides the functions to view information on the processor and the BIOS and export it to a text file.
„
System Information Management
Provides the function to make a back-up copy of your data.
Without the backup data, the system-specific information and/or configuration may not be restored.
Only an authorised person is allowed to restore the backup data.
„
Start of Utilities
With EXPRESSBUILDER, you can start the following utilities installed in the maintenance partition.
„
–
System Management
–
System Diagnostics
–
Maintenance Partition Update
Chassis Identify
This function can distinguish the machine with the lamp or buzzer of the machine.
This is convenient if you have to distinguish a machine among many machines on the rack.
8-58
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
RESETTING THE SERVER
„
If the server halts before starting the operating system, press and hold Ctrl and Alt and press Delete.
This restarts the server.
„
Pressing the RESET switch on the front panel reboots the server.
RESET switch
IMPORTANT: Resetting the server clears the DIMM memory and the data in process. To
reset the server when it is not frozen, make sure that no processing is in progress.
FORCED SHUTDOWN
Use this function when an operating system command does not shut down the server, the POWER switch does not turn
off the server, or resetting does not work.
Press and hold the POWER switch on the server for at least four seconds. The power is forcibly turned off. To turn on
the power back again, wait approximately 10 seconds after turning off the power (forced shutdown).
Press and hold the
POWER switch at least 4
seconds.
IMPORTANT: If the remote power-on function is used, cycle the power once to load the
operating system, and turn off the power again in the normal way.
Chapter 9
Upgrading Your Server
This chapter describes internal optional devices available for the server, procedures for install or removing such
optional devices, and notes on using them.
„
IMPORTANT:
„
Optional devices described in this chapter may be installed or removed by any user.
However, Bull does not assume any liability for damage to optional devices or the
server or malfunctions of the server resulted from installation by the user. Bull
recommends you ask your service representative for installing or removing any optional
devices.
„
Make sure to use only optional devices and cables authorised by Bull. Repair of the
server due to malfunctions, failures, or damage resulting from installing inappropriate
devices or cables will be charged.
„
When you made any change to the hardware configuration, make sure to update the
system (see Chapter 5 for details.).
9-2
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
SAFETY NOTES
Observe the following notes to install or remove optional devices safely and properly.
WARNING
Observe the following instructions to use the server safely. Failure to follow these instructions
may result in death or serious personal injury. See pages 1-3 to 1-8 for details.
Do not disassemble, repair, or alter the server.
Do not look into the DVD-ROM drive.
Do not remove the lithium, Ni-CD, and/or NiMH battery.
Disconnect the power plug before working with the server.
CAUTION
Observe the following instructions to use the server safely. Failure to follow these instructions
may cause a fire, personal injury, or property damage. See pages 1-3 to 1-8 for details.
Do not lift the server only by a single person.
Make sure to complete board installation.
Do not pinch your fingers with mechanical component.
High temperature
Put a connector cover on an unused connector.
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
9-3
ANTI-STATIC MEASURES
The server contains electronic components sensitive to static electricity. Avoid failures caused by static electricity when
installing or removing any optional devices.
„
Wear a wrist strap (an arm belt or anti-static glove).
Wear a wrist strap on your wrist. If no wrist strap is available, touch an unpainted metal part of the cabinet
before touching a component to discharge static electricity from your body.
Touch a metal part regularly when working with components to discharge static electricity.
„
Select a suitable work space.
– Work with the server on an anti-static or concrete floor.
– When you work with the server on a carpet where static electricity is likely to be generated, make sure take
anti-static measures beforehand.
„
Use a work table.
Place the server on an anti-static mat to work with it.
„
Cloth
– Do not wear a wool or synthetic cloth to work with the server.
– Wear anti-static shoes to work with the server.
– Take off any jewels (ring, bracelet, or wrist watch) before working with the server.
„
Handling of components
– Keep any component in an anti-static bag until you actually install it into the server.
– Hold a component by its edge to avoid touching any terminals or components.
– To store or carry any component, place it in an anti-static bag.
9-4
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
PREPARING FOR INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL
Follow the procedure below to prepare for installing or removing components.
1.
Shut down the operating system.
2.
Press the POWER switch to power off the server (the POWER/SLEEP lamp goes off).
3.
Unplug the power cord from the AC inlet on the server
The AC Standby lamp on the front of the server goes off.
4.
5.
Remove all the cables connected to the server on the rear panel.
Make a clearance of 1m to 2m in the front and rear sides and left and right sides of the server.
NOTE: Make sure to disconnect the power cord from the outlet before installing or
removing the option devices. If you remove the internal cable with the power cord being
connected, the STATUS lamp will light in amber when the server is powered. Disconnect
the power cord, connect it again, and then restart the server.
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
9-5
DEVICE INSTALLATION OR REMOVAL PROCEDURE
Install or remove a component from the server as follows.
3.5-inch Hard Disk Drive
The 3.5-inch device bay on the front of the server contains five slots in which hard disk drives can be installed. The
device bay is not equipped with any hard disk drives (excluding when one or more built-in hard disk drives are ordered).
Purchase additional hard disk drives if required.
IMPORTANT:
„
Do not use any hard disk drives that are not authorised by us. Installing a third-party's
hard disk drive may cause a failure of the server as well as the hard disk drive.
„
The supported RAID level depends on the disk array controller to be used.
– Onboard RAID:
RAID0, RAID1, and RAID5 (See "Disk Array Configuration" in this chapter.)
– Optional disk array controller:
Refer to the manual that comes with the disk array controller. (If you purchased the
board by BTO (built-to-order), the manual is provided with the server.)
All five slots may contain a hard disk drive approximately 25.4 mm (1 inch) high.
Slot 0
Slot 1
Slot 0
Slot 2
Slot 1
Slot 2
Slot 3
Slot 3
Slot 8
Slot 4
Slot 9
Slot 10
Slot 11
HDD cage (option)
In the disk array configuration, use the same model of hard disk drives.
9-6
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
Installation
Install a hard disk drive as follows. This procedure applies to all the slots.
NOTE: In RAID1 or RAID5 configuration, the hard disk drive can be installed or removed
while the server is being powered.
IMPORTANT: In a disk array configuration, use the same model of hard disk drives.
1.
See the section "Preparing for Installation and Removal" described earlier to prepare (except for disk array
configuration).
2.
Unlock the front door with the security key, and open the front door.
3.
Locate the slot in which you are going to install a hard disk drive.
The server has five slots.
4.
Remove the empty drive carrier.
5.
Using the provided screws, secure the hard disk drive into the empty drive carrier.
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
6.
Firmly hold the additional hard disk drive and handle, and insert it into the slot.
IMPORTANT:
7.
„
Push the hard disk drive until the handle hook hits the frame.
„
Carefully hold the hard disk drive with both hands.
Slowly close the handle.
The handle is locked when a "click" is heard.
NOTE: Make sure that the handle is hooked to the frame when having inserted the hard
disk drive.
8.
Close the front door.
9-7
9-8
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
Removal
Remove a hard disk drive as follows. To use the server with the hard disk drive removed, insert an empty drive carrier
into the empty slot.
1.
Shutdown the system and press the POWER switch to turn off the power.
2.
Unlock the hard disk drive.
1
2
3.
Firmly hold the hard disk drive and handle, then take them out.
NOTE: If removing a failing hard disk drive, confirm the slot in which the DISK lamp of
the hard disk drive is amber before starting the removal.
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
9-9
DISK lamps
When the hard disk drives are in a redundant disk configuration, they can recover from an error by rebuilding the data.
The auto-rebuild feature may be enabled or disabled depending on the RAID level.
Auto-rebuild is automatically carried out when you hot-swap a failed hard disk drive with a new one (replace the disk
while the server is powered). While auto-rebuild is in progress, the DISK lamp flashes green and amber alternatively to
indicate it.
IMPORTANT: When auto-rebuild fails, the DISK lamp lights in amber. Remove and
install the hard disk drive again to restart auto-rebuild. (If the disk array monitoring utility
is installed, check the status through MegaRAID Storage Manager.)
Observe the following notes for auto-rebuild.
„
Do not power off the server in the period between a hard disk drive error and completion of auto-rebuild.
„
When you removed a hard disk drive, wait at least 60 seconds before installing the hard disk drive back again.
„
Do not replace another hard disk drive while rebuilding is in progress. (The DISK lamp flashes green and
amber alternatively while rebuilding the hard disk drive.)
9-10
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
Power Supply Unit
Even if one of three power supply units fails, the server can continue its operation without interruption when an
additional power supply unit is installed (in the redundant configuration).
If the four power supply units are used, AC power can be divided into two lines with a pair of power supply units. With
the AC power redundant configuration, the server can continue its operation without power interruption even if either of
AC power line fails.
Installation
Install a power supply unit as follows:
1.
See the section "Preparing for Installation and Removal" described earlier to prepare.
2.
Remove the screw securing the blank cover.
3.
Remove the blank cover.
IMPORTANT: Keep the removed blank cover for future use.
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
4.
Insert the power supply unit into the slot.
IMPORTANT: Be sure to push straight the power supply unit. To avoid damaging the
power supply unit, do not tilt or twist the unit as you push it into the connector.
NOTE: Make sure that the power supply unit is pushed in to an end securely.
5.
Connect two power cords to AC inlet.
Use the power cord provided with the power supply unit and the one provided with the optional unit.
IMPORTANT: A blank cover is attached to the slot for additional power supply unit.
Keep the removed blank cover for future use.
AC inlet
AC inlet for additional
power supply unit
9-11
9-12
6.
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
Power on the server.
The POWER lamp on the power supply units goes on.
7.
Confirm, by the STATUS lamp or on the POST diagnostic screen, that there are no errors related to the power
supply units.
See Chapter 8 for details on the error messages.
If the POWER lamps are off, reinstall the power supply units. If the POWER lamps are still off, contact your
service representative.
Replacing a Failing Power Supply Unit
Replace only a failing power supply unit.
IMPORTANT: Do not remove a power supply unit operating normally.
NOTE: If two power supply units work normally while the server contains three or four
power supply units in a redundant configuration, the failing power supply unit can be
replaced with the system operating (power-on state). (Skip step 2.)
1.
Check the POWER lamp on the power supply unit and determine which unit needs to be replaced.
The lamp of the failing power supply unit is off.
2.
Shutdown the system, and turn off the server.
3.
While pressing down on the locking tab, grasp the handle and carefully pull the power supply unit out of the
power supply bay.
IMPORTANT: To avoid damaging the power supply unit and/or connector, do not tilt or
twist the unit as you pull it from the power supply bay. Use even, steady force to remove
the unit.
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
4.
9-13
If you are not going to install a replacement power supply unit, you must install a blank cover you removed in
step 2 of installation procedure to vacant slot.
IMPORTANT: To maintain the cooling effect in the server, install the blank cover in the
vacant slot of the power supply bay.
5.
Install the new power supply unit taking steps 3 to 6 of "Installation", and confirm that the power supply unit
is installed normally.
NOTE: If one of the three or four power supply units of the server is replaced while the
power is on, the POWER lamp of the new power supply unit goes on. (If it is replaced
while the power is off, the lamp goes on after the power is turned on.)
9-14
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
5.25-inch Device
The server contains two slots in which SCSI backup devices such as magnetic tape drive can be installed.
Slot #2
Slot #1
Available Devices
The 5.25-inch device slot can contain two single-height SCSI devices, or one full-height device.
To use the 5.25-inch device, connect it to an optional SCSI controller board.
Setting of SCSI ID
Refer to the manual that comes with the SCSI controller.
„
Setting of terminator
Set the terminator to "OFF".
Installation
Described below are installation procedures for SCSI device.
1.
See the section "Preparing for Installation and Removal" described earlier to prepare.
2.
Open the front door.
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
9-15
3.
Pull the dummy cover toward you gently and carefully.
4.
Pull the SCSI cable and power cable out of the 5.25-inch device bay.
5.
Install the two latching rails coming with the server to the device with the screws provided with the server.
IMPORTANT: Always use the screws coming with the server. Do not use the screws
coming with the 5.25-inch device. Using longer screws or those of different diameter may
cause the device to be broken.
NOTE: Use the lower screw holes to secure the rail to the device.
Screws
9-16
6.
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
Connect the interface cable.
Connect the SCSI and power cables secured in the 5.25-inch device bay to the 5.25-inch device.
IMPORTANT: A connector cap is attached to the power cable. Keep the removed cap for
future use.
7.
Push the 5.25-inch device to the device bay carefully until a click occurs to lock it.
IMPORTANT:
„
Connector pin bending or incomplete connection may cause a malfunction to occur.
Provide the connection securely watching the 5.25-inch device and cable connectors.
NOTE: Make sure that the cable is not caught.
8.
Close the front door.
9.
Provide the setup for the SCSI controller.
Refer to the manual that comes with the SCSI controller board for setup.
Removal
Remove the 5.25-inch device in the reverse procedure of the installation.
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
Rear Access Cover
To install or remove a PCI board, or to change cable connections of internal cable, you will need to remove the rear
access cover.
CAUTION
Observe the following instructions to use the server safely. Failure to follow these instructions
may result in death or serious personal injury. See pages 1-3 to 1-8 for details.
Be sure to power off the server before removing the rear access cover.
Removal
1.
See the section "Preparing for Installation and Removal" described earlier to prepare.
2.
3.
Loosen the captive screws located on the rear of the cover.
4.
Lift the cover up and off of the chassis.
Slide the rear access cover toward the rear of the chassis.
Captive screws
9-17
9-18
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
Installation
IMPORTANT: Before installing the rear access cover, check that you have not left tools
or loose parts inside the system.
1.
Position the cover on the chassis so that the cover tabs align with the chassis slots.
2.
While lightly pressing down on the cover, slide it toward the front of the chassis.
3.
Attach the cover to the chassis with the captive screws located on the rear of the cover.
Captive screws
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
9-19
PCI Access Cover
To install or remove a non-hot-swap PCI board, remove the PCI access cover inside the server. You do not need to
remove the PCI access cover when you work with hot-swap PCI slot.
Removal
1.
See the section "Preparing for Installation and Removal" described earlier to prepare.
2.
Remove the rear access cover.
3.
Loosen the screw securing the PCI access cover.
4.
Hold the end of the cover (the end where the screw is loosened), and take out the cover slowly and gently.
Installation
Take the following steps to install the PCI access cover.
1.
Orient the PCI access cover with the screw toward the front of the server.
2.
Insert the tab on the rear side of the PCI access cover into the chassis slot.
3.
Slowly and gently put the cover on the chassis, and secure it with a screw.
9-20
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
PCI Board
The server contains six slots for PCI board, and three slots for PCI-Express board.
Some PCI boards support the hot-plug function by which they may be installed or removed with the power of the server
being on. Your server supports the hot-plug function if the Windows Server 2003 is used as operating system.
IMPORTANT: The PCI board is extremely sensitive to static electricity. Make sure to
touch the metal frame of the server to discharge static electricity from your body before
handling the PCI board. Do not touch the PCI board terminals or on-board parts by a bare
hand or place the PCI board directly on the desk. For static notes, see the section
"Anti-static Measures".
NOTES:
„
The tab on the PCI board slot indicates hot-plug or non-hot-plug by its colour. Hot-plug
slots have a green tab (PCI slot #5 through #8), and non-hot-plug slots have a blue tab
(PCI slot #1 through #4).
„
The PCI-Express boards are x1, x4, x8, and x16. The server can contain x1, x4, and x8
PCI-Express board.
Non-hot-plug PCI board slots
(colour: blue)
Hot-plug PCI board slots
(colour: green)
PCI #1, #2 (32-bit/33MHz, 5V PCI)
PCI #3 (PCI-Express (x4))
PCI #4, #5 (PCI-Express(x8))
PCI #6, #7, #8, #9
(64-bit/100MHz, 3.3V PCI-X)
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
9-21
There are three types of PCI boards: 5V PCI boards, 3.3V PCI boards, and universal PCI boards.
A 5V PCI board must be installed in the 5V PCI slot, and a 3.3V PCI board must be installed in the 3.3V PCI slot. A
universal PCI board can be installed in any PCI slot.
5V PCI board
3.3V PCI board
Universal PCI board
The PCI-Express boards are x1, x4, x8, and x16. The server can contain x1, x4, and x8 PCI-Express boards.
PCI-Express board (x4)
PCI-Express board (x8)
9-22
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
RAID Controller Considerations
Note the following on the configuration of a disk array by using the on-board or optional disk array controller.
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
To change the disk array configuration or the RAID, the hard disk drives must be initialised. If important data
is saved in the hard disk drives used to constitute a disk array, first back up the data in other hard disk drives
before installing boards and configuring the disk array.
At least two hard disk drives are required to configure a disk array.
Hard disk drives used in the disk array configuration should have the same disk revolution rate and capacity in
packs.
See the table on next page for the slot in which an optional board can be installed.
Up to three disk array controller boards can be installed in the server.
Several RAID (Redundant Arrays of Inexpensive [Independent] Disks) levels can be set for the disk array
configuration in the server. See "Disk Array Configuration" described later for available RAIDs, data transfer
rate, and array configuration.
For an optional disk array controller, refer to the documentation coming with the disk array controller for
details.
The available capacity of the hard disk drives in the disk array configuration is lower than the total capacity of
the hard disk drives configuring the disk array while the disk reliability is improved (for RAID 1, 5, 10, or
50).
Set "Option ROM Scan," a parameter of the slot in which a hard disk is installed, to "Disabled" in "PCI
Configuration" in the Advanced menu of the BIOS SETUP utility. ("Enabled" is factory-set.) If two or more
disk array controllers are installed, set only the slot containing the board to boot-up to "Enabled". Do not set
"Option ROM Scan" for embedded SAS to "Disabled".
Replacement of optional disk array controller board
Back up the disk array configuration information in the disk array controller board to a floppy disk and restore
it to the replaced disk array controller board. Refer to the manual that comes with the disk array controller for
details.
When more than one disk array controller board are installed in the server, install the disk array controller
board to which the system disk is connected in the PCI slot having the highest boot priority.
Boot priority: PCI#3 → PCI#4 → PCI#5 → PCI#8 → PCI#9 → PCI#6 → PCI#7 → PCI#1 → PCI#2
For example, if three disk array controller boards are installed in PCI slots #7 to #9, the system disk should be
connected to the board installed in PCI slot #8.
„
„
„
The maximum total capacity of the hard disk drives that are configured as a logical drive or a pack is 2 TB
(terabyte).
The maximum logical disk capacity for installing Microsoft Windows 2000 operating system or Linux
operating system is 1 TB.
For configuration information of onboard RAID (MegaRAID ROMB), you can use Tools menu in
EXPRESSBUILDER to store or restore the information in/from the floppy disk.
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
9-23
List of Optional Devices and their Available Slots
PCI
Description
Product Name
Slot size
PCI board type
Available board size
Hot-plug
PCI Express
#3
#4
#5
Bus A
Bus B Bus C Bus D
32-bit/33MHz
x4
x8
Full-height
5V
x8 socket
Long/short
Non-hot-plug
#1
#2
PCI-X
#6
#7
#8
#9
Bus E
Bus F
64-bit/100MHz
3.3V
Hot-plug
SCSI controller
(64bit/133MHz PCI-X)
LSI Logic MegaRAID
SCSI controller
*5
SAS 8480E
(64bit/133MHz PCI-X)
SecuRAID 321
Disk array controller
*4
(64bit/66MHz PCI)
INTEL PRO/1000 MF
1000BASE-T Adapter
(2ch)(64bit/133MHz PCI-X)
64B PCI-X PRO 1000MT 1000BASE-T Adapter
DUAL
(2ch)(64bit/133MHz PCI-X)
√
√
–
–
–
√
√
√
√
√
√
–
–
–
√
√
√
√
–
–
–
–
–
√
√
√
√
–
–
–
–
–
√
√
√
√
–
–
–
–
–
√
√
√
√
INTEL PRO/1000 XT
64-BIT PCI
INTEL PRO/1000 PT
64-BIT PCI
–
–
–
–
–
√
√
√
√
–
–
–
–
–
√
√
√
√
Adaptec 29160LP
*1
1000BASE-T Adapter
*1
(64bit/133MHz PCI-X)
1000BASE-SX Adapter
(2ch) (64bit/133MHz PCI-X)
*1
√: Can be installed. –: Cannot be installed.
*1
*2
*3
*4
*5
Only one card can be installed per a PCI-X bus.
Up to two cards can be installed.
Up to three cards can be installed.
Up to four cards can be installed.
Up to six cards can be installed.
NOTE: The system BIOS initialises the PCI slots in the order shown below. The order
may be changed according to the types and number of PCI cards.
PCI#3→PCI#4→PCI#5→PCI#8→PCI#9→PCI#6→PCI#7→on-board RAID
controller→PCI#1→PCI#2
Onboard LAN Controller Considerations
It is possible to configure the Teaming function of AFT (Adapter Fault Tolerance)/ALB (Adaptive Load Balancing) in a
standard network controller (on board LAN controller).
But it is also impossible to configure the Teaming function of the same AFT/ALB on a standard network controller and
an optional LAN board.
Restriction on Teaming among Onboard LANs
When teaming is configured among onboard LANs, the following system event log appears when Windows starts. You
can ignore this message and continue operation.
source: iANSMiniport
event IDs: 11/13/16/22
9-24
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
Non-hot-plug PCI Boards
This section describes the procedure for installing or removing a non-hot-plug PCI board.
Installation
Install a board in a PCI board slot as follows.
IMPORTANT:
„
PCI board slots #6 to #9 can accept 3.3V and universal PCI boards.
„
PCI board slots #1 and #2 can accept 5V and universal PCI boards.
NOTES:
1.
„
Before installing the PCI board, make sure that the terminal section of the board mates
with the connector of the PCI board slot.
„
Insulators are installed between the PCI board slots. They are for protecting the PCI
board already been installed. Take care not to remove or damage the insulator when
installing or removing a PCI board. If the insulator is taken off, reinstall the insulator in
place.
See the section "Preparing for Installation and Removal" described earlier to prepare.
IMPORTANT: To avoid damage to the system and devices, always turn off the system
before installing a non-hot swap board.
2.
Remove the rear access cover.
3.
Locate the slot to install a board.
4.
Press the retention tab at the tip of the additional slot cover to unlock and open the tab.
IMPORTANT: Do not open the retention tab to 90 degrees or more. Doing so could
damage the tab.
1
2
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
5.
Remove the blank plate.
IMPORTANT: Keep the blank plate being removed for future use.
6.
Align the board with the grooves of the guide rail, and insert the board slowly and gently.
7.
Carefully push the board until it engages and fully seats in the slot connector.
IMPORTANT: If the board cannot be installed easily, remove the board once and then
reinstall it. Excess force added to the board may cause the board to be broken.
NOTES:
„
After installed a long board, secure it with the lock on the upper part of the guide rail.
„
Insulators are installed between the PCI board slots. They are for protecting the PCI
board already installed. Take care not to remove or damage the insulator when installing
or removing a PCI board. If the insulator is taken off, reinstall the insulator in place.
9-25
9-26
8.
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
Slowly close the tab to secure the PCI board.
NOTE: Make sure that the tab is firmly locked. If the tab is unlocked, the PCI board
and/or I/O board may be damaged due to unstable PCI board.
9.
10.
Reinstall the removed components.
Turn on the power of the server. Then make sure that any error message does not appear in POST.
If an error message appears, write down the message and review the error message list in Chapter 8.
11.
Start the BIOS Setup Utility to set the "Reset Configuration Data" in the "Advanced" menu to "Yes."
This is required to update the hardware configuration information. See Chapter 4 for details.
Removal
Remove the board in the reverse procedure of the installation.
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
9-27
Hot-plug PCI Board
On the PCI board slots #6 through #9, you can replace or add a hot-plug PCI board while the server is operating.
Only the 100BASE-TX Adapter, the 100BASE-TX Adapter and the 1000BASE-T Adapter support the Hot-plug PCI
function.
The PCI hot-plug function includes the following functions:
„
Hot Add
Use Hot Add to install a Hot Plug PCI board while the server is operating.
„
Hot Remove
Use Hot Remove to remove a Hot Plug PCI board while the server is operating.
„
Hot Replace
Use Hot Replace to replace a Hot Plug PCI board while the server is operating.
IMPORTANT:
„
„
Before removing a PCI board, be sure to stop the driver of the slot (containing the PCI board)
from the operating system (Windows Server 2003). Failure to do so may cause the system to
fail.
For Windows Server 2003 server, do not use a function in inactive state after executing the PCI
Hot-plug function. The system fails to return to the original state when a function in inactive
state is restarted.
Use the BIOS Setup utility to set the following before executing the PCI Hot Plug function:
Select [Advanced] → [PCI Configuration] → [Hot-plug PCI Control] → [Reserving memory
space for PHP] → Select memory space for installed board*1.
*1
The memory capacity appears to be less than the actually installed memory capacity.
„
To execute the PCI Hot-plug function, be sure to log in the system as Administrator.
„
The board available for the hot add varies depending on the clock rate previously set by PCI
slots #6 and #7 or #8 and #9. If a PCI board operating at a different clock rate is subject to the
hot addition, the PCI slot fault lamp goes on and the hot plug cannot be performed correctly.
However, restarting the system allows BIOS to ignore the setting value and automatically
operate the system with the optimum setting.
Requirements for Hot Add
„
No boards installed in the same bus
Verify the available slot according to "List of Optional Devices and their Available Slots", and then hot-add
the PCI card.
„
PCI boards installed on the same bus
Provide Hot Add for PCI boards operating at the same clock.
9-28
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
Status Lamps
Two LEDs on the back panel indicate the status of the hot-plug PCI add-in boards. You can check the indication by
lamps on the I/O board.
„
PCI slot Power lamp (green)
Lights when power is supplied normally to the PCI board installed.
„
PCI slot Fault lamp (amber)
Lights when an error occurs on PCI board or the slot containing the PCI board.
Flashes when the driver is stopped from Windows Server 2003 for Hot Remove or Hot Replace.
PCI slot Fault lamp
PCI slot Power lamp
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
9-29
Hot Add
Take the following procedure to execute Hot Add:
1.
Remove the rear access cover from the server with the power being on.
2.
Locate the slot in which you are going to install an additional board.
NOTE: Confirm that the PCI Slot Power lamp of the slot in which you are going to install
the PCI board is off.
3.
Push the tab at the tip of the additional slot cover of the slot in which you are going to install the PCI board to
unlock the tab. Open the tab.
IMPORTANT: Do not open the retention tab to 90 degrees or more. Doing so could
damage the tab.
1
2
4.
Remove the slot cover.
IMPORTANT: Keep the removed slot cover for future use.
9-30
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
5.
Push the PCI board slowly and carefully into the slot.
6.
Push the PCI board until the connection part of the board is firmly connected into the slot.
IMPORTANT: If failing to install the PCI board correctly, reinstall it. Be careful not to
apply excess force to the PCI board when handling it. Applying excess force may cause
damage to the PCI board.
NOTES:
„
After installed a long board, secure it with the lock on the upper part of the guide rail.
„
Insulators are installed between the PCI board slots. They are for protecting the PCI
boards already installed. Take care not to remove or damage the insulator when
installing or removing the PCI board. If the insulator is taken off, reinstall the insulator
in place.
7.
Connect the cables to the PCI board while firmly holding the PCI board with your hand.
8.
Slowly close the tab to secure the PCI board.
9.
Press the PCI Hot Plug switch. The PCI Slot Power lamp flashes once and then, goes on.
NOTES:
„
If the server runs on Windows Server 2003, the operating system automatically
recognises the additionally installed PCI board and installs the driver.
„
If an error occurred in the installed board or slot, the PCI Slot Fault lamp goes on
(amber).
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
10.
Reinstall the rear access cover.
11.
Check if the additionally installed PCI board is recognised and working properly as follows:
9-31
(1) Select [Control Panel], [Administrative Tools], [Computer Management], and [Device Manager] in the
order to start the Device Manager.
(2) Move the cursor to the added board.
(3) Click the [General] tab to display the property to confirm that the device is working properly.
* The message in the "property" depends on the location of the PCI board slot.
9-32
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
Hot Remove
Use the following procedure to execute Hot Remove:
1.
Stop the device driver used by the Hot-plug PCI board you want to remove as follows:
IMPORTANT: Before removing a PCI board, be sure to stop the driver of the slot
(containing the PCI board) from the operating system. Failure to do so may cause the
system to fail.
To stop the device driver from the operating system window:
(1)
Open [Add/Remove Hardware] in [Control Panel].
The [Add/Remove Hardware Wizard] starts.
(2)
Click [Next].
(3) Select [Uninstall/Unplug a device] for hardware task, then click [Next].
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
(4)
Select [Unplug/Eject a device] for removal task, then click [Next].
(5) Select the target device, then click [Next].
(6) Confirm that the driver is used by the device you want to remove, then click [Next].
The [Add/Remove Hardware Wizard] closes.
9-33
9-34
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
(7)
Click [Finish].
(8)
Remove the rear access cover and locate the slot from which the board has to be removed.
NOTE: Confirm that the PCI Slot Power lamp of the target PCI slot is off.
To stop the device driver using the PCI hot-plug switch:
(1)
Remove the rear access cover and confirm the slot to remove the PCI board.
(2)
Press the PCI hot-plug switch on the slot from which the PCI board is to be removed.
NOTE: Confirm that the PCI Slot Power lamp of the target PCI slot is off.
2.
Disconnect all the cables from the PCI board.
3.
Push the tab to unlock it, slowly open the tab, then remove the PCI board.
IMPORTANT: Do not open the retention tab to 90 degrees or more. Doing so could
damage the tab.
Tab
Lock (for long card)
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
4.
Install a slot cover on the slot from which you removed the PCI board, then slowly close the tab.
IMPORTANT: To maintain the dust-proofing and electromagnetic radiation
characteristics and cooling performance of the server, be sure to install the blank plate on
the slot from which you removed the PCI board.
5.
Reinstall the rear access cover.
9-35
9-36
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
Hot Replace
Use the following procedure to execute a Hot Replace:
1.
Stop the device driver used by the Hot Plug PCI board you want to replace as follows:
IMPORTANT: Before removing a PCI board, be sure to stop the driver of the slot
(containing the PCI board) from the operating system. Failure to do so may cause the
system to fail.
To stop the device driver from the operating system window:
(1)
Open [Add/Remove Hardware] in [Control Panel].
The [Add/Remove Hardware Wizard] starts.
(2)
Click [Next].
(3)
Select [Uninstall/Unplug a device] for hardware task, then click [Next].
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
(4)
Select [Unplug/Eject a device] for removal task, then click [Next].
(5)
Select the target device, then click [Next].
(6)
Confirm that the driver is used by the device you want to remove, then click [Next].
The [Add/Remove Hardware Wizard] terminates.
9-37
9-38
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
(7)
Click [Finish].
(8)
Remove the rear access cover and locate the board to be removed.
NOTE: Confirm that the PCI Slot Power lamp of the target PCI slot is off.
2.
Disconnect all the cables from the PCI board.
3.
Push the tab to unlock it, slowly open the tab, then remove the PCI board.
IMPORTANT: Do not open the retention tab to 90 degrees or more. Doing so could
damage the tab.
Tab
Lock (for long card)
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
4.
Slowly insert the PCI board into the server.
5.
Push the PCI board until the connection part of the board is firmly connected into the slot.
IMPORTANT: If failing to install the PCI board correctly, reinstall it. Be careful not to
apply excess force to the PCI board when handling it. Applying excess force may cause
damage to the PCI board.
NOTES:
„
After installed a long board, secure it with the lock on the upper part of the guide rail.
„
Insulators are installed between the PCI board slots.
They are for protecting the PCI boards already installed. Take care not to remove or
damage the insulator when installing or removing the PCI board. If the insulator is taken
off, reinstall the insulator in place.
6.
Connect the cables to the PCI board while firmly holding the PCI board with your hand.
7.
Slowly close the tab to secure the PCI board.
8.
Press the PCI hot plug switch.
The PCI Slot Power lamp flashes once, and then goes on.
NOTES:
„
If the server runs on Windows Server 2003, the operating system automatically
recognises the installed PCI board and installs the driver.
„
If an error occurred in the installed board or slot, the PCI Slot Fault lamp goes on
(amber).
9-39
9-40
9.
10.
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
Reinstall the PCI slot cover.
Check if the installed PCI board is recognised and working properly as follows:
(1) Select [Control Panel], [Administrative Tools], [Computer Management], and [Device Manager] in the
order to start the Device Manager.
(2) Move the cursor to the added board.
(3) Display the [General] dialog in the property to confirm that the device is working properly.
* The message in the "property" depends on the location of the PCI board slot.
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
„
Notes when removing the PCI slot insulators
Be careful that the insulator does not make contact with the capacitor of the PCI-Express slot.
9-41
9-42
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
Memory Board
To install or remove a DIMM, remove the memory board first.
One memory board is factory-installed in the server. Up to four memory boards (64 GB maximum) can be installed in
the server.
The failing DIMM or memory board can be hot-swapped (replacement with power-on state) in the memory RAID
configuration. For hot-swap memory board, see "Memory Hot-Plug Feature 1 (Hot Replace)" and "Memory Hot-Plug
Feature 2 (Hot Add)" described later in this chapter.
Memory board slot #3
(for additional memory
board)
Memory board slot #4
(for additional memory
board)
Memory board slot #2
(for additional memory
board)
Memory board slot #1
(for factory-installed
memory board)
Memory board installation order: #2 → #3 → #4
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
9-43
Removal
Remove the memory board as follows:
IMPORTANT:
„
The memory board is extremely sensitive to static electricity. Make sure to touch the
metal frame of the server to discharge static electricity from your body before handling
the memory board. Do not touch the memory board terminals or on-board parts by a
bare hand or place the memory board directly on the desk. For static notes, see the
section "Anti-static Measures" described earlier.
„
The memory board becomes very hot while being powered. When removing the board,
turn off the power and wait for several minutes before pulling it out.
1.
See the section "Preparing for Installation and Removal" described earlier to prepare.
2.
Unlock the front door with the security key, and open the front door.
3.
Remove the two screws, and remove the memory slot cover from the front of the server.
4.
Unlock the memory board to open the ejector.
The memory board becomes very hot while being powered. When removing the board, turn off the power and
wait for several minutes before pulling it out.
Note that the hot-plug memory board is off-powered when it is unlocked (the LED goes off). Wait several
minutes in this state.
9-44
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
5.
Hold the ejector and pull the memory board out from the server.
6.
Put the memory board on a dry, clean, and static-free place.
Installation
Install the memory board in reverse order of the removal steps.
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
DIMM
Install an additional DIMM (Dual Inline Memory Module) in a DIMM socket on the memory board in the server.
DIMMs are installed on the sockets in the ascending order of DIMM socket numbers in the unit of two modules.
NOTE: Up to 16 GB of memory (4 GB DIMM × 4) can be installed.
DIMM slot 4
DIMM slot 3
DIMM slot 2
DIMM slot 1
* DIMM specification is shown on the label attached to the DIMM as follows:
Example: Frequency of 400 MHz, buffered, capacity of 1GB, row
address of 14 bits, column address of 11 bits, and
single rank
2-400 / B / 1024 / R14 C11 S
Single rank
Column address
Row address
Capacity
Buffered / Registered
Frequency
IMPORTANT: The last digit character indicates the symbol representing either of single
rank (S) or dual rank (D).
If DIMMs of single rank and dual rank are installed on the same memory board, be sure to
install the DIMM of dual rank in DIMM Group #1 (DIMM slots 1 and 2). Otherwise, the
system will fail to start.
9-45
9-46
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
Installation
Install a DIMM as follows:
IMPORTANT:
„
The DIMM is extremely sensitive to static electricity. Make sure to touch the metal
frame of the server to discharge static electricity from your body before handling the
DIMM. Do not touch the DIMM terminals or on-board parts by a bare hand or place the
DIMM directly on the desk. For static notes, see the section "Anti-static Measures"
described earlier.
„
Make sure to use a DIMM authorised by us. Installing a third-party DIMM may cause a
failure of the DIMM as well as the server. Repair of the server due to failures or damage
resulting from installing such a board will be charged.
„
Install two additional DIMMs for each group because the server uses interleaved
memory. If DIMMs of different specifications* are installed in a group, the server does
not operate normally.
* DIMM specification is shown on the label attached to the DIMM as follows:
Example: Frequency of 400 MHz, buffered, capacity of 1GB, row
address of 14 bits, column address of 11 bits, and
single rank
2-400 / B / 1024 / R14 C11 S
Single rank
Column address
Row address
Capacity
Buffered / Registered
Frequency
„
A dummy tray is installed in the additional memory board slot. If you remove the
dummy tray, keep it for future use.
1.
See the section "Preparing for Installation and Removal" described earlier to prepare.
2.
Unlock the front door with the security key, and open the front door.
3.
Remove the memory slot cover, and remove the memory board on which the DIMMs are to be installed.
See "Memory Board" described earlier in this chapter.
NOTE: To additionally install a memory board, remove one screw to remove the blank
cover from the additional slot.
IMPORTANT: Keep the removed blank cover for future use.
4.
Locate the DIMM sockets in which you are going to install DIMMs.
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
5.
9-47
Fully open the levers at both ends of the socket (1) and remove the socket cover.
IMPORTANT:
6.
„
To avoid damaging the lever, do not apply an excess force to the lever.
„
Keep the removed blank cover for future use.
Push the DIMM straight into the socket (2).
NOTE: Make sure of the orientation of DIMM. The terminal side of the DIMM has a
cut-out to prevent incorrect insertion.
The levers automatically close when the DIMM is inserted into the socket (3).
IMPORTANT: Always install the DIMMs in pair. Two DIMMs must be of the same
specification. DIMM specification is shown on the label attached to the DIMM as follows:
Example: Frequency of 400 MHz, buffered, capacity of 1GB, row
address of 14 bits, column address of 11 bits, and
single rank
2-400 / B / 1024 / R14 C11 S
Single rank
Column address
Row address
Capacity
Buffered / Registered
Frequency
7.
Install the memory board back into the chassis slot.
8.
Install the memory slot cover.
9.
Power on the server and verify that POST displays no error messages.
If POST displays an error message, take a note on the message and see the POST error messages listed in
Chapter 8.
10.
Start the SETUP and select [Advanced] → [Memory Configuration] to verify that the installed DIMM shows
the status "Normal". (See Chapter 4 for details.)
11.
Select "Yes" for [Reset Configuration Data] on the [Advanced] menu.
This setting is required to change the hardware configuration data. See Chapter 4 for details.
12.
If Windows Server 2003 is in use, set the paging file size to the recommended value (total memory size * 1.5)
or a greater value. See Chapter 5 for details.
9-48
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
Removal
Remove a DIMM as follows:
IMPORTANT: The DIMM is extremely sensitive to static electricity. Make sure to touch
the metal frame of the server to discharge static electricity from your body before handling
the DIMM. Do not touch the DIMM terminals or on-board parts by a bare hand or place the
DIMM directly on the desk. For static notes, see the section "Anti-static Measures"
described earlier.
NOTE: To remove the failed DIMM, check the error message appearing in POST or NEC
ESMPRO to identify the DIMM socket (group) in which the failed DIMM is installed.
1.
See the section "Preparing for Installation and Removal" described earlier to prepare.
2.
Unlock the front door with the security key, and open the front door.
3.
Remove the memory slot cover, and then remove the memory board on which the DIMMs to be removed are
installed.
NOTE: The error lamp corresponding to the failing DIMM goes on.
4.
Open the levers at both sides of the socket from which you remove the DIMM. (1).
The DIMM is unlocked and ready for removal. (2)
5.
Install the memory board.
6.
Install the memory slot cover.
7.
Power on the server and verify that POST displays no error messages.
If POST displays an error message, take a note on the message and see the POST error messages listed in
Chapter 8.
8.
Start the SETUP and select [Advanced] → [Memory Configuration] → [Memory Retest] → [Enabled] to
clear the error information of the removed DIMM. Then select [Server] → [Clear FRU LED] → [Yes] to turn
off the LED indicating DIMM error. (See Chapter 4 for details.)
9.
Select "Yes" for [Reset Configuration Data] on the Advanced menu.
This setting is required to change the hardware configuration data. See Chapter 4 for details.
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
9-49
Memory Mirroring / Memory RAID Feature
Memory Mirroring Feature
The memory mirroring feature places a memory board as spare memory in standby state. If the current memory board
encounters an uncorrectable error, the memory mirroring feature switches to the standby memory board. When this
feature is used, the current memory board and the standby memory board should be combined. Available combinations
are:
„
Mirroring with memory boards 1 and 2
„
Mirroring with a pair of memory boards 1 and 2 and a pair of memory boards 3 and 4
To enable the memory mirroring feature, the combined memory boards must have DIMMs of same capacities.
The table below shows combinations of memory boards installed.
Memory board 1
2 GB (1 GB*2)
8 GB (2 GB*4)
4 GB (1 GB*4)
16 GB (4 GB*4)
A
B
C
D
Memory board 2
2 GB (1 GB*2)
8GB (2 GB*4)
4 GB (1 GB*4)
16 GB (4 GB*4)
Memory board 3
2 GB (1 GB*2)
8 GB (2 GB*4)
–
16 GB (4 GB*4)
Memory board 4
2 GB (1 GB*2)
8 GB (2 GB*4)
–
16 GB (4 GB*4)
Memory RAID Feature
If one of the four memory boards encounters an uncorrectable error, the memory RAID feature switches to the other
memory board to continue operation. To use this feature, four memory boards must be installed. Each memory board
must have DIMMs of same capacities.
The table below shows combinations of memory boards installed.
Memory board 1
2 GB (1 GB*2)
8 GB (2 GB*4)
4 GB (1 GB*4)
16 GB (4 GB*4)
A
B
C
D
Memory board 2
2 GB (1 GB*2)
8 GB (2 GB*4)
4 GB (1 GB*4)
16 GB (4 GB*4)
Memory board 3
2 GB (1 GB*2)
8 GB (2 GB*4)
4 GB (1 GB*4)
16 GB (4 GB*4)
Memory board 4
2 GB (1 GB*2)
8 GB (2 GB*4)
4 GB (1 GB*4)
16 GB (4 GB*4)
Setting BIOS
Start SETUP and select [Advanced] → [Memory Configuration] → [Memory RAS Feature] and set as follows:
„
To enable the memory mirroring feature: Select [Mirror].
„
To enable the memory RAID feature: Select [RAID].
9-50
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
Others
„
Memory capacity displayed on the operating system = total capacity of physically installed memory –
capacity for standby memory
Memory mirroring feature: 1/2 of actually installed memory capacity
Memory RAID feature: 3/4 of actually installed memory capacity
„
Enabling the memory mirroring or memory RAID feature does not influence the operations of applications.
„
Each feature is automatically disabled when an error message is displayed:
The following indicates that the memory mirroring /memory RAID feature has worked:
a) The Redundancy lamp on the front panel of the server lights green.
b) The failing DIMM group is degraded when the server restarts.
c) If NEC ESMPRO Agent has been installed, the following log is registered as a system log of Event
Viewer:
Source name:
ESMCommonService
Event ID:
2313
Explanation:
Part of the DIMM was isolated due to a memory error.
Memory number: XX
Date/time:
XX
d) If report setting is made through NEC ESMPRO Agent, Manager reporting and ALIVE reporting is
performed. The report contents are as follows:
Explanation:
Part of the DIMM was isolated due to a memory error.
Memory number: XX
Date/time:
XX
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
9-51
Memory Hot-Plug Feature 1 (Hot Replace)
In the memory redundant configuration such as memory mirroring and memory RAID configuration, the memory board
can be removed while the operating system is running.
1.
See the section "Preparing for Installation and Removal" described earlier to prepare.
2.
Unlock the front door with the security key, and open the front door.
3.
Remove the two screws and then remove the memory slot cover.
4.
Press the Attention switch corresponding to the memory board to be removed.
The memory board power lamp and the memory board redundancy lamp for that board go off.
9-52
5.
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
Make sure that the memory board power lamp goes off, then remove the memory board.
IMPORTANT: The memory board becomes very hot while being powered. When
removing the board, turn off the power and wait for several minutes before pulling it out.
Note that the hot-plug memory board is off-powered when it is unlocked (the LED goes
off). Wait several minutes in this state.
6.
Hold the ejector and pull the memory board out from the server.
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
7.
9-53
To set back the memory boards in redundant configuration, install the memory boards in reverse order of
removal procedure. Then, press the Attention switch on the memory board. The memory board Power lamp
starts flashing, and after a while, it goes on. The Memory Board Redundancy lamp goes on.
IMPORTANT: To set back the memory boards in redundant configuration, be sure to
install the boards so that they can have redundancy
This completes Hot Replace of memory board.
9-54
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
Memory Hot-Plug Feature 2 (Hot Add)
In Windows Server 2003 Enterprise Edition or Windows Server 2003 R2 Enterprise Edition, you can use the Hot-Add
memory feature. The Hot Add feature allows you to add a physical memory without shutting down the system.
To use the Hot-Add memory feature, set the BIOS as follows:
Setting BIOS
Start SETUP and select [Advanced] → [Memory Configuration] → [Memory RAS Feature] in order and set as follows:
„
To enable the Hot-Add memory feature in normal mode: Select [Normal].
„
To enable the Hot-Add memory feature in mirroring mode: Select [Mirror].
NOTE: Before selecting [Mirror], the mirroring configuration must have been set for
memory boards 1 and 2. In this case, the memory hot plug is used for memory boards 3 and
4. (Memory boards 3 and 4 must also be in mirroring configuration.)
In addition, be sure to specify [Advanced] → [Memory Configuration] → [Hot-add
Memory Support] to "Enabled".
„
Hot-Add memory feature in normal mode
When the operating system starts with memory board 1 (factory-installed), installing memory boards on
which DIMMs are installed to memory board slots 2, 3, and 4 can increase the physical memory capacity. See
Memory Hot-Plug Feature 1 for memory board installing procedure.
For example, if you insert a memory board into memory board slot 2 and press the Attention switch of that
slot, the memory board Power lamp starts flashing and initialisation of memory is started.
When the memory board Power lamp stops flashing and goes on, the operating system is notified that the
memory has been added.
The notification is processed on the operating system. After a while, you can view the added physical memory
in performance monitor of task manager. Memory boards can be added to slots 3 and 4 in a similar procedure.
„
Hot-Add memory feature in mirroring mode
Add the memory boards 3 and 4 while the memory boards 1 and 2 are configured to use the mirroring feature.
In this case, memory boards 3 and 4 must be configured to use the mirroring feature. See Memory Hot-Plug
Feature 1 for memory board installing procedure.
The only difference with normal mode is that the memory board is added to slot 3, and there is no change in
system status. Adding a memory board to memory board slot 4 can make the memory mirroring configuration.
And it is notified to the operating system. After a while, you can view the added physical memory in
performance monitor of task manager.
You can confirm that a half of installed physical memory capacity is added. In memory mirroring
configuration, the memory board additionally installed by using the Hot-Add memory feature can be
hot-replaceable.
„
Indication on NEC ESMPRO Data Viewer after Hot-Add Memory
If you add a memory board dynamically by using Hot-Add feature, the added memory size will not be
indicated on Data Viewer of NEC ESMPRO Manager unless the system is rebooted.
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
Processor Board
To install or remove a processor, remove the processor board.
Removal
Remove the processor board as follows:
IMPORTANT: The processor board is extremely sensitive to static electricity. Make sure
to touch the metal frame of the server to discharge static electricity from your body before
handling the processor board. Do not touch the processor board terminals or on-board parts
by a bare hand or place the processor board directly on the desk. For static notes, see the
section "Anti-static Measures" described earlier.
1.
See the section "Preparing for Installation and Removal" described earlier to prepare.
2.
Unlock the front door with the security key, and open the front door.
3.
Remove the memory board cover.
4.
Remove the two screws and then remove the processor board cover.
9-55
9-56
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
5.
Remove the two screws securing the ejectors.
6.
Unlock the processor board and open the ejectors.
7.
Firmly hold the processor board and pull it out from the chassis.
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
NOTE: Notes when removing the processor board
The processor board is very heavy (max. 7 kg). Pay attention not to drop it.
8.
Put the processor board on a dry, clean, and static-free place.
Installation
Install the processor board in reverse order of the removal steps.
9-57
9-58
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
Processor
The processor board is equipped with sockets to install four processors and corresponding Voltage Regulator Modules
(VRMs). (At least, one processor and one VRM are factory-installed.)
Processor VRM #1
Processor VRM #3
Processor VRM #2
Processor VRM #4
Processor #3
Processor #1
Processor #2
Processor #4
NOTE: If different revisions of processors are installed in a multiprocessor system,
Windows logs the following information every start-up. If this message is logged, it is no
problem for operation.
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
9-59
Installation
Install a processor as follows:
IMPORTANT:
„
The processor is extremely sensitive to static electricity. Make sure to touch the metal
frame of the server to discharge static electricity from your body before handling the
processor. Do not touch the processor pins by a bare hand or place the processor directly
on the desk. For static notes, see the section "Anti-static Measures" described earlier.
„
When using the server in the single processor configuration, processor must be installed
on Processor #1 socket.
„
Install the processor in the ascending order of the processor number (see figure above).
„
To maintain the cooling effect in the server, install a dummy cover to the empty slot.
1.
See the section "Preparing for Installation and Removal" described earlier to prepare.
2.
Unlock the front door with the security key, and open the front door.
3.
Remove the memory slot cover.
4.
Remove the processor slot cover.
5.
Remove the processor board.
6.
Locate the processor socket in which you are going to install the processor, remove two screws, then remove
the dummy cover from the socket.
7.
Remove the protective cover from the socket surface.
8.
Raise the locking lever on the socket.
IMPORTANT: Open the lever until it stops. It can be opened to approximately 120
degrees.
9-60
9.
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
Put the processor on the socket slowly and gently.
NOTE: Make sure of the orientation of the processor. Pin layouts on two corners among
four differ from others to prevent an incorrect insertion. Confirm the pin mark and pin
layout on the socket, and insert the processor correctly.
Pin mark
10.
Push the processor lightly to the socket, and push down the lever to secure the processor.
11.
Remove the cooling sheet from the bottom of the heat sink, and put the heat sink on processor.
NOTE: You do not need to care of the direction of heat sink.
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
12.
Tighten the four screws to secure the heat sink.
13.
Make sure that the heat sink is level.
IMPORTANT: If the heat sink is not level, remove it, and check if the processor is
positioned correctly.
14.
Fully open the levers on both sides of the VRM socket.
15.
Push the VRM straight into the socket.
When the VRM is inserted into the socket, the lever automatically closes. Push the lever toward inside to
securely close the lever.
NOTE: Make sure of the orientation of the VRM. The terminal side of VRM has a cut-out
to prevent the incorrect insertion.
16.
Install the components you removed previously.
9-61
9-62
17.
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
Start SETUP and select "Yes" for [Reset Configuration Data] on the Advanced menu.
This setting is required to change the hardware configuration data. See Chapter 4 for details.
18.
To add one or more processors to the server in 1-processor configuration to operate the server with more than
one processor, do the procedure below:
For Windows Server 2003, change the driver of [Computer] in the device manager to [ACPI multi-processor
PC] and then update the system (see Chapter 5).
Removal
To remove the processor, prepare the removal referring to steps 1 to 5 of the installation procedure and do the reverse
procedure of steps 8 to 12.
IMPORTANT:
„
Do not remove any processor unless it is failed.
„
To maintain the cooling effect in the server, a dummy cover is installed in the empty slot.
Be sure to install a dummy cover on the slot where the processor is not installed.
„
After the operation, heat may make the cool seat at the bottom of the heat sink adhere to
the processor. To remove the heat sink from the processor, first turn the heat sink to the
left and right lightly to make sure that the heat sink can be set apart from the processor.
Removing the heat sink with it adhering to the processor may cause the processor
and/or socket to be damaged.
Do as follows if a processor is removed (or replaced):
1.
Start SETUP, select menus "Main" – "Processor Settings" – "Processor Retest" in order to clear the error
information on the removed processor (see Chapter 4).
When a processor is replaced, select menus "Main" – "Processor Settings" to confirm that the ID and L2 and
L3 Cache of the additional processor are defined correctly (see Chapter 4).
2.
Select "Yes" for [Reset Configuration Data] on the Advanced menu.
This is required to update the hardware configuration information. See Chapter 4 for details.
Appendix A
Specifications
Item
Model type at shipment
Type
Processor
Clock
2nd cache
3rd cache
Number of
processors
Maximum
Chipset
Standard
Maximum
Expansion unit
Expansion times
Memory module
Error check
Memory
Memory mirroring
feature
Online sparing
memory feature
Memory
Hot-add/Hot-replace
feature
Memory RAID
feature
Graphics (VRAM)
Floppy disk
(standard)
Hard disk
Auxiliary input
(standard)
device
Hard disk
(maximum)
DVD-ROM
(standard)
5.25-inch device bay
3.5-inch disk bay
PCI-X 100MHz
(64-bit)
Additional slot
PCI 33MHz (32-bit)
PCI EXPRESS(x8)
PCI EXPRESS(x4)
LAN interface
LAN interface (A-RMC)
Bull NovaScale T880
Diskless
64-bit Intel® Xeon™ Processor MP
Dual-core Intel® Xeon™ Processor 7000
series
3.16 GHz
3.66 GHz
3.0 GHz
2.6 GHz
3.4 GHz
1 MB
1 MB
2*2MB
1x2 MB
1x2MB
None
None
4 MB
16 MB
1
4
Intel TwinCastle (8501) + ICH5 + Brockton + PXH
2 GB (1 GB×2)
64 GB (The standard DIMMs must be replaced.)
2 DIMMs
Maximum 8 times (2 times per each memory board)
DDR2 400 SDRAM DIMM (Registered)
ECC
Supported
ATI® Radeon® 7000M (VRAM 16MB)
–
–
732.5 GB (146.5 GB x 5) + 1172 GB (146.5 GB x 8, Additional HDD cage is
required)
ATAPI Interface × 1 (Load on tray type, x3-8 speed)
2 slots (Full height x1)
Up to 13 slots (Hot-swappable, Additional HDD cage is required)
4 slots (Hot-swappable)
2 slots
2 slots (Hot-swappable)
1 slot
1000BASE-T/100BASE-TX/10BASE-T (2 port)
100BASE-TX/10BASE-T (1 port, dedicated for server management)
A-2
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
Item
Keyboard
Mouse
USB
External
interface
Serial
Parallel
Network
Display
SCSI
Cabinet design
External dimensions
Weight
Power supply
Power consumption
Environmental Temperature
requirements Humidity
Others
Bull NovaScale T880
MINI DIN 6-pin connector (1 port)
MINI DIN 6-pin connector (1 port)
4-pin (3 ports; front: 1 (USB1.1), rear: 2 (USB2.0))
D-sub 9-pin (2 ports, rear), RJ-45 (1 port, front (exclusively used with either port on
the rear panel))
D-sub 25-pin (1 port)
RJ-45 (2 ports and 1 management port)
MINI D-sub 15-pin (1 port)
–
Middle-Tower
310 (width) × 456 (height) × 805 (depth) mm
75 kg (Max.)
100 to 127 Vac ±10%, 200 to 240 Vac ±10%, 50/60 Hz ±1Hz
1800 VA
10 to 35°C
20 to 80% RH (no condensation)
EXPRESSBUILDER supported, NEC ESMPRO provided in the standard
configuration
Appendix B
Other Precautions
Transfer Rate of the On-board LAN Controller
The LAN controller on the IO board has two ports. Each port supports 10Base-T, 100Base-TX, and 1000Base-T
networks and a capable of full or half duplex.
The controller can automatically detect and switch for network speed and transfer mode connected to the HUB.
However, for proper network operation, specify the "Link Speed & Duplex" value the same as the value specified for
the HUB.
Server Management Software
The EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM that comes with the server contains the NEC ESMPRO utility.
We recommend that you should install NEC ESMPRO for effective use of the reliability enhancement features of the
server.
Floppy Disk
The following describes use of the floppy disk.
Floppy disk type
The server uses 3.5-inch floppy disks. You can use the following two types of 3.5-inch floppy disks:
„
„
2HD floppy disk (double-sided high-density track type)
Stores data of 1.44 MB.
2DD floppy disk (double-sided double-density track type)
Stores data of 720 KB.
Shutter
Insertion direction
indicator
Catching hole
Head window
Centering hub
Label
Centering hole
High-density media hole
(2HD only)
Write protection
hole
Front
Write protection switch
Rear
B-2
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
Notes on use
The floppy disk is an important data storage media with delicate structure and requires care. Keep the following notes in
mind to use it:
„
Insert the floppy disk into the floppy disk drive gently as far as it goes.
„
Attach the label to the correct position.
„
Do not write anything directly onto the disk surface with a pencil or ball-point pen.
„
Do not open the shutter.
„
Do not use the floppy disk in a dusty place.
„
Do not place anything on the floppy disk.
„
Do not leave the floppy disk in a high-temperature place (e.g., place exposed to direct sunlight or close to a
heater).
„
Do not leave the floppy disk with foods and drinks, or in a place exposed to cigarette smoke.
„
Do not leave the floppy disk near any form of liquid or a chemical or in a place where a chemical may be
accidentally sprayed over them.
„
Do not place any magnetic objects (e.g., magnet) near the floppy disk.
„
Do not clip the floppy disk or drop it.
„
Keep the floppy disk in a floppy disk case that protects it from magnetism and dust.
„
Write-protection
A floppy disk has a write-protect switch that prevents the stored data from accidental erasure.
You can read data from a write-protected floppy disk, but you cannot save data into the floppy disk or format
it. We recommend that you should write-protect any floppy disk containing valuable data unless you are about
to save data.
To write-protect a 3.5-inch floppy disk, use the write-protect switch provided on its back.
„
Disk format
To write data into a floppy disk, the floppy disk must be "formatted." "Formatting" is to initialise the floppy
disk and make it available for the system environment (operating system).
IMPORTANT:
„
Formatting a used floppy disk clears all the data contained in it, if any.
„
Formatting a floppy disk from the DOS command line is not available with the server.
Use a formatted floppy disk to work with it on the DOS command line.
The format method depends on your operating system. Refer to the manual that comes with your operating
system for details.
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
„
B-3
Data backup
"Data backup" is to copy data stored in a media into another media (e.g., floppy disk, digital audio tape, or
magnet-optical disk).
IMPORTANT: Make sure to make a back-up copy of every floppy disk, if provided.
The floppy disk is a very delicate storage media. Dust or thermal changes, as well as operator's misconduct or
sever failures, may cause loss of data. To avoid loss of data, we recommend that you should make a back-up
copy of your valuable data on a regular basis.
CD/DVD-ROM
Keep the following notes in mind to use the CD/DVD-ROM for the server:
„
Press the centre of the storage case to remove the CD/DVD-ROM from the case.
„
Do not drop the CD/DVD-ROM.
„
Do not place anything on the CD/DVD-ROM or bend the CD/DVD-ROM.
„
Do not attach any label onto the CD/DVD-ROM.
„
Do not touch the signal side (nothing is printed on this side) with your hand.
„
Place the CD/DVD-ROM with its printed side upward and gently put it on the tray.
„
Do not scratch the CD/DVD-ROM or write anything directly on it with a pencil or ball-point pen.
„
Do not leave the CD/DVD-ROM with foods and drinks, or in a place exposed to cigarette smoke.
„
Do not leave the CD/DVD-ROM in a high-temperature place (e.g., place exposed to direct sunlight or close to
a heater).
„
When dust or fingerprints are attached on the CD/DVD-ROM, wipe the CD/DVD-ROM from its centre to
edge with a dry soft cloth slowly and gently.
„
Use CD/DVD cleaner to clean the CD/DVD-ROM. Do not use record spray/cleaner, benzene, or thinner.
„
Keep the CD/DVD-ROM in a CD/DVD-ROM case when not in use.
Tape Media
The following describes data handling with the DAT, DLT, or AIT optionally available for the server.
„
Saving your valuable data
When you save your valuable data or programs into the cartridge tape, you should save them into two
cartridge tapes to make the primary and secondary tapes.
This enables you to restore your data from one tape when the other makes a read error, as well as to protect
your valuable data and programs from loss.
„
Three-generation data management
We recommend that you should employ three-generation data management for data storage.
Three-generation data management uses three cartridge tapes: A, B, and C. You save data to tape A on the first
day, tape B on the second day, tape C on the third day, tape A on the forth day, and so on. That is, you save
data into cartridge tapes cyclically from tape A through C.
This enables you, for example, to use tape B to restore the data when tape C makes a read error. Also when
both tapes B and C make a read error, you can restore your valuable data by using the data stored in tape A.
B-4
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
Keyboard
The keyboard is a device to instruct you computer by entering alphanumeric characters or symbols.
IMPORTANT:
„
Do not pour any liquid such as water or put anything into the keyboard. Doing so may
cause a failure of the keyboard.
„
The keyboard provided with the server is designed for adjustment of an angle. Adjust
the keyboard angle at which the keyboard is easy to operate. The adjustment assists in
reducing strain on your shoulders, arms, and fingers.
NOTE: The keyboard functions depend on the software. Refer to the manual that comes
with the software for details.
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
B-5
Mouse
Like the keyboard, the mouse is a device to instruct your computer. Many operating systems and application software
require the mouse for operation.
NOTE:
„
Functions assigned to the mouse buttons vary depending on the software. For details,
refer to the manual provided with the software.
„
Use the mouse on a clean desk. Using the mouse on a dusty or dirty desk disturbs
smooth movement or normal operation of the mouse. When your mouse movement
seems dull, clean your mouse. (See Chapter 7.)
Mouse operation includes "Click," "Double-click," and "Drag."
Click:
Press the button only once and release it.
Double-click:
Press the button twice consecutively and release it.
Drag:
Press and hold the button and move the mouse.
Operation of the server involves combinations of these mouse operations and data entries with the keyboard.
Click
Pressing
Click
Click
Click
Double-click
Drag
B-6
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
This page is intentionally left blank
Appendix C
IRQ and I/O Port Address
The factory-set interrupt requests and I/O port addresses are listed below. Find an appropriate one to install an optional
device.
Interrupt Request
The factory-set IRQs are assigned as follows:
IRQ
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Peripheral Device (Controller)
System timer
Keyboard
Cascaded connection
COM B serial port (PCI)
COM A serial port (PCI)
PCI/LPT2 parallel port
Floppy disk
LPT1 parallel port
IRQ
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Peripheral Device (Controller)
Real-time clock
PCI/SCI
PCI
BMCIRQ/PCI
Mouse
Numeric processor
Primary IDE (DVD-ROM drive)
PCI
C-2
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
PIRQ and PCI Device
The factory-set PCI device interrupts are assigned as follows. You can change these interrupts by using the BIOS
SETUP, however, use the factory-set interrupts as they are. See Chapter 4 for details.
USB#1
USB#2
USB20
IDE (native mode)
SMBus
VGA
RAID
LAN
PCISlot#1 (PCI)
PIRQ1
√
PCI Slot#9 (PCI-X)
PIRQ4
PIRQ5
PIRQ8
√
√
√
INTA
INTA
INTA
INTB
INTA
INTA
INTA
INTB
INTD
INTB
INTA
INTA
PCI Slot#7 (PCI-X)
PCI Slot#8 (PCI-X)
PIRQ3
√
PCISlot#2 (PCI)
PCI Slot#3(PCI-EXPRESS)
PCI Slot#4 (PCI-EXPRESS)
PCI Slot#5 (PCI-EXPRESS)
PCI Slot#6 (PCI-X)
PIRQ2
INTB
INTB
INTB
INTB
INTC
INTC
INTC
INTA
INTC
INTB
INTD
INTA
INTC
INTD
INTD
INTD
INTA
INTC
INTB
INTD
INTA
INTC
INTB
INTD
INTC
INTD
INTC
INTD
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
I/O Port Address
The factory-set I/O port addresses for the server are assigned as follows:
Addresses
00-08h
09-0Eh
0Fh
10-18h
19-1Eh
1Fh
20-21h
24-25h
28-29h
2C-2Dh
2E-2Fh
30-31h
34-35h
38-39h
3C-3Dh
40-42h
43h
4E-4Fh
50-52h
53h
60h
61h
62h
63h
64h
65h
66h
67h
70h
71h
72h
73h
74h
75h
76h
77h
80-91h
92h
93-9Fh
A0-A1h
A4-A5h
A8-A9h
AC-ADh
B0-B1h
B2-B3h
B4-B5h
B8-B9h
BC-BDh
C0-D1h
C2-DDh
DE-DFh
F0h
102h
170h-177h
Description
DMA Control Registers
RESERVED
DMA Control Register
DMA Control Register
RESERVED
DMA Control Register
Master 8259 Programming Interface
Master 8259 Programming Interface
Master 8259 Programming Interface
Master 8259 Programming Interface
Configuration Registers
Master 8259 Programming Interface
Master 8259 Programming Interface
Master 8259 Programming Interface
Master 8259 Programming Interface
8254 Programming Interface
RESERVED
Configuration Registers
8254 Programming Interface
RESERVED
Keyboard/Mouse
NMI Status Register
NMI Status Register
Keyboard/Mouse
NMI Status Register
NMI Status Register
RESERVED
RTC (data)
RTC (data)
RTC (data)
RTC (data)
RTC (data)
RTC (data)
RTC (data)
16-bit DMA Control Registers
Port 92 Register
DMA Control Register
Slave 8259 Programming Interface
Slave 8259 Programming Interface
Slave 8259 Programming Interface
Slave 8259 Programming Interface
Slave 8259 Programming Interface
Power Management
Slave 8259 Programming Interface
Slave 8259 Programming Interface
Slave 8259 Programming Interface
DMA Controller Page Registers
RESERVED
DMA Controller Page Registers
Reset IRQ13
VGA
Secondary IDE Command Block Registers
Chip
ICH5
ICH5
ICH5
ICH5
ICH5
ICH5
ICH5
ICH5
ICH5
ICH5
PC87417
ICH5
ICH5
ICH5
ICH5
ICH5
ICH5
PC87417
ICH5
ICH5
PC87417
ICH5
PC87417
ICH5
PC87417
ICH5
PC87417
ICH5
ICH5
ICH5
ICH5
ICH5
ICH5
ICH5
ICH5
ICH5
ICH5
ICH5
ICH5
ICH5
ICH5
ICH5
ICH5
ICH5
ICH5
ICH5
ICH5
ICH5
ICH5
ICH5
ICH5
ICH5
Radeon7000M
ICH5
C-3
C-4
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
Addresses
1F0h-1F7h
278-27Fh
2F8-2FFh
376h
370-377h
378-37Fh
3B0-3BBh
3BC-3BEh
3C0-3CFh
3D4-3D5h
3F6h
3F0-3F7h
3F8-3FFh
40Bh
4D0h
4D1h
CF9h
Description
Primary IDE Command Block Registers
(Parallel Port 3)
Serial port 2
Secondary IDE Control Block Registers
(Floppy disk 2), IDE 2
(Parallel Port 2)
VGA
Parallel port 1
VGA
VGA
Primary IDE Control Block registers
Floppy disk 1,IDE 1
Serial port 1
DMA1 Extended Write Mode Register
Master 8259 ELCR Programming
Slave 8259 ELCR Programming
Turbo and Reset Control
Chip
ICH5
PC87417
PC87417
ICH5
PC87417
PC87417
Radeon7000M
PC87417
Radeon7000M
Radeon7000M
ICH5
PC87417
PC87417
ICH5
ICH5
ICH5
TwinCastle
*1
Hexadecimal notation
*2
The I/O port address of a PCI device is set according to its type and number.
Appendix D
Installing Windows Server™ 2003 x64 Editions
This section describes the procedures for installing Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions without using Express Setup
tool.
BEFORE INSTALLING WINDOWS SERVER 2003 X64 EDITIONS
Please read carefully the following information BEFORE beginning your Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition
Installation.
Optional Boards Supported by EXPRESSBUILDER
EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM attached to your system supports the following optional boards:
NOTE: If you want to install other boards by using a driver floppy disk ("OEM-FD for
Mass storage device") than the ones listed below, see "Exceptional setup" and "Installing
Optional Mass Storage Driver" of "Configuration Diskette Creator" in Chapter 6.
„
Supporting installation of the operating system in EXPRESSBUILDER
– LSI Logic MegaRAID™ SAS PCI EXPRESS™ ROMB (Controller on the I/O board)
– SecuRAID321 Disk Array Controller (SCSI 2ch)
„
Other optional boards
– Adaptec 29160LP SCSI Controller
Updating System
If you modified the Windows system, execute "Update the System" in Master Control Menu.
Re-installing to the Hard Disk Which Has Been Upgraded to Dynamic Disk
If you want to leave the existing partition when installing the system on the hard disk upgraded to Dynamic Disk, note
the following issue:
„
Do not select the partition where the operating system had been installed as the partition to install the
operating system newly.
„
Select "Use the current File System" for the format of the operating system partition.
MO Device
If you specify the file system as NTFS with MO Device connected during the installation, the file system will not be
converted normally. Disconnect MO Device and restart the installation from the beginning.
D-2
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
Media such as DAT
During the operating system installation, do not attach unnecessary media for operating system installation to the
system, such as DAT.
Partition Size
The size for the partition that the system is to be installed can be calculated from the following formula.
Size necessary to install the system + Paging File Size + Dump File Size + Application Size
Size necessary to install the system = 4100 MB
Paging File Size (Recommended) = Mounted Memory Size × 1.5
Dump file Size
= Mounted Memory Size + 1 MB
Application Size
= Required Size
IMPORTANT:
„
The above-mentioned paging file size is recommended for collecting debug information
(memory dump). The paging file with initial size large enough to store the dump file in
the boot drive is required.
Correct debug information might not be able to be collected due to virtual memory
shortage when the paging file is insufficient, so set the paging file size large enough for
the entire system.
„
Regardless of the size of the mounted memory, or the Write debugging information
(type of memory dump), the maximum size of the dump file is 'The size of the mounted
memory + 1 MB'.
„
If you install any application program, add necessary space to the partition to install
these programs.
For example, if the mounted memory size is 512 MB, the partition size will be calculated by the above formula as
follows:
4100 MB + (512 MB * 1.5) + (512 MB + 1 MB) + Application Size = 5381 MB + Application Size
Dividing into the partition of the recommended size into multiple disks as written below will solve problem that it
cannot be reserved in one disk.
1.
Set the "Size required for installation + Paging file size".
2.
See Chapter 5 and set that debugging information (equivalent to the dump file size) is to be written to a
separate disk.
(If the disk does not have enough free space to enable the dump file size to be written, then after installing the
system using the "Size required for installation + Paging file size," install an additional new disk.)
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
D-3
INSTALLING WINDOWS SERVER™ 2003 X64 EDITIONS
Preparations for Installation
„
EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM
„
Microsoft® Windows Server™ 2003 Standard x64 Edition (CD-ROM)
„
Microsoft® Windows Server™ 2003 Enterprise x64 Edition (CD-ROM)
„
User's Guide
„
Getting Started
„
Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition OEM-DISK for EXPRESSBUILDER
Creating "Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition OEM-DISK for EXPRESSBUILDER"
Before installing, create Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition OEM-DISK for EXPRESSBUILDER.
NOTE: If you have already "Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition OEM-DISK for
EXPRESSBUILDER" for Bull NovaScale Server which you are going to install Windows
Server 2003 x64 Editions, you do not need to create it again.
You can create Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition OEM-DISK for EXPRESSBUILDER with the following two
procedures:
„
Create from the menu which appears when running Bull NovaScale Server with EXPRESSBUILDER.
If you have only Bull NovaScale Server to create Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition OEM-DISK for
EXPRESSBUILDER, use this procedure.
If Windows Server 2003 or Windows NT 4.0 can be operated on Bull NovaScale Server, you can use the other
procedure described later.
Follow the steps below:
1.
Prepare one 3.5-inch floppy disk.
2.
Turn on your Bull NovaScale Server.
3.
Insert the EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM into the DVD-ROM drive of the server.
4.
Press the RESET switch or press Ctrl, Alt and Delete to reboot the server. (You may also turn off and then
on again to reboot the server.)
The system will boot from the CD-ROM and EXPRESSBUILDER starts.
5.
Select [Create Support Disk] from [Tools].
6.
Select [Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition OEM-DISK for EXPRESSBUILDER] from [Create Support Disk]
menu.
7.
Insert a floppy disk into the floppy disk drive according to the on-screen instruction.
Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition OEM-DISK for EXPRESSBUILDER will be created.
Write-protect and attach a label, then keep it in a safe place.
„
Create from [Master Control Menu]
[Master Control Menu] runs on the following operating systems.
– Windows Server™ 2003 x64 Editions
– Windows Server™ 2003
– Windows® XP x64 Edition
D-4
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
– Windows® XP
– Windows® 2000
– Windows® Me/98/95
– Windows NT® 4.0
You can create Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition OEM-DISK for EXPRESSBUILDER from [Master
Control Menu], if you have a computer on which one of the above operating systems operates.
Follow the steps below:
1.
Prepare one 3.5-inch floppy disk.
2.
Run Windows Me/98/95, or Windows 2000, Windows Server 2003, Windows NT 4.0, Windows XP.
3.
Insert the EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM into the DVD-ROM drive of the server.
[Master Control Menu] will appear.
4.
Click [Setup] with left mouse button and click [Make OEM-DISK] and then [for Windows Server 2003 x64
Edition].
NOTE: You can do the same operation with the menu displayed by a Right-click.
5.
Insert the floppy disk into the floppy disk drive according to the message.
Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition OEM-DISK for EXPRESSBUILDER will be created.
Write-protect and attach a label, then keep it in a safe place.
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
D-5
Windows Server™ 2003 x64 Editions Clean Installation
This section explains how to perform a clean installation of Windows Server™ 2003 x64 Editions.
1.
Turn on the system power.
2.
Insert the Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition CD-ROM into the DVD-ROM drive.
3.
Press Ctrl + Alt + Delete to reset the system.
After a bootable operating system has been installed on the hard disk, press Enter while the message "Press
any key to boot from CD..." is displayed at the top of the screen.
If no bootable operating system exists on the hard disk, this step is unnecessary.
The Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions setup screen will appear.
If the screen is not displayed, Enter was not pressed properly.
Begin after turning on the system power again.
4.
Press F6 in a few seconds when the window is in either of the following states.
– "Setup is inspecting your computer's hardware configuration ..." is displayed.
– A screen with a solid blue background is displayed.
IMPORTANT: There is no visible indication on screen when F6 has been pressed.
5.
When the following message is displayed, press S.
Setup could not determine the type of one or more mass storage devices
installed in your system, or you have chosen to manually specify an adapter.
Currently, Setup will load support for the following mass storage device(s).
The following message is displayed.
Please insert the disk labeled
manufacturer-supplied hardware support disk
into Drive A:
*Press ENTER when ready.
6.
Insert the Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition OEM-DISK for EXPRESSBUILDER into the floppy disk drive,
and press Enter.
A list of mass storage devices is displayed.
7.
Select the proper SCSI Adapter and press Enter.
– LSI Logic MegaRAID SAS RAID Controller Driver (Server 2003 for x64)
(When LSI Logic MegaRAID™ SAS PCI EXPRESS™ ROMB is installed.)
– MegaRAID SCSI 320-2 RAID Controller Driver (When the SecuRAID 321 board is installed.)
Continue performing tasks according to the subsequent messages that appear.
8.
When the following message is shown, press Enter to start "Welcome to Setup".
D-6
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
9.
10.
When the installation of Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition has finished, the system reboots automatically.
The [Windows Setup] screen will be displayed after logged on to the system.
IMPORTANT:
11.
„
In this case, the [Windows setup] screen may not be displayed.
Be sure to install Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 x64 Edition DISC 2 according to
the following procedures.
„
You can install Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 x64 Edition DISC 2 after the
application of "System update".
Be sure to install Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 x64 Edition DISC 2.
In this case, note that the [Windows setup] screen is not displayed.
Insert Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 x64 Edition DISC 2 CD-ROM into the DVD-ROM drive.
Confirm the parameters and click [OK].
12.
When the installation has completed, remove Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 x64 Edition DISC 2
CD-ROM from the DVD-ROM drive, and restart the system.
After installation is completed, be sure to execute the tasks described in "Driver Installation and Advanced Settings"
and "Updating the System" of this manual.
Procedure for License Authentication
Product Key used in the procedure for license authentication should be matched with the COA label in which the
product key contained in Windows Server 2003 is written.
NOTES:
„
Execute the activation within 30 days. System may be locked after 30 days is passed.
„
COA label may be attached to your server.
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
Updating the System
To ensure normal system operation you should update your system using the following procedures.
1.
Logon to the system using the administrator account or another account which is a member of the
Administrators group.
2.
Insert the EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM into the DVD-ROM drive.
Master Control Menu is automatically displayed on the screen.
3.
Click [Setup] with left mouse button and click [Update Bull NovaScale system] section.
4.
Continue your work for system update as the following message.
5.
Click [Restart Computer] to restart the system.
6.
Remove the EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM from the DVD-ROM drive immediately after clicking on
[Restart Computer]
IMPORTANT: If you change the configuration of the system (by adding or removing
hardware or Operating system software components) or repair the system, you must run the
system update again.
D-7
D-8
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
DRIVER INSTALLATION AND ADVANCED SETTINGS
This section describes how to install and setup various standard drivers mounted on the device.
For information on installing and setting up a driver that is not described in this section, please refer to the document
attached to the driver.
PROSet
PROSet is a utility that confirms the function of network contained in network driver.
Utilizing PROSet enables the following items:
„
Confirm detailed information of the adapter.
„
Diagnose loop back test, packet transmission test and so on.
„
Setup of teaming.
Configuring several network adapters as one team provides the server a tolerant environment on any trouble and
enhances throughput between the switches.
PROSet is necessary to use these features.
Follow the procedure below to install PROSet:
1.
Insert the EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM into the DVD-ROM drive.
2.
The [Windows Explorer] dialog starts.
* Procedure with the standard start menu
Click Start and click [Windows Explorer].
* Procedure with the classic start menu
Click Start, point to [Programs], [Accessories] and click [Windows Explorer].
3.
Run "DXSETUP.EXE" in the following directory:
DVD-ROM DriveLetter:\WINNT\W2K3AMD\NS4\PROSET\WS3XPX64
The [Intel(R) PROSet - Install Shield Wizard] dialog starts.
4.
Click [Next].
5.
Choose "I accept the terms in the license agreement" and click [Next].
6.
Click [Install].
7.
When [Install Shield Wizard Completed] window is displayed, click [Finish].
8.
Restart the system.
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
D-9
Network Driver
Specifying the details of network driver.
One standard network driver that is mounted will be installed automatically, but the link speed and Duplex mode need
to be specified manually.
[When PROSet is not installed]
1.
The [Local Area Connection Properties] dialog box appears.
* Procedure with the standard start menu
1. Click Start, [Control Panel], [Network Connections], and click[Local Area Connection].
* Procedure with the classic start menu
1. Click Start, [Settings] and click [Network Connections].
The [Network Connections] dialog box appears.
2. Right-click [Local Area Connection] and click [Properties] from drop down menu.
2.
Click [Configure].
The property dialog box for network adapter is displayed.
3.
Click [Advanced] and specify [Link Speed & Duplex] value the same as the value specified for the HUB.
4.
Click [OK] on the property dialog box for network adapter.
[When PROSet is installed]
1.
Open the [Device Manager]
2.
Double-click [(Network Adapter Name)] in the list.
3.
Click [Link] and specify [Link Speed & Duplex Settings] value the same as the value specified for the HUB.
4.
Click [OK].
Also, add or delete any protocols and services if necessary.
You can operate the process on the property dialog box for local area network which can be appeared from [Network
and Dial-up Connection].
NOTE: We recommend you to add [Network Monitor] at [Adding Services]. [Network
Monitor] can monitor the frame (or the packet) that the computer installing [Network
Monitor] sends or receives. This tool is valuable when analyzing network trouble. For
information on how to install the tool, see the "Setting for Solving Problems" described
later in this chapter.
Optional Network Board Driver
Optional Network Board Driver (INTEL PRO/1000 PT - Intel Pro/1000 MT Dual - Intel Pro/1000
XT – Intel Pro/1000 MF)
If you want to utilize optional Network Board, install the network driver stored in EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM.
In case of utilizing Intel Pro/1000 PT - Intel Pro/1000 MT Dual – Intel Pro/1000 MF – Intel Pro/1000 XT
"DVD-ROM Drive Letter:\WINNT\W2K3AMD\NS4\PRO1000\WS3XPX64
If the procedure of installation is not clear, refer to the installation procedure described in the section "Installation of the
Optional Network Board Driver".
D-10
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
Installation of the Optional Network Board Driver
1.
Start Device Manager.
2.
Click [Network adapters] and double-click [(Network Adapter Name)].
[(Network Adapter Name) Properties] appears.
NOTE: [(Intel (R) PRO/1000...)] is the name of On-Board adapter. All other names show
the Optional Network Board.
3.
Click the [Driver] tab and click [Update Driver...].
[Hardware Update Wizard] appears.
4.
Select the [Install from a list or specific location (Advanced)] radio button and click [Next].
5.
Select the [Search for the best driver in these locations] radio button and check off the [Search removable
media (floppy, CD-ROM...)] check box.
6.
Check the [Include this location in the search] check box and specify :
– [DVD-ROM driveletter:\WINNT\W2K3AMD\NS4\PRO1000\WS3XPX64]
when using [Intel Pro/1000 PT - Intel Pro/1000 MT Dual – Intel Pro/1000 MF – Intel Pro/1000 XT]
Then click [Next].
7.
Click [Finish].
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
D-11
Graphics Accelerator Driver
The standard graphics accelerator driver installed by "Update Bull NovaScale system" is automatically installed.
The following is the procedure when it is necessary to install it manually.
If you want to use an optional Graphics Accelerator Driver board, follow the document attached to the board to install
the driver.
1.
Insert the EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM into the DVD-ROM drive.
2.
Click Start, point to [Programs], [Accessories] and click [Windows Explorer].
3.
Run "Setup.exe" in the following directory.
<DVD-ROM Drive Letter>:\WINNT\W2K3AMD\VIDEO\SETUP.EXE.
4.
Follow the message to continue the installation.
If the dialog message "Digital Signature could not been found." appears, select [Yes] to continue.
5.
Remove the EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM from the DVD-ROM drive, follow the on-screen instructions
and restart the system.
Installing SCSI Controller Driver (Adaptec 29160LP)
The SCSI controller driver will be installed automatically.
Installing Disk Array Controller Driver (SecuRAID 321)
To additionally install the SecuRAID 321 in a system containing Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition, connect the
controller and install the driver as follows:
1.
Start [Device Manager] from [Start] menu → [Control Panel] → [Administrative Tools] → [Computer
Management].
2.
Double-click [LSI Logic Megaraid SCSI 320-2] which Device Manager lists.
3.
Click the [Driver] tab and click [Update Driver...].
4.
When the "Update Device Driver Wizard" is displayed, select "Install from a list or specific location
[Advanced]" and click [Next].
5.
Select the "Search for the best driver in these locations." and check the "Search removable media [floppy,
CD-ROM...]" check box.
6.
Insert "Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition OEM-DISK for EXPRESSBUILDER" into the floppy disk drive,
and click [Next].
7.
Copying of the driver is completed, and the [Completing the Hardware Update Wizard] dialog box is
displayed. Click [Finish].
D-12
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
About Windows Activation
Windows Server 2003 must be activated before you can use Windows Server 2003.
Windows activation process is as follows.
NOTE: When you use Windows Server 2003 R2, activation process is not needed.
1.
Click [Run] on [Start] menu.
Type as follows in the [Open:] box, and click [OK].
oobe/msoobe /a
2.
When the screen as follows is displayed, click [Next].
The following screen is displayed.
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
3.
Process "Windows activation" according to the following message.
SETTING FOR COLLECTING MEMORY DUMP
(DEBUG INFORMATION)
Set for collecting memory dump using the procedure described in Chapter 5.
D-13
D-14
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
This page is intentionally left blank
Appendix E
Installing Windows Server™ 2003
This section describes the procedures for installing Windows Server™ 2003 without using Express Setup tool.
BEFORE INSTALLING Windows Server™ 2003
Please read carefully the following information BEFORE commencing your Windows Server™ 2003 Installation.
Optional Boards Supported by EXPRESSBUILDER
EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM attached to your system supports the following optional boards:
NOTE: If you want to install other boards by using a driver floppy disk ("OEM-FD for
Mass storage device") than the ones listed below, see "Exceptional setup" and "Installing
Optional Mass Storage Driver" of "Configuration Diskette Creator" in Chapter 6.
„
Supporting installation of the operating system in EXPRESSBUILDER
– LSI Logic MegaRAID™ SAS PCI EXPRESS™ ROMB (Controller on the I/O board)
– SecuRAID 321 Disk Array Controller (SCSI 2ch)
„
Other optional boards
– Adaptec 29160LP SCSI Controller
Installing Service Pack
You can install the Service Pack on the server. When the Service Pack is not shipped with your system, prepare it by
yourself.
When using Windows Server 2003 with this equipment, surely apply ServicePack 1.
When installing Windows Server 2003 R2, it is not necessary to apply Service Pack 1.
Updating System
If you modified the Windows system, execute "Update the System" in Master Control Menu.
Re-installing to the Hard Disk Which Has Been Upgraded to Dynamic Disk
If you want to leave the existing partition when installing the system on the hard disk upgraded to Dynamic Disk, note
the following issue:
„
Do not select the partition where the operating system had been installed as the partition to install the
operating system newly.
„
Select "Use the current File System" for the format of operating system partition.
E-2
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
MO Device
If you specify the file system as NTFS with MO Device connected during the installation, the file system will not be
converted normally. Disconnect MO Device and restart the installation from the beginning.
Media such as DAT
During the operating system installation, do not attach unnecessary media for operating system installation to the
system, such as DAT.
About the Upgrade to Windows Server 2003 R2
The "in-place upgrade" from Windows Server 2003 to Windows Server 2003 R2 is not recommended because it may
overwrite any files or registries, and cause unexpected impact to the system or the applications.
If you install Windows Server 2003 R2, backup user data referring "Windows Server 2003 Clean Installation", and
reinstall Windows Server 2003 R2.
NOTE: "in-place upgrade" is to perform overwrite upgrade from Windows Server 2003
which already installed to Windows Server 2003 R2.
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
E-3
Partition Size
The size for the partition that the system is to be installed can be calculated from the following formula.
Size necessary to install the system + Paging File Size + Dump File Size + Application Size
Size necessary to install the system = 3500 MB (Windows Server 2003 R2)
3500 MB (Windows Server 2003 with Service Pack1)
4400 MB (Windows Server 2003 + Service Pack1 CD-ROM)
Paging File Size (Recommended) = Mounted Memory Size * 1.5
Dump File Size
= Mounted Memory Size + 12 MB
Application Size
= Required Size
IMPORTANT:
„
The above-mentioned paging file size is recommended for collecting debug information
(memory dump). The paging file with initial size large enough to store the dump file in
the boot drive is required.
Correct debug information might not be able to be collected due to virtual memory
shortage when the paging file is insufficient, so set the paging file size large enough for
the entire system.
„
The maximum paging file size which can be set on one partition is 4095 MB. If the
above paging file size exceeds 4095 MB, specify 4095 MB for the paging file size.
„
The maximum dump file size for the system with more than 2 GB memory mounted is
'2048 MB + 12 MB'.
„
If you install any application program, add necessary space to the partition to install
these programs.
For example, if the mounted memory size is 512 MB, the partition size will be calculated by the above formula as
follows:
3500 MB + (512 MB * 1.5) + (512 MB + 12 MB) + Application Size = 4792 MB + Application Size
Dividing the recommended storage space size over multiple disks as written below will solve problem of the size of the
partition on a single disk.
1.
Set the "Size required for installation + Paging file size" as the system partition size.
2.
Specify that debugging information (equivalent to the dump file size) must be written to a separate disk. See
Chapter 5 for more information on the procedure.
(If the disk does not have enough free space to enable the file size to be written, then after installing the
system using the "Size required for installation + Paging file size," install an additional new disk.)
E-4
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
INSTALLING Windows Server 2003
Preparations for Installation
„
EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM
„
Microsoft® Windows Server™ 2003 Standard Edition (CD-ROM) or Microsoft® Windows Server™ 2003
Enterprise Edition (CD-ROM) , Microsoft® Windows Server™ 2003 R2 Standard Edition (CD-ROM) /
Microsoft® Windows Server™ 2003 R2 Enterprise Edition (CD-ROM)
„
User's Guide
„
Getting Started
„
Windows Server 2003 OEM-DISK for EXPRESSBUILDER
„
Windows Server 2003 Service Pack (CD-ROM)
Creating "Windows Server 2003 OEM-DISK for EXPRESSBUILDER"
Before installing, create Windows Server 2003 OEM-DISK for EXPRESSBUILDER.
NOTE: If you have already "Windows Server 2003 OEM-DISK for EXPRESSBUILDER"
for Express5800 Server which you are going to install Windows Server 2003, you do not
need to create it again.
You can create Windows Server 2003 OEM-DISK for EXPRESSBUILDER with the following two procedures:
„
Create from the menu which appears when running Bull NovaScale Server with EXPRESSBUILDER.
If you have only Bull NovaScale Server to create Windows Server 2003 OEM-DISK for EXPRESSBUILDER,
use this procedure.
If Windows Server 2003 or Windows NT 4.0 can be operated on Bull NovaScale Server, you can use the other
procedure described later.
Follow the steps below:
1.
Prepare one 3.5-inch floppy disk.
2.
Turn on your Bull NovaScale Server.
3.
Insert the EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM into the DVD-ROM drive of the server.
4.
Press the RESET switch or press Ctrl, Alt and Delete to reboot the server. (You may also turn off and then
on again to reboot the server.)
The system will boot from the CD-ROM and EXPRESSBUILDER starts.
5.
Select [Create Support Disk] from [Tools].
6.
Select [Windows Server 2003 OEM-DISK for EXPRESSBUILDER] from [Create Support Disk] menu.
7.
Insert a floppy disk into the floppy disk drive according to the on-screen instruction.
Windows Server 2003 OEM-DISK for EXPRESSBUILDER will be created.
Write-protect and attach a label, then keep it in a safe place.
„
Create from [Master Control Menu]
[Master Control Menu] runs on the following operating systems.
– Windows Server™ 2003 x64 Editions
– Windows Server™ 2003
– Windows® XP x64 Edition
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
E-5
– Windows® XP
– Windows® 2000
– Windows® Me/98/95
– Windows NT® 4.0
You can create Windows Server 2003 OEM-DISK for EXPRESSBUILDER from [Master Control Menu], if
you have a computer on which one of the above operating systems operates.
Follow the steps below:
1.
Prepare one 3.5-inch floppy disk.
2.
Run Windows Me/98/95, or Windows 2000, Windows Server 2003, Windows NT 4.0, Windows XP.
3.
Insert the EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM into the DVD-ROM drive of the server.
[Master Control Menu] will appear.
4.
Click on [Setup] with left mouse button and click [Make OEM-DISK] and then [for Windows Server 2003].
NOTE: You can do the same operation with the menu displayed by a right-click.
5.
Insert the floppy disk into the floppy disk drive according to the message.
Windows Server 2003 OEM-DISK for EXPRESSBUILDER will be created.
Write-protect and attach a label, then keep it in a safe place.
E-6
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
Windows Server 2003 Clean Installation
This section explains how to perform a clean installation of Windows Server 2003.
1.
Turn on the system power.
2.
Insert the Windows Server™ 2003 CD-ROM into the DVD-ROM drive.
3.
Press Ctrl + Alt + Delete to reset the system.
After a bootable operating system has been installed on the hard disk, press Enter while the message "Press
any key to boot from CD..." is displayed at the top of the screen.
If no bootable operating system exists on the hard disk, this step is unnecessary.
The Windows Server 2003 setup screen will be displayed.
If the screen is not displayed, Enter was not pressed properly.
Restart after turning on the system power again.
4.
Press F6 in a few seconds when the window is in either of the following states.
– "Setup is inspecting your computer's hardware configuration ..." is displayed.
– A screen with a solid blue background is displayed.
IMPORTANT: There is no visible indication on screen when F6 has been pressed.
5.
When the following message is displayed, press S.
Setup could not determine the type of one or more mass storage devices
installed in your system, or you have chosen to manually specify an adapter.
Currently, Setup will load support for the following mass storage device(s).
The following message is displayed.
Please insert the disk labelled
manufacturer-supplied hardware support disk
into Drive A:
*Press ENTER when ready.
6.
Insert the Windows Server 2003 for EXPRESSBUILDER into the floppy disk drive, and press Enter.
A list of mass storage devices is displayed.
7.
Select the proper SCSI Adapter and press Enter.
– LSI Logic MegaRAID SAS RAID Controller Driver (Server 2003 32-bit)
(When LSI Logic MegaRAID™ SAS PCI EXPRESS™ ROMB is installed.)
– LSI MEGARAID Products for Windows 2003 (x86)
(When SecuRAID 321 board is installed.)
Continue performing tasks according to the subsequent messages that are displayed.
8.
When the following message is shown, press Enter to start "Welcome to Setup".
9.
When the installation of Windows Server 2003 has finished, the system reboots automatically.
– Windows Server 2003 has installed: Go on the step 13.
– Windows Server 2003 R2 has installed: Go on the step 10.
10.
When Windows Server 2003 R2 has been installed, the [Windows Setup] screen will be displayed after logged
on to the system.
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
E-7
IMPORTANT:
11.
„
In this case, the [Windows setup] screen may not be displayed.
Be sure to install Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 DISC 2 according to the
following procedures.
„
You can install Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 DISC 2 after the application of
"System update".
Be sure to install Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 DISC 2.
In this case, note that the [Windows setup] screen is not displayed.
Insert Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 DISC 2 CD-ROM into the DVD-ROM drive.
Confirm the parameters and click [OK].
12.
When the installation has completed, remove Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 DISC 2 CD-ROM from the
DVD-ROM drive, and restart the system.
13.
When the installation has completed, be sure to execute the tasks described in "Driver Installation and
Advanced Settings" and "Updating the System" of manual.
Procedure for License Authentication
Product Key used in the procedure for license authentication should be matched with the COA label in which the
product key contained in Windows Server 2003 is written.
NOTES:
„
Execute the activation within 30 days. System may be locked after 30 days is passed.
„
COA label may be attached to your server.
E-8
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
Updating the System - Applying Service Pack IMPORTANT: If you install Windows Server 2003 CD-ROM which contains Service
Pack 1 to your system, you do not have to apply Service Pack 1 again.
To ensure normal system operation you should update your system using the following procedures.
1.
Logon to the system using the administrator account or another account which is a member of the
Administrators group.
2.
Insert the EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM into the DVD-ROM drive.
Master Control Menu is automatically displayed on the screen.
3.
Click [Setup] with left mouse button and click [Update Express5800 system] section.
4.
Continue your work for system update as the following message.
5.
Click [OK] to restart the system.
6.
Remove the EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM from the DVD-ROM drive immediately after clicking [OK]
IMPORTANT: If you change the configuration of the system (by adding or removing
hardware or Operating system software components) or repair the system, you must run the
system update again.
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
E-9
DRIVER INSTALLATION AND ADVANCED SETTINGS
This section describes how to install and setup various standard drivers mounted on the device.
For information on installing and setting up a driver that is not described in this section, please refer to the document
attached to the driver.
PROSet
PROSet is a utility that confirms the function of network contained in network driver.
Utilizing PROSet enables the following items:
„
Confirm detailed information of the adapter.
„
Diagnose loop back test, packet transmission test and so on.
„
Setup of teaming.
Configuring several network adapters as one team provides the server a tolerant environment on any trouble and
enhance throughput between the switches.
PROSet is necessary to use these features.
Follow the procedure below to install PROSet.
1.
Insert the EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM into the DVD-ROM drive.
2.
The [Windows Explorer] dialog starts.
* Procedure with the standard start menu
Click Start and click [Windows Explorer].
* Procedure with the classic start menu
Click Start, point to [Programs], [Accessories] and click [Windows Explorer].
3.
Run "PROSET.EXE" in the following directory:
<DVD-ROM Drive Letter>:\WINNT\DOTNET\NS4\PROSET\2KXPWS03
The [Intel(R) PROSet - InstallShield Wizard] dialog starts.
4.
Click [Next].
5.
Choose "I accept the terms in the license agreement" and click [Next].
6.
Choose "Typical" and click [Next].
7.
Click [Install].
8.
When [InstallShield Wizard Completed] window is displayed, click [Finish].
9.
Restart the system.
E-10
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
Network Driver
Specifying the details of network driver.
Two standard network drivers that are mounted will be installed automatically, but the link speed and Duplex mode
need to be specified manually.
[When PROSet is not installed]
1.
The [Local Area Connection Properties] dialog box is displayed.
* Procedure with the standard start menu
1. Click Start, Click [Control Panel], Click [Network Connections], and Click [Local Area Connection].
* Procedure with the classic start menu
1. Click Start, [Settings] and click [Network Connections].
The [Network Connections] dialog box is displayed.
2. Right-click [Local Area Connection] and click [Properties] from drop down menu.
2.
Click [Configure].
The property dialog box for network adapter is displayed.
3.
Click [Advanced] and specify [Link Speed & Duplex] value the same as the value specified for the HUB.
4.
Click [OK] on the property dialog box for network adapter.
[When PROSet is installed]
1.
The [Intel PROSet] dialog box appears.
* Procedure with the standard start menu
Click Start, point to [Control Panel] and click [Intel PROSet].
* Procedure with the classic start menu
1. Click Start, point to [Settings] and click [Control Panel].
2. Double-click [Intel(R) PROSet] on the [Control Panel] window.
2.
Click [(Network Adapter Name)] in the list.
3.
Click [Speed] and specify [Link Speed & Duplex Settings] value the same as the value specified for the HUB.
4.
Click [Apply] and click [OK].
Specify the other network driver the same as above.
Also, add or delete any protocols and services if necessary.
You can operate the process on the property dialog box for local area network which can be displayed from [Network
and Dial-up Connection].
NOTE: We recommend you add "Network Monitor" at "Adding Services".
"Network Monitor" can monitor frames (or packets) sent or received by a computer on
which "Network Monitor" is installed. This is an effective tool for analyzing network faults.
For information about the installation procedure, see Chapter 6.
Re-install the Network Driver
The network driver will be installed automatically.
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
E-11
Installing SCSI Controller Driver (Adaptec 29160LP)
If you use SCSI controller driver (Adaptec 29160LP), update your system with EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM
attached to your system.
The SCSI controller driver will be installed automatically.
Installing Disk Array Controller Driver (SecuRAID 321)
To additionally install the SecuRAID 321 in a system containing Windows Server 2003, connect the controller and
install the driver as follows:
1.
Start [Device Manager] from [Start] menu → [Control Panel] → [Administrative Tools] → [Computer
Management].
2.
Double-click [LSI Logic Megaraid SCSI 320-2] which Device Manager lists.
3.
Click the [Driver] tab and click [Update Driver...].
4.
When the "Update Device Driver Wizard" appears, select "Install from a suitable list or specific location
[Advanced]" and click [Next].
5.
Select the "Search for the best driver in these locations." and check the "Search removable media [floppy,
CD-ROM...]" check box.
6.
Insert "Windows Server 2003 OEM-DISK for EXPRESSBUILDER" into the floppy disk drive, and click
[Next].
7.
Copying of the driver is completed, and the [Completing the Hardware Update Wizard] dialog box is
displayed. Click [Finish].
E-12
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
About Windows Activation
Windows Server 2003 must be activated before you can use Windows Server 2003.
Windows activation process is as follows.
NOTE: When you use Windows Server 2003 R2, activation process is not needed.
4.
Click [Run] on [Start] menu.
Type as follows in the [Open:] box, and click [OK].
oobe/msoobe /a
5.
When the screen as follows is displayed, click [Next].
The following screen is displayed.
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
6.
Process "Windows activation" according to the following message.
E-13
E-14
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
Available Switch Options for Windows Server 2003 Boot.ini file
Many different switches will be available if you edit Boot.ini file.
For the available switch options, refer to the following information:
„
Microsoft Knowledge Base - Article ID: 833721
"Available switch options for the Windows XP and the Windows Server 2003 Boot.ini files"
If your system has a memory capacity in excess of 4GB in its installing, adding /PAE switch in Boot.ini file will enable
the system to be installed with over 4 GB of memory.
However, the Microsoft operating system products which support /PAE switch option are limited.
Refer to the following article in Microsoft Knowledge Base to check the supported products.
„
Microsoft Knowledge Base - Article ID: 291988
"A description of the 4 GB RAM tuning feature and the Physical Address Extension switch"
Below is the example on how to add /PAE switch to Boot.ini file.
1.
Click [Start], point to [Settings], and then click [Control Panel].
2.
In [Control Panel], double-click [System].
3.
Click the [Advanced] tab, and then click [Settings] under [Setup and Recovery].
4.
Under [System Setup], click [Edit] to open [Boot.ini].
5.
Add "/PAE" to [Operating Systems] section in [Boot.ini] file, and then save it.
<Example of Boot.ini file>
[boot loader]
timeout=30
default=multi(0)disk(0)rdisk(0)partition(2)\WINDOWS
[operating systems]
multi(0)disk(0)rdisk(0)partition(2)\WINDOWS="Windows Server 2003" /fastdetect
multi(0)disk(0)rdisk(0)partition(2)\WINDOWS="Windows Server 2003, PAE" /fastdetect /PAE
C:\CMDCONS\BOOTSECT.DAT="Microsoft Windows Recovery Console" /cmdcons
This is the end of editing Boot.ini file.
NOTE: If you choose one of the items in the "Default operating system" drop-down list
box in [Setup and Recovery] group box, you can make your system start automatically
from the switch you specified.
SETTING FOR COLLECTING MEMORY DUMP
(DEBUG INFORMATION)
Set for collecting memory dump using the procedure described in Chapter 5.
Appendix F
Product Configuration Record Table
Use this table for information about setup and system environment change.
Hardware
Main Unit
Processor
#1
#2
#3
#4
Memory
Group #1
Group #2
Group #3
Group #4
Group #5
Group #6
Group #7
Group #8
Monitor
Model name
Serial No.
Date Installed
Clock
Clock
Clock
Clock
Serial No.
Serial No.
Serial No.
Serial No.
Date Installed
Date Installed
Date Installed
Date Installed
Size
Size
Size
Size
Size
Size
Size
Size
Serial No.
Serial No.
Serial No.
Serial No.
Serial No.
Serial No.
Serial No.
Serial No.
Date Installed
Date Installed
Date Installed
Date Installed
Date Installed
Date Installed
Date Installed
Date Installed
Type
Model name
Serial No.
Date Installed
Hard Disk Drive (Standard)
Slot 0
Type
Capacity
Type number
Slot 1
Type
Capacity
Type number
Slot 2
Type
Capacity
Type number
Slot 3
Type
Capacity
Type number
Slot 4
Type
Capacity
Type number
Serial No.
Date Installed
Serial No.
Date Installed
Serial No.
Date Installed
Serial No.
Date Installed
Serial No.
Date Installed
F-2
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
Hard Disk Drive (Option)
Slot 0
Type
Capacity
Type number
Slot 1
Type
Capacity
Type number
Slot 2
Type
Capacity
Type number
Slot 3
Type
Capacity
Type number
Slot 4
Type
Capacity
Type number
Slot 5
Type
Capacity
Type number
Slot 6
Type
Capacity
Type number
Slot 7
Type
Capacity
Type number
Backup Device
Slot 1
Size
Model name
Slot 2
Size
Model name
PCI Slot #1
Model name
Serial No.
Date Installed
Serial No.
Date Installed
Serial No.
Date Installed
Serial No.
Date Installed
Serial No.
Date Installed
Serial No.
Date Installed
Serial No.
Date Installed
Serial No.
Date Installed
Capacity
Type number
Capacity
Type number
Serial No.
Date Installed
Serial No.
Date Installed
Serial No.
Date Installed
PCI Slot #2
Model name
Serial No.
Date Installed
Model name
Serial No.
Date Installed
Model name
Serial No.
Date Installed
Model name
Serial No.
Date Installed
Model name
Serial No.
Date Installed
PCI Slot #3
PCI Slot #4
PCI Slot #5
PCI Slot #6
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
PCI Slot #7
Model name
Serial No.
Date Installed
Model name
Serial No.
Date Installed
Model name
Serial No.
Date Installed
PCI Slot #8
PCI Slot #9
Printer
Model name
Manufacturer
Additional Cabinet for Disk
Model name
External Peripheral Device 1
Model name
Manufacturer
External Peripheral Device 2
Model name
Manufacturer
Display
Model name
Manufacturer
Keyboard
Model name
Manufacturer
Mouse
Model name
Manufacturer
Serial No.
Date Installed
Serial No.
Date Installed
Serial No.
Date Installed
Serial No.
Date Installed
Serial No.
Date Installed
Serial No.
Date Installed
Serial No.
Date Installed
F-3
F-4
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
Software
Firmware version
Operating System
Application of RUR media
File system
Bundled software installed
Licensed software installed
Application running when a failure occurred
† Apply
† FAT
† Others (
Name:
Name:
† HPFS
Version:
Version:
† NTFS
)
Appendix G
Rack Mount Kit
This section is intended to enable you to install the Rack Conversion Kit on the 140Hf securely and then mount the
server on a rack.
Always keep this guide near the server or the rack so that you may refer to it if necessary.
This guide contains the following topics on the Rack Conversion Kit.
„
How to install rack mount parts on the server and rack assembly
„
How to install the server on the rack
„
How to route cables for the server
G-2
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
Notes on Installing and Accessing the Rack Cabinet
CAUTION
Do not provide the wiring for the server to exceed the rating of the power supply.
To prevent burns, fires, and device damages, the power supplied to the server shall not
exceed the rating load of the power branch circuit. Contact your electric constructor or
the local power company for the requirements on the wiring and installation of electric
facilities.
Do not carry or install the rack cabinet only by a single person.
At least two persons are required to carry or install the rack. Failure to follow this
instruction may cause the rack to fall to result in personal injury and/or breakage of
surrounding devices. In particular, a high rack (such as 44U rack) is unstable if it is not
fixed by stabilizers. More than one person must always carry or install the rack while they
support it.
Do not install the rack cabinet so that the load may be concentrated on a specific point.
Install stabilizers on the rack so that the total load of the rack and devices mounted on
the rack is not concentrated on a singe point or join more than one rack with each other
to distribute the load. Failure to follow this instruction may cause the rack to fall to result
in personal injury.
Do not install components on the rack cabinet only by a single person.
At least two persons are required to install parts including the doors and trays for the
rack. Failure to follow this instruction may cause some parts to fall to be broken and/or to
result in personal injury.
Do not pull out a device from the rack if the rack is unstable.
Always pull out a device from the rack in the state that the rack is made stable (by the
installation of stabilizers or earthquake-resistant construction).
Do not leave more than one device being pulled out from the rack.
Pulling out more than one device from the rack may cause the rack to be fallen. Only pull
out a single device from the rack at a time.
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
Rack-mount Model
WARNING
Do not use the server in any unapproved place.
Install the server on a standard EIA 19-inch rack cabinet. Do not install the rack containing
the server in a place inappropriate to the rack installation environment.
Failure to follow these instructions may cause some bad influences to be imposed on your
server and other systems installed on the rack and also a fire or personal injury due to
falling of the rack may occur. For the detailed explanation on the place where your server
should be installed and the earthquake-resistant construction for the rack, refer to the
manual attached to the rack or contact your service representative.
Always install the server on a rack conforming to the relevant standard.
Install the server on a rack confirming to the EIA standard for the server to be used. Do not
use the server with installed on any other rack than standard EIA 19-inch rack or without the
installation on a proper rack. Failure to follow these instructions may cause your server to
operate incorrectly and/or personal injury or damages of surrounding devices to occur.
Contact your service representative for the racks available for your server.
CAUTION
Do not pinch your fingers with mechanical component.
Note sufficiently that your fingers may not be caught between a rail and another mechanical
part or cut by a rail at installation or removal of the server from the rack.
Do not push the release lever with your fingers.
The front sub-chassis can be unlocked by pressing the release tab on both sides. When
pressing the release tab, always use a tool such as a screwdriver. Pressing the tab with
your finger may cause a personal injury.
Do not install the server on a rack with leaving covers removed.
Do not install the server on a rack with the cover being removed. Failure to follow this
instruction may reduce the cooling effect in the server to result in some malfunction and/or
dusts to enter the server to result in a fire or electric shock.
G-3
G-4
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
Preparing for Mounting the Server on the Rack
This section describes the preparatory procedure required to install the server on a 19-inch rack.
The preparation consists of the following steps:
Step 1
Unpacking
Step 2
Preparing tools
Step 3
Turning server power off
Step 4
Removing components for tower model from server
Step 5
Installing rack conversion kit on server
IMPORTANT:
„
Before converting the server configuration for the tower model to that for
the rack mount model (or vice versa), always back up the important data.
„
To convert the server configuration for the rack mount model to that for
the tower model, follow the procedure reverse to that described in this
chapter
„
Store all the parts removed depending on the description in this chapter
carefully.
CAUTIONS
Always read "Notes on Use" at the top of the guide before starting the procedures described in this chapter.
The manuals attached to the server describe the notes on the server. Refer to the manuals also.
These notes are intended to protect personnel from danger. Never forget to read them.
The procedures in this chapter also include several notes.
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
STEP 1
UNPACKING
The Rack Conversion Kit is composed of the following parts. After unpacking, any parts are not missed or damaged
referring to the following figure and table.
1
2
6
7
9
8
16 (x12)
10
14
13
12
21
4
3
17 (x14)
22 (x2)
19 (x12)
18 (x8)
23
5
11
15 (x6)
20 (x4)
24
G-5
G-6
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
Packing List
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
Title
Slide rail assembly (L)
Slide rail assembly (R)
Rack base assembly
Rack bracket (L)
Rack bracket (R)
Handle (L)
Handle (R)
Cable arm
Adapter bracket
Arm bracket
Arm stopper
Front bezel (4U)
Front bezel (3U)
Key
Repeat tie
Screw (A)
Screw (B)
Screw (C)
Washer (A)
Washer (B)
Template
Name plate
23
24
LOGO label
User's Guide
Qty
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
6
12
14
8
12
4
1
2
1
1
Remarks
(CPIMSx#6-32UNCx8x3GF)
(CPIMSx5x10x3GF)
(PL-CPIMSx4x8x3GF)
(M5-14)
(PIWAx5x15BF)
Express5800/140Hf,
Express5800/140Hf
English edition (This guide)
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
STEP 2
PREPARING TOOLS
The following tools are required to conduct the preparation job based on this guide.
„
Phillips screwdriver
„
Flathead screwdriver
G-7
G-8
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
STEP 3
TURNING SERVER POWER OFF
Turn off the power of the server in the following procedure:
1.
Schedule the jobs required to convert the server configuration for the tower model to that for the rack mount
model (if the server has already been used in the configuration for the tower model).
2.
Back up the important data saved in the server using the procedure defined by the server OS (if the server has
already been used in the configuration for the tower model).
IMPORTANT: Before starting the conversion of the server configuration for the tower
model to that for the rack mount model (or vice versa), back up the important data saved in
the server.
3.
Set the server to the offline status using the procedure defined by the network OS (if the server has already
been used in the configuration for the tower model).
4.
Release the key lock on the front door and open the front door.
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
5.
Turn off the power of the server.
IMPORTANT: Always turn off the powers of the peripherals after turning off the power
of the server. Failure to follow it may cause the server to malfunction.
POWER switch
6.
Turn off the powers of peripherals if any.
7.
Pull out the plug of the power cord from the mating outlet. Then remove its receptacle from the server.
Lever
8.
Disconnect all interface cables from the respective connectors on the rear of the server.
G-9
G-10
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
STEP 4
SERVER
REMOVING COMPONENTS FOR TOWER MODEL FROM
IMPORTANT: A number of sensitive electronic parts are installed in the server. To
prevent the parts from being damaged by discharge of static electricity accumulated in your
body, make a part of your body contact with a grounding screw at a connector on the server
or a peripheral or an unpainted frame to discharge the static electricity before starting the
job.
To convert the server configuration for the tower model to that for the rack mount model, first remove the following
components:
„
Front door
„
Memory slot cover
„
Hinge lock bracket
„
Pedestals
„
Top and side covers
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
G-11
Removing Front Door
Remove the front door from the server in the following procedure:
1.
Open the front door and pull out it toward you with the bottom tab within the hinge being pushed down with
your finger.
2.
Lift the front door, remove the hinge pin at the top of the hinge, and remove the front door.
IMPORTANT: Keep the front door for future use.
Removing Memory Slot Cover
Remove the two captive screws to remove the memory slot cover from the front of the server.
G-12
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
Removing Hinge Lock Bracket
Remove the hinge lock bracket in the following procedure.
1.
Remove the three screws using the Phillips screwdriver.
2.
Remove the hinge lock bracket.
IMPORTANT: Keep the removed screws and hinge lock bracket for future use.
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
Removing Pedestals
Remove the pedestals in the following procedure.
1.
Place the server slowly and carefully so that the left side of the server faces upward.
2.
Remove the three screws (six screws in total) to remove the respective pedestal.
IMPORTANT: Keep the removed pedestals for future use.
CAUTION
Note sufficiently that your fingers or hands may not be caught in bottom of the
server when replacing the server. Doing so may cause a personal injury.
G-13
G-14
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
Removing Top and Side Covers
Remove the top and side covers in the following procedure:
1.
Place the server slowly and carefully so that the left side of the server faces upward.
2.
Remove a screw using the Phillips screwdriver.
3.
Slide the top cover toward the rear of the server. Then lift the cover to remove it.
4.
Slide the side cover toward the front of the server. Then remove the side cover.
IMPORTANT: Keep the removed screws and covers for future use.
Top cover
Side cover
CAUTION
Note sufficiently that your fingers or hands may not be caught in bottom of the
server when replacing the server or removing screws and pedestals from the
server. Doing so may cause a personal injury.
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
STEP 5
G-15
INSTALLING RACK CONVERSION KIT ON SERVER
IMPORTANT: A number of sensitive electronic parts are installed in the server. To
prevent the parts from being damaged by discharge of static electricity accumulated in your
body, make a part of your body contact with a grounding screw at a connector on the server
or a peripheral or an unpainted frame to discharge the static electricity before starting the
job.
Install the following components of the Rack Conversion Kit on the server in the following procedure:
„
Rack base assembly
„
Rack bracket (L/R)
„
Handle (L/R)
„
Memory slot cover
Installing Rack Base Assembly
Install the rack base assembly on the server in the following procedure:
1.
Align the rack base assembly with studs on the server, then slide the rack base assembly to the rear side of the
server to install it.
2.
Fix the rack base assembly with a screw (A).
Stud
Rack base assembly
Installing Rack Brackets (L and R)
Install the rack brackets (L and R) to the server in the following procedure.
1.
Place the server so that the left side of the server faces upward. Mount a screw (A) to the other side of the rack
base assembly.
G-16
2.
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
Mount the rack brackets (L and R) to the server with three screws (A) each.
Rack bracket (L)
Rack bracket (R)
IMPORTANT: Install the rack bracket (R) so that it inserted into the server as shown in
the enlarged view.
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
Installing Handles (L and R)
Fix the handles (L and R) by using two screws (A).
Handle (R)
Handle (L)
Installing Memory Slot Cover
Install the memory slot cover in the reverse order of removal, and fix it to the server with two thumb nuts.
Memory slot cover
G-17
G-18
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
Mounting the Server on the Rack
This section describes the procedure of mounting the server of the rack mounting model on a 19-inch rack sequentially.
Mount the server on a rack in the following steps:
Step 1
Installing components on rack
Step 2
Mounting server on rack
Step 3
Installing cable arm and front bezel
Step 4
Performing processes from server power-on to online setting
NOTES ON RACK AND SERVER
Always read "Notes on Use" at the top of the guide before starting the procedures described in this chapter.
The manuals attached to the server describe the notes on the server. Refer to the manuals also.
These notes are intended to protect personnel from danger. Never forget to read them.
The procedures in this chapter also include several notes.
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
STEP 1
G-19
INSTALLING COMPONENTS ON RACK
Install the slide rail assembly on the rack in the following procedure:
1.
Locate the positions on which the slide assembly is installed by using the template.
The template shows the positions on which the rails and core nuts are installed.
2.
Install the core nuts at the points identified by the template.
Install the core nuts on the inner side of the rack. On the front face, install two core nuts, which are attached to
the rack, at each of the right and left ends.
On the rear face, install two core nuts, which are attached to the rack, at the right end.
For each core nut, hang either of the top and bottom clips on an angle hole of the rack and the other clip on
the other hole by using a tool such as a flathead screwdriver.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that the core nuts installed at the right and left sides of the front
and rear ends of the rack are on the same level.
3.
After removing the screw located on the rear right of the server, install the adapter bracket with the screw
removed before.
Two screws removed from
the rear of the server.
Align the folded part along
with the side of the
chassis.
G-20
4.
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
Locate the slide rail assembly on the right side of the rack frame at the position defined by the template.
Stamp (located at the upper right
position of slide rail assembly)
Slide rail assembly
Stamp (located at the lower
right position of slide rail
assembly)
IMPORTANT: Check that the slide rail assembly is installed as follows:
„
The bracket face of the slide rail assembly is directed to the outside of the
rack.
„
The end with the slide bracket is directed to the rear of the rack.
Angle holes for screw settings are provided on the front and rear frames of the rack. Some
racks have frames with round marks by 1U. As shown in the figure below, place the slide
rail assembly so that one of the round marks is located at the upper right of the top screw
hole of the slide rail assembly.
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
5.
Fix the slide rail assembly with four screws (B) (two for each of the front and rear ends) and four washers (A)
(two for each of the front and rear ends).
IMPORTANT: Make sure that the four screw holes on the rail can securely be viewed
through the angle hole when the tip of the frame on the slide rail assembly is hit on the
frame with angle holes of the rack.
Make sure that the slide rail assembly is located on the level.
6.
G-21
Install the other slide rail assembly following the procedure in steps 4 and 5 above.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that the slide rail assembly is installed at the same height as
that already installed.
G-22
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
STEP 2
MOUNTING SERVER ON RACK
1.
Lift the server to the height at which the slide rails are installed on the rack by at least four persons (or using a
lift).
2.
Engage the inner rails installed on the sides of the server with the slide rails. Then insert the server into the
rack.
When the servers are latched on the way, push the right and left release levers to release the lock. Insert the
server to the rack further.
Slide rail assembly
Bearing rail
Plastic portions
Inner rail
Mating portion
Release lever
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
3.
G-23
To make sure that the server is mounted on the rack securely, hold the handles on the front of the server to pull
out or insert the server into the rack several times.
IMPORTANT: Push each release lever using a screwdriver or a similar tool. Pushing a
release lever with your fingers may cause the fingers to be caught and thus injured.
While the server is pushed into the rack, it may not be pushed further due to some lock.
This is because the lock lever disables the server to be pushed into the rack. Make the lock
lever level to release the lock. Then push the server slowly into the rack with keeping the
release of the lock.
G-24
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
STEP 3 INSTALLING CABLE ARM AND FRONT BEZEL
Installing Cable Bracket
Install the cable arm to the rear of the server with two screws (C).
Installing Arm Bracket
1.
Install the arm bracket on the mount face at the rear of the rack.
Mount face
Mount face
NOTE: Installation procedure for arm bracket depends on the distance between the mount
faces at the front and rear of the rack.
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
„
G-25
For the distance between the mount faces at the front and rear of the rack being 700 or 760 mm:
Fix the arm bracket to the core nuts installed on the mount face of the rear of the rack in the step 2 of "Step 1"
with two screws (B) in the direction as shown in the figure below.
Arm bracket
Core nut installation
position
„
For the distance between the mount faces at the front and rear faces of the rack being 900 mm:
Fix the arm bracket to the core nuts installed on the mount face of the rear of the rack in step 2 in "Step 1"
with two screws (B) in the direction as shown in the figure below.
Core nut installation position
Arm bracket
Core nut installation position
G-26
2.
„
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
Install the other end of the cable arm on the arm bracket installed in step 1.
For the distance between the mount faces at the front and rear of the rack being 700 mm:
Fix the arm bracket with four screws (C) and four washers (B) at the position shown in the figure below.
Arm bracket
„
For the distance between the mount faces at the front and rear of the rack being 743 mm to 760 mm:
Fix the arm bracket with four screws (C) and four washers (B) at the position shown in the figure below.
Arm bracket
„
For the distance between the mount faces at the front and rear of the rack being 760 or 900 mm:
Fix the arm bracket with four screws (C) and four washers (B) at the position shown in the figure below (the
figure below shows the example with the distance between the mount faces at the front and rear of the rack
being 900 mm).
Arm bracket
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
Installing Arm Stopper
When installing the server into the rack, fix the arm stopper to the slide rail assembly with two screws (C).
Viewed from inside
Arm stopper
Push the arm stopper in the direction shown by
arrow mark so that the folded portion hits the end,
and then secure it with screws.
G-27
G-28
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
Checking Slide Installation Status and Fixing
1.
Push the server into the rack once to check the installation position.
NOTE: Make sure that the four screw holes at the upper left and right sides on the front of
the server are fit to the core nuts. If the four positions are not fit at all, the slide rail
assembly or the core nuts may be installed incorrectly. If so, the adjacent units cannot be
installed without clearance. Confirm the installation positions and make the reinstallation
from the first step.
2.
Pull out or push the server into the rack for several times to confirm that the slides move smoothly.
3.
Connect the power cords and all interface cables to the server.
IMPORTANT: When routing the cable, pay attention that the cables are not caught, bent,
or loose when sliding the server.
4.
Fix the server to the rack with four screws (B) and four washers (A) after making sure the positions of core
nuts.
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
G-29
Installing Front Bezel
1.
Install the front bezel.
Two front bezels, 3U and 4U, are provided. First install the 3U bezel, then 4U bezel. (To remove the bezel,
first remove 4U, then 3U.)
2.
Attach the nameplate and the LOGO label to the front bezel.
LOGO label
Name plate
G-30
Bull NovaScale T880 User's Guide
STEP 4
PERFORMING PROCESSES FROM SERVER POWER-ON
TO ONLINE SETTING
Make sure that the POST terminates normally referring to the User's Guide attached to the server.
Refer to the guide on the OS installed in the server for the procedure of configuring online communication through
network.
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement